Home

NETGEAR 7300 Series Switch User Manual

1. ar poso retramsmiltenber eal acce adio in Ga e rei tana ama aie 9 28 no ip aspi retransmitHinterval ses Age ee e os ip OST transmil delay ete EE 9 28 A eSa aaae REEERE 9 28 jeg dem EEN ELT IDE Sion cea POR E 9 28 Jp UCET DUO aa 9 29 no ip rip authentication m 9 29 He BIS Pe EE 9 30 no ip rip receive version ii SOU Uhu EE E 9 30 Contents xix 202 10009 01_060204 no ip rip send version A aaa al no ip route T Eegenen T nem oou T iens ee 9 81 e A A E VE A A A A ET 9 31 preda eil sacada n OES eil TT e DECHE CS TN eeben eege 9 32 ip routing ace TER ise nns T ps cen mous 9 32 asa e EE 9 32 BEISSEL aa A P 9 33 le 9 33 px ue A SE DE SE RIPI ees ee D e EE 9 34 router id iuc I R 9 POO meras io tia NO TOUTING airis D show arp SCENE Eer Set SE means piesa KEE Set T 9 AMI BUT ai ados 9 36 pap en OWEN BA S gu A eda E 9 37 show ip interface brief honos T eo pate ds TE Ps MEC IDEE Uoc ARS SPON D DSP e tet uud eR rre aiit utes Oe show ip ospf area Solids diia Geet G 9 41 SI OSE betur bot MPH rm 9 42 show ip ospf interface pmo a show p ospi Inte ae EE E show i
2. Contents 202 10009 01 060204 set igmp PORTER ee T biased Bo EHE TE ee See bids T 8 51 WEE 8 51 rid ler sad SON En pi 8 51 set igmp droopmembershipintervil A A E A E A E T E 8 52 no set igmp groupmembershipinterval diesen Piscis esae 8 52 Bet imp dea emere all eric de Poe E Di E bated Reo p a ee 8 52 no ser tmp IntsrTacemp de all usa Re set igmp maxresponse PEE Ges GENEE P E 8 53 MO setligmp MAPEO MM 8 53 sei iomp TMH STANTS Ee ne set iomp DREES 1s xb a ipa qc fus show gmrp configuration show gvrp configuration show igmpsnooping show mac address table gmrp show mac address table igmpsnooping ssssseeenene 8 58 show mac address table mullicast ori 8 58 show mac address table Stati susan rar ADO show mac address table staticfiltering essen 8 59 show mac address table stats pud egene eege Seed eee T TM 8 60 e a BE DO BO OE PO a show port protocol ici See ee SES Hu SEA 8 61 e A E WEE 8 62 show storm control fra yece E SNOW CE UI TT RE 8 64 show vlan port Gees GE m pe m 8 65 A O le Ree 97 EE 8 66 EI Lt EE 8 66 Contents 202 10009 01_060204 xi no snmp trap link status snmp trap TL l no snmp trap link status all S
3. 9 60 Contents 202 10009 01 060204 no ip wp imer adverse ee bern ss rp ead a rait aa a ac pe ac ga aa Rd Chapter 10 CLI Commands Differentiated Services EE AA A A L A A TE A E 10 2 daN E e E TOS NET e NR CRES le ca add 10 3 CASI ATION ricino 10 4 A ie eT eR PHER OPER a eS 10 4 cassini o A E LO match any 10 5 rz eae i is E 10 5 no Man cues eS ria UE maten E E E 10 6 ee EE 10 7 match dstl4port ere nage HIP Sege 10 7 Maserati 10 8 match ip precedence EN e match ip tos si Seegen Ai Geen Aide 10 9 EE de O iU REED rd UE ERN T HUE 10 9 match source address mac Ee Ee MG ph qur a 10 10 MAA E 10 10 Mac VA sicarios A Eed M 10 11 Pale COO DICES taaan nad pras pouce aab x lada 10 11 pandwidihi KODS M TET EE e Ue he bandwidth percent mu KEEN nde Mm pi 10 13 EE ee 10 13 DOTE AA A WE uL A cra MIA ela A tn TT E oA IAM AMD 10 14 police simple edad 10 15 Service Commands EE SEENEN di EE E E cies 10 16 xxii Contents 202 10009 01_060204 SOM TES el show diffserv M 10 19 SNOW OMNIA EE 10 19 show diffserv service p inet eer donet bep rer rere rrr Pere pm
4. Format no protocol group lt groupid gt vlanid Mode VLAN database Switching Commands 8 43 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software protocol vlan group This command adds the physical lt slot port gt interface to the protocol based VLAN identified by lt groupid gt A group may have more than one interface associated with it Each interface and protocol combination can only be associated with one group If adding an interface to a group causes any conflicts with protocols currently associated with the group this command will fail and the interface s will not be added to the group Default none Format protocol vlan group lt groupid gt Mode Interface Config no protocol vlan group This command removes the interface from this protocol based VLAN group that is identified by this lt groupid gt If all is selected all ports will be removed from this protocol group Format no protocol vlan group lt groupid gt Mode Interface Config protocol vian group all This command adds all physical interfaces to the protocol based VLAN identified by lt groupid gt A group may have more than one interface associated with it Each interface and protocol combination can only be associated with one group If adding an interface to a group causes any conflicts with protocols currently associated with the group this command will fail and the interface s will not be adde
5. Quick Start up Factory Defaults Table 6 8 Quick Start up Factory Defaults Command Details clear config Enter yes when the prompt pops up to clear all the configurations made to the switch copy system running config nvram startup config Enter yes when the prompt pops up that asks if you want to save the configurations made to the switch reload OR Cold Boot the Switch Enter yes when the prompt pops up that asks if you want to reset the system This is the users choice either reset the switch or cold boot the switch both work effectively Quick Start up 6 7 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software 6 8 202 10009 01_060204 Quick Start up User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Chapter 7 Mode based CLI The CLI groups all the commands in appropriate modes according to the nature of the command A sample of the CLI command modes are described below Each of the command modes support specific 7300 Series L3 Switch commands e User Exec Mode e Privileged Exec Mode e Global Config Mode e Vlan Mode e Interface Config Mode e Line Config Mode e Policy Map Mode e Policy Class Mode e Class Map Mode e Router Config OSPF Mode Router Config RIP Mode DHCP Pool Configuration Mode The Command Mode table captures the command modes the prompts visible in that mode and the exit method from
6. Routing Commands 9 47 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Hello Interval Dead Interval Iftransit Delay Interval Retransmit Interval Authentication Type State Neighbor State Is the configured hello interval for the OSPF virtual interface Is the configured dead interval for the OSPF virtual interface Is the configured transit delay for the OSPF virtual interface Is the configured retransmit interval for the OSPF virtual inter face Is the configured authentication type of the OSPF virtual inter face The OSPF Interface States are down loopback waiting point to point designated router and backup designated router This is the state of the OSPF interface Displays the neighbor state show ip ospf virtual link brief This command displays the OSPF Virtual Interface information for all areas in the system Format Mode Area Id Neighbor Hello Interval Dead Interval Retransmit Interval Transit Delay show ip rip show ip ospf virtual link brief Privileged EXEC and User EXEC Is the area id of the requested OSPF area Is the neighbor interface of the OSPF virtual interface Is the configured hello interval for the OSPF virtual interface Is the configured dead interval for the OSPF virtual interface Is the configured retransmit interval for the OSPF virtual inter face Is the configured transit delay for the OSPF virtual in
7. show ip stats This command displays IP statistical information Refer to RFC 1213 for more information about the fields that are displayed This command takes no options Format show ip stats Mode Privileged EXEC and User EXEC show ip vian This command displays the VLAN routing information for all VLANs with routing enabled in the system Format show ip vlan Mode Privileged EXEC and User EXEC MAC Address used by Routing VLANs Is the MAC Address associated with the internal bridge router interface IBRI The same MAC Address is used by all VLAN routing interfaces It will be displayed above the per VLAN information VLAN ID Is the identifier of the VLAN Logical Interface Indicates the logical slot and port associated with the VLAN rout ing interface IP Address Displays the IP Address associated with this VLAN Subnet Mask Indicates the subnet mask that is associated with this VLAN show router rip interface This command displays information related to a particular RIP interface Format show ip rip interface lt slot port gt Mode Privileged EXEC and User EXEC Interface Is the unit slot port identifying each interface This is a config ured value IP Address The IP source address used by the specified RIP interface This is a configured value Send version The RIP version s used when sending updates on the specified interface The types are none RIP 1 RIP 1c RIP 2 This is a configured value 9 52
8. Auto Uplink Auto Uplink technology also called MDI MDIX eliminates the need to worry about crossover vs straight through Ethernet cables Auto Uplink will accommodate either type of cable to make the right connection AVL tree Binary tree having the property that for any node in the tree the difference in height between the left and right subtrees of that node is no more than 1 B BPDU See Bridge Protocol Data Unit on page 4 Backbone The part of a network used as a primary path for transporting traffic between network segments Bandwidth The information capacity measured in bits per second that a channel could transmit Bandwidth examples include 10 Mbps for Ethernet 100 Mbps for Fast Ethernet and 1000 Mbps I Gbps for Gigabit Ethernet Baud The signaling rate of a line that is the number of transitions voltage or frequency changes made per second Also known as line speed BootP See Bootstrap Protocol on page 4 Glossary C 3 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Bootstrap Protocol An Internet protocol that enables a diskless workstation to discover its own IP address the IP address of a BootP server on the network and a file to be loaded into memory to boot the machine This enables the workstation to boot without requiring a hard or floppy disk drive Bridge Protocol Data Unit BPDU is the IEEE 802 1D MAC Bridge Management
9. Main Menus Management e Switch e Routing e Traffic Management 4 6 Web Based Management Interface 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Smart Wizard Secondary Menus The Secondary Menus under the Main Menu contain a host of options that you can use to configure your switch The online help contains a detailed description of the features on each screen You can click the help or the question mark at the top right of each screen to view the help menu topics The Secondary Menus are detailed below with cross references to the sections in this manual that contain the corresponding command descriptions Management Switch System see System Information and Statistics Commands on page 8 1 Utilities see System Utilities on page 8 112 Access see the following sections e Administration Console Telnet Interface on page 3 1 e Management Commands on page 8 18 Security see Security Commands on page 8 95 and User Account Management Commands on page 8 90 e Port Access Control show dot1x on page 8 106 e RADIUS see show radius statistics on page 8 110 e PoE see FSM7326P Power Over Ethernet Commands on page 13 1 Port see show port on page 8 61 MAC Addresses see System Information and Statistics Commands on page 8 1 Spanning Tree see Spanning Tree Commands on page 8 77 Link Aggrega
10. Packet Length Errors Represents the total number of VRRP packets received with packet length less than length of VRRP header Routing Commands 9 55 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software split horizon This command sets the RIP split horizon mode Default simple Format split horizon none simple poison Mode Router RIP Config no split horizon This command sets the default RIP split horizon mode Format no split horizon Mode Router RIP Config trapflags This command enables OSPF traps Default Enabled Format trapflags Mode Router OSPF Config no trapflags This command disables OSPF traps Format no trapflags Mode Router OSPF Config vlan routing This command creates routing on a VLAN The vlanid value has a range from 1 to 4094 Format vlan routing vlanid Mode VLAN Database no vlan routing This command deletes routing on a VLAN The lt vlanid gt value has a range from 1 to 4094 9 56 Routing Commands 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Format no vlan routing lt vlanid gt Mode VLAN Database ip vrrp This command sets the virtual router ID on an interface for Virtual router configuration in the router The parameter lt vrID gt is the virtual router ID which has an integer value range from 1 to 255 Default There is no default value for vrID Format ip vrrp lt
11. Topology Change Boolean value of the Topology Change parameter for the switch indicating if a topology change is in progress on any port assigned to the common and internal spanning tree Designated Root Root Path Cost Value of the Root Path Cost parameter for the common and inter nal spanning tree Root Port Identifier Root Port Max Age Derived value Root Port Bridge Forward Delay Derived value Hello Time Configured value Bridge Hold Time Minimum time between transmission of Configuration Bridge Protocol Data Units BPDUs CST Regional Root Regional Root Path Cost Associated FIDs List of forwarding database identifiers currently associated with this instance Associated VLANs List of VLAN IDs currenty associated with this instance When the brief optional parameter is included this command displays spanning tree settings for the bridge In this case the following details are displayed Bridge Priority Configured value Bridge Identifier Bridge Max Age TConfigured value Bridge Hello Time Configured value Bridge Forward Delay Configured value Bridge Hold Time Minimum time between transmission of Configuration Bridge Protocol Data Units BPDUs 8 78 Switching Commands 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software show spanning tree interface This command displays the settings and parameters for a specific switch port within the common and internal spanni
12. Traffic Conditioning Assign a DiffServ traffic conditioning policy as specified by the policy commands to an interface in the incoming direction Service Provisioning Assign a DiffServ service provisioning policy as specified by the policy commands to an interface in the outgoing direction CLI Commands Differentiated Services 10 15 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software The service commands attach a defined policy to a directional interface Only one policy may be assigned at any one time to an interface in a particular direction The policy type in out must match the interface direction to which it is attached This set of commands consists of service addition removal The CLI command root is service policy service policy This command attaches a policy to an interface in a particular direction The command can be used in the Interface Config mode to attach a policy to a specific interface Alternatively the command can be used in the Global Config mode to attach this policy to all system interfaces The direction value is either in or out The lt policyname gt parameter is the name of an existing DiffServ policy whose type must match the interface direction Note that this command causes a service to create a reference to the policy Note This command effectively enables DiffServ on an interface in a particular direction There is no separate interface adminis
13. 0 2147483647 Mode Router OSPF Config no exit overflow interval This command configures the default exit overflow interval for OSPF Format no exit overflow interval Mode Router OSPF Config external Isdb limit This command configures the external LSDB limit for OSPF If the value is 1 then there is no limit When the number of non default AS external LSAs in a router s link state database reaches the external LSDB limit the router enters overflow state The router never holds more than the external LSDB limit non default AS external LS As in it database The external LSDB limit MUST be set identically in all routers attached to the OSPF backbone and or any regular OSPF area The range for limit is 1 to 2147483647 Default 1 Format external lsdb limit lt 1 2147483647 gt Mode Router OSPF Config no external Isdb limit This command configures the default external LSDB limit for OSPF Format no external lsdb limit Mode Router OSPF Config Routing Commands 9 19 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software hostroutesaccept This command enables the RIP hostroutesaccept mode Default Enabled Format hostroutesaccept Mode Router RIP Config no hostroutesaccept This command disables the RIP hostroutesaccept mode Format no hostroutesaccept Mode Router RIP Config ip address This command configures an IP address on an interface The value for lt
14. EAPOL Logoff Frames Received The number of EAPOL logoff frames that have been received by this authenticator 8 108 Switching Commands 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Last EAPOL Frame Version The protocol version number carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame Last EAPOL Frame Source The source MAC address carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame EAP Response ld Frames Received The number of EAP response identity frames that have been received by this authenticator EAP Response Frames Received The number of valid EAP response frames other than resp id frames that have been received by this authenticator EAP Request Id Frames Transmitted The number of EAP request identity frames that have been transmitted by this authenticator EAP Request Frames Transmitted The number of EAP request frames other than request identity frames that have been transmitted by this authenticator Invalid EAPOL Frames Received The number of EAPOL frames that have been received by this authenticator in which the frame type is not rec ognized EAP Length Error Frames Received The number of EAPOL frames that have been received by this authenticator in which the frame type is not rec ognized show dot1x users This command displays 802 1x port security user information for locally configured users Format show dot1x users lt slot port gt Mode Privileged EX
15. The username is not case sensitive Six user names can be defined Format users name username Mode Global Config no users name This command removes an operator Format no users name username Mode Global Config Note The admin user account cannot be deleted 8 92 Switching Commands 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software users passwd This command changes the password of an existing operator User password should not be more than eight characters in length If a user is authorized for authentication or encryption is enabled password must be eight alphanumeric characters in length The username and password are not case sensitive When a password is changed a prompt will ask for the operator s former password If none press enter Default No Password Format users passwd lt username gt Mode Global Config no users passwd This command sets the password of an existing operator to blank When a password is changed a prompt will ask for the operator s former password If none press enter Format no users passwd lt username gt Mode Global Config users snmpv3 accessmode This command specifies the snmpv3 access privileges for the specified login user The valid accessmode values are readonly or readwrite The lt username gt is the login user name for which the specified access mode will apply Default readwrite for admin user readonly
16. The mode is one of the following 802 1d IEEE 802 1D compliant STP mode is used fast Fast STP mode is used off STP is turned off Switching Commands 8 67 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software spanning tree bpdumigrationcheck This command enables BPDU migration check on a given interface The all option enables BPDU migration check on all interfaces Format spanning tree bpdumigrationcheck lt slot port gt all Mode Global Config no spanning tree bpdumigrationcheck This command disables BPDU migration check on a given interface The all option disables BPDU migration check on all interfaces Format no spanning tree bpdumigrationcheck lt slot port gt all Mode Global Config speed This command sets the speed and duplex setting for the interface Format speed 100 10 half duplex full duplex 1000 full duplex Mode Interface Config Acceptable values are 100h 100BASE T half duplex 100f 100BASE T full duplex 10h 10BASE T half duplex 10f 100BASE T full duplex speed all This command sets the speed and duplex setting for all interfaces Format speed all 100 10 half duplex full duplex 1000 full duplex 8 68 Switching Commands 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Mode Global Config Acceptable values are 100h 100BASE T half duplex 100f 100BASE T full
17. User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software NETGEAR NETGEAR Inc 4500 Great America Parkway Santa Clara CA l 202 10009 01_060204 June 200 202 10009 01_060204 2004 by NETGEAR Inc June 2004 FullManual All rights reserved Technical Support Please register to obtain technical support Please retain your proof of purchase and warranty information To register your product get product support or obtain product information and product documentation go to http www netgear com If you do not have access to the World Wide Web you may register your product by filling out the registration card and mailing it to NETGEAR customer service You will find technical support information at http www netgear com through the customer service area If you want to contact technical support by telephone see the support information card for the correct telephone number for your country Trademarks NETGEAR is a registered trademark of NETGEAR INC Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation Other brand and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders Information is subject to change without notice All rights reserved Statement of Conditions In the interest of improving internal design operational function and or reliability NETGEAR reserves the right to make changes to the products described in this document without notice NETGEAR
18. iusta 8 113 CAN sie ofa ar MN TRE I ERE TE TN T 8 113 clear vlan COG NP M n A i TE E i lasci quatn slab dc ruso kac nd UK sadi rp ER eua xe DN ESSE IEN sa EE Chapter 9 Routing Commands Rouino COI a 9 1 EE edel 9 1 ne e E eel area SS UNE 9 2 no area authentication Vies en iue T Mus UR dcos Guan 9 2 area ET e Te EE no area nssa bino Pii Pisas acia 9 2 area stub MUR nint Rd EN Musee bud inicie Hus Eege pud do EOM 9 4 rt ao DIU E 9 5 Higg SUD BUDE nad 9 5 NS poo sb SUO DS ENEE rasa apo ai ana t on RR E arca M SLM LLL NE cee pice nash peasants TT EE 9 5 no area virtual link ode eeng Rue Seege OS area virtual link authentication iii a a no area virtuali authentication siii 9 6 area virtual link dead interval essere mn 9 6 xvi Contents 202 10009 01 060204 area virtual link hello interval no area virtual link hello interval Seege S ier Ges o nea area virtual link retransmit interval ssssesssseeseeeeeeen enne no area virtual link retransmit interval area virual hink transmit delay soi ai a A no area virtual link transmit delay sse 9 8 U o E E E E P ee T E Ee 9 8 ROA ET arp ee M M T 9 9 no arp cachesize didi ends Geesen ion dls Geisen a ANA Ri 9 9 hio ap CSCI ini ds TO
19. Config Switching config spanningtree bridge Global spanning tree hello time lt 1 10 gt hellotime lt 1 10 gt Config Global no spanning tree hello time Config A 28 IS CLI Mapping 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Table 13 2 IS CLI Mapping continued CLI Command Package 7300 Series L3 Switch Command Mode Syntax Switching config spanningtree bridge Global spanning tree forward time lt 4 30 gt forwarddelay lt 4 30 gt Config Global no spanning tree forward time Config Switching config spanningtree bridge priority Removed lt 0 61440 gt Switching config spanningtree cst port Interface spanning tree mst 0 cost pathcost lt slot port gt Config lt 1 200000000 gt auto lt 1 200000000 auto gt Interface no spanning tree mst 0 cost Config Switching config spanningtree cst port priority Interface spanning tree mst 0 port priority lt slot port gt lt 0 240 gt Config lt 0 240 gt Interface no spanning tree mst 0 port priority Config Switching config spanningtree cst port Interface spanning tree edgeport edgeport lt slot port gt lt true false gt Config Interface no spanning tree edgeport Config Switching config spanningtree mst create Global spanning tree mst instance lt mstid gt lt mstid gt Config Switching config spanningtree mst delete Global no spanning tree mst instance lt mstid gt
20. Interface Config mode this command maps an 802 1p priority to an internal traffic class for a specific interface The command in either modes is only available on platforms that support priority to traffic class mapping on a per port basis and the number of available traffic classes may vary with the platform Format classofservice dotlpmapping lt userpriority gt traffic class gt Mode Global Config or Interface Config show classofservice dot1pmapping This command displays the current 802 1p priority mapping to internal traffic classes for a specific interface The slot port parameter is required on platforms that support priority to traffic class mapping on a per port basis Platforms that support priority to traffic class mapping on a per port basis Format show classofservice dotlpmapping lt slot port gt Platforms that do not support priority to traffic class mapping on a per port basis Format Show classofservice dotlpmapping Mode Privileged EXEC and User EXEC vian port priority all This command configures the port priority assigned for untagged packets for all ports presently plugged into the device The range for the priority is 0 7 Any subsequent per port configuration will override this configuration setting Format vlan port priority all lt priority gt Mode Global Config 8 16 Switching Commands 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software vian pr
21. Port GMRP Mode Port GVRP Mode show igmpsnooping seconds The factory default is 60 centiseconds 0 6 seconds The finest granularity of specification is 1 centisecond 0 01 sec onds This Leave All Time controls how frequently LeaveAll PDUs are generated A LeaveAll PDU indicates that all registrations will shortly be deregistered Participants will need to rejoin in order to maintain registration There is an instance of this timer on a per Port per GARP participant basis The Leave All Period Timer is set to a random value in the range of LeaveAllTime to 1 5 LeaveAllTime Permissible values are 200 to 6000 centisec onds 2 to 60 seconds The factory default is 1000 centiseconds 10 seconds The finest granularity of specification is 1 centisec ond 0 01 seconds Indicates the GMRP administrative mode for the port It may be enabled or disabled If this parameter is disabled Join Time Leave Time and Leave All Time have no effect The factory default is disabled Indicates the GVRP administrative mode for the port It may be enabled or disabled If this parameter is disabled Join Time Leave Time and Leave All Time have no effect The factory default is disabled This command displays IGMP Snooping information Configured information is displayed whether or not IGMP Snooping is enabled Status information is only displayed when IGMP Snooping is enabled Format Mode Admin Mode Query Interval Time show igmpsno
22. Privileged clear counters lt slot port gt EXEC Switching clear stats switch Privileged EXEC Switching clear igmpsnooping Privileged clear igmpsnooping EXEC A 32 IS CLI Mapping 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Table 13 2 IS CLI Mapping continued CLI Command Package 7300 Series L3 Switch Command Mode Syntax Switching logout Privileged logout EXEC Switching show users info Privileged show users EXEC Switching show loginsession Privileged show loginsession EXEC Switching config users add lt name gt Global users name lt username gt Config Switching config users delete lt name gt Global no users name lt username gt Config Switching config users passwd lt user gt Global users passwd lt username gt Config Switching config users snmpv3 Global users snmpv3 authentication authentication user none md5 Config username none md5 sha sha Global no users snmpv3 authentication Config username Switching config users snmpv3 encryption Global users snmpv3 encryption user none des key gt Config username none des key Global no users snmpv3 encryption Config username Switching config users snmpv3 accessmode Global users snmpv3 accessmode user lt readonly readwrite gt Config username readonly readwrite Global no users snmpv3 accessmode
23. Privileged no network javamode EXEC Switching config prompt lt system prompt gt Privileged set prompt lt promptstring gt EXEC Switching config serial baudrate lt speed gt Line serial baudrate 1200 2400 4800 Config 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 Switching config serial timeout lt 0 160 gt Line serial timeout lt 0 160 gt Config Switching config serviceport parms lt ipaddr gt Privileged set serviceport ip lt ipaddr gt lt netmask gt gateway EXEC lt netmask gt gateway Switching config serviceport protocol none Privileged set serviceport protocol none bootp bootp dhcp EXEC dhcp Switching config snmpcommunity Global snmp server community ro lt name gt accessmode lt ro rw gt lt name gt Config Global snmp server community rw lt name gt Config Switching config snmpcommunity create Global snmp server community lt name gt lt name gt Config Switching config snmpcommunity delete Global no snmp server community lt name gt lt name gt Config Switching config snmpcommunity ipaddr Global snmp server community ipaddr lt ipaddr gt lt name gt Config lt ipaddr gt lt name gt Global no snmp server community ipaddr Config lt name gt Switching config snmpcommunity ipmask Global snmp server community ipmask lt ipmask gt lt name gt Config lt ipmask gt lt name gt A 24 IS CLI Mapping 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Softwa
24. This command configures the monetary default cost for the stub area The operator must specify the area id and an integer value between 1 16777215 Format area lt areaid gt default cost lt 1 16777215 gt Mode Router OSPF Config area nssa This command configures the specified areaid to function as an NSSA Format area lt areaid gt nssa Mode Router OSPF Config no area nssa This command disables nssa from the specified area id Format no area lt areaid gt nssa Mode Router OSPF Config 9 2 Routing Commands 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software area nssa default info originate This command configures the metric value and type for the default route advertised into the NSSA The optional metric parameterspecifieds the metric of the default route and is to be in a range of 1 16777215 If no metric is specified the default valueis The metric type can be comparable nssa external 1 or non comparable nssa external 2 Format area areaid nssa default info originate lt metric gt comparable non comparable Mode Router OSPF Config area nssa no redistribute OSPF This command configures the NSSA ABR so that learned external routes will not be redistributed to the NSSA Format area lt areaid gt nssa no redistribute Mode Router OSPF Config area nssa no summary OSPF This command configures the NSSA so that summary LSAs are not advertised
25. Type show port channel lt logical slot port gt all Privileged EXEC The logical slot and the logical port The name of this port channel LAG You may enter any string of up to 15 alphanumeric characters Indicates whether the Link is up or down May be enabled or disabled The factory default is enabled This object determines whether or not to send a trap when link status changes The factory default is enabled The Spanning Tree Protocol Administrative Mode associated with the port or port channel LAG The possible values are Disable Spanning tree is disabled for this port Enable Spanning tree is enabled for this port A listing of the ports that are members of this port channel LAG in slot port notation There can be a maximum of eight ports assigned to a given port channel LAG Speed of the port channel port This field displays the status designating whether a particular port channel LAG is statically or dynamically maintained The possible values of this field are Static indicating that the port channel is statically maintained and Dynamic indicating that the port channel is dynamically maintained Switching Commands 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Active Ports show storm control This field lists the ports that are actively participating in the port channel LAG This command displays switch configuration informati
26. config authentication login create The default login list cannot be deleted Switching Commands 8 95 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Format no authentication login lt listname gt Mode Global Config clear dot1x statistics This command resets the 802 1x statistics for the specified port or for all ports Format clear dot1x statistics lt slot port gt all Mode Privileged EXEC clear radius statistics This command is used to clear all RADIUS statistics Format clear radius statistics Mode Privileged EXEC dot1x defaultlogin This command assigns the authentication login list to use for non configured users for 802 1x port security This setting is over ridden by the authentication login list assigned to a specific user if the user is configured locally If this value is not configured users will be authenticated using local authentication only Format dot1x defaultlogin listname Mode Global Config dot1x initialize This command begins the initialization sequence on the specified port This command is only valid if the control mode for the specified port is auto If the control mode is not auto an error will be returned Format dot1x initialize lt slot port gt Mode Privileged EXEC 8 96 Switching Commands 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software dot1x login This command assigns t
27. device can handle all of the incoming data This is particularly important where the sending device is capable of sending data much faster than the receiving device can receive it There are many flow control mechanisms One of the most common flow control protocols for asynchronous communication is called xon xoff In this case the receiving device sends a an xoff message to the sending device when its buffer is full The sending device then stops sending data When the receiving device is ready to receive more data it sends an xon signal Forwarding When a frame is received on an input port on a switch the address is checked against the lookup table If the lookup table has recorded the destination address the frame is automatically forwarded on an output port Glossary C 7 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Full duplex A system that allows packets to be transmitted and received at the same time and in effect doubles the potential throughput of a link G GARP See Generic Attribute Registration Protocol on page 8 GARP Information Propagation GIP is the propagation of information between GARP participants for the same application in a bridge is carried out by a GIP component GARP Multicast Registration Protocol GMRP provides a mechanism that allows Bridges and end stations to dynamically register and subsequently de register Group membership in
28. loopback waiting point to point designated router and backup designated router This is the state of the OSPF interface Designated Router Is the router ID representing the designated router Backup Designated Router Is the router ID representing the backup designated router Number of Link Events The number of link events Metric Cost Is the cost of the ospf interface This is a configured value show ip ospf interface brief This command displays brief information for the IFO object or virtual interface tables This command takes no options Format show ip ospf interface brief Mode Privileged EXEC and User EXEC Slot Port Is the unit slot port identifying each interface OSPF Admin Mode States whether OSPF is enabled or disabled on a router interface This is a configured value Routing Commands 9 43 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software OSPF Area ID Router Priority Hello Interval Dead Interval Retransmit Interval Transit Delay Interval LSA Ack Interval Represents the OSPF Area Id for the specified interface This is a configured value A number representing the OSPF Priority for the specified inter face This is a configured value A number representing the OSPF Hello Interval for the specified interface This is a configured value A number representing the OSPF Dead Interval for the specified interface This is a configured value A number r
29. lt areaid gt lt neighbor gt OSPF lt neighborid gt Config Routing config router ospf Router exit overflow interval exoverfolwinterval OSPF lt 0 2147483647 gt lt 0 2147483647 gt Config Router no exit overflow interval OSPF Config Routing config router ospf extlsdblimit Router external Isdb limit lt 1 2147483647 gt lt 1 2147483647 gt OSPF Config Router no external Isdb limit OSPF Config Routing config router id lt routerid gt Router router id lt ipaddress gt OSPF Config Routing config router route create Global ip route lt networkaddr gt lt networkaddr gt lt subnetmask gt Config lt subnetmask gt lt nexthopip gt 0 255 lt nexthopip gt metric Routing config router route delete Global no ip route lt networkaddr gt lt networkaddr gt lt subnetmask gt Config lt subnetmask gt lt nexthopip gt lt nexthopip gt IS CLI Mapping A 19 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Table 13 2 IS CLI Mapping continued CLI Command Package 7300 Series L3 Switch Command Mode Syntax Routing config router route staticpreference Global ip route distance lt 1 255 gt lt local static gt lt 0 255 gt Config Routing config config router route default Global ip route default lt nexthopip gt create lt nexthopip gt Config Routing config router route default delete Global no ip route default lt
30. lt policyname gt lt in out gt Config IS CLI Mapping A 3 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Table 13 2 IS CLI Mapping continued CLI Command Package 7300 Series L3 Switch Command Mode Syntax QOS config diffserv policy delete Global no policy map lt policyname gt lt policyname gt Config QOS config diffserv policy rename Global policy map rename lt policyname gt lt policyname gt lt newpolicyname gt Config lt newpolicyname gt QOS config diffservpolicy class add Policy Ma class lt classname gt lt policyname gt lt classname gt p Config QOS config diffserv policy class remove Policy Ma no class lt classname gt lt policyname gt lt classname gt p Config QOS config diffserv policy bandwidth Policy Cla bandwidth kbps lt 1 4294967295 gt kbps lt policyname gt lt classname gt ss Map percent lt 1 100 gt lt 1 4294967295 gt Config QOS config diffserv policy bandwidth Policy Cla percent lt policyname gt ss Map lt classname gt lt 1 100 gt Config QOS config diffserv policy expedite kbps Policy Cla expedite kbps lt 1 4294967295 gt lt policyname gt lt classname gt ss Map 1 128 lt 1 4294967295 gt 1 128 Config QOS config diffserv policy expedite Policy Cla expedite percent lt 1 100 gt 1 128 percent lt policyname gt ss Map lt classname gt lt 1 100 gt 1 128 Config QOS
31. no snmp server enable traps Wnkmode sese 8 32 snmp server enable traps multiusers A O70 no snmp server enable traps multiusers eeeeeeeeeseeeeeesssss 8 98 snmp server enable traps stpmode is no snmp server enable traps stpmode e s 8798 PP OS no snmptrap i nd d DIE ounce cei eee tar assets Desc een yee mtn redo a ad use eer cree rere us Md E viii Contents 202 10009 01 060204 DEI snipliap Mode sa dicniceccciionsecdaxkupsicd E P o A ees i r aem On a a i a a a 8 35 RE 8 35 PILTP rn TE EUR Gto dator tete docte nb Ne PERRO UIN RD IS DE SCHEDE caran pn reo E pb cd pr Ut CPP e rr ee no po Br SUO ey A 8 35 ip http secure protocol ot Hs T 8 36 neq p secure Protocol aa IB Mp ac ars D Oe nO ip http Secure SBIVBl auci eeccaciie riens M 8 36 i UD EE 8 36 Hob MID SONO TT at A 8 37 HOCUS Shell GSH Commande siii i a acu E Ru 8 37 NO SGI e 8 37 sd y Tr TERN ne BSO ME E PR MR ee show ip ssh Guests A eres 8 38 Device Configuration Commands aissis aasia a aaea aai ia 8 38 n enana DEE T AO NETOS T T IS ESI sig A A ainuauy 8 39 auto negotiate all fasted 8 39 ne aub med eer all us pei E pda
32. nodus 8 18 pecie at T ETE EE 9 18 gen ppc iq EE no SOV Se M 9 19 Ta LL 9 19 no external Isdb limit 2 hanny Gees 9 18 Hasta aca AA 9 20 a O 9 20 ip address m Gage e 39 20 BECHER 9 20 HP SUSHI M T ieee A 9 21 Teater cur is 9 21 no ip forwarding m m 9 21 WEIER PE OE teste EIA O QA 9 21 noO UE Op iude Geet T E ee ee lei eae ee ip irdp address predates pont 9 22 xviii Contents 202 10009 01_060204 no ip irdp holdtime 9 22 p rop coo E ee T S 9 23 naie tdp madre c ara a 9 23 ip irdp mi nadyertinterval user eco ition Ce DEI Ce E E POUR CREDE ERNE 9 23 n ip rdp Mminadverinterval AAA kaaa 9 23 ip irdp preference c d T 9 23 MODED SSIS ege eebe T 9 24 Ensenada 9 24 no ip netdirbcast Aen M 9 24 e Se CT 9 24 REICHERT 19 24 TP UIT IP E 9 25 Uer 9 25 no ip ospf authentication S saccades 9 20 DOTES nO ip USOT COSE ooo ip ospf dead interval Q Ge Geen 9 26 ds uico MT assinadGutieteh tains 9 26 Pon Ee E PI EE ec E no ip ospf Belle VS Lusso ctn od Op nme e E Gp bd 9 27 jener a ri IEEE 9 27 no ip ospf priority
33. set from the auto negotiation process Note that the port s maxi mum capability full duplex 100M will be advertised Other wise this object will determine the port s duplex mode and transmission rate The factory default is Auto Indicates the port speed and duplex mode Indicates whether the Link is up or down This object determines whether or not to send a trap when link status changes The factory default is enabled Displays whether LACP is enabled or disabled on this port This command displays the Protocol Based VLAN information for either the entire system or for the indicated Group Format Mode show port protocol lt groupid gt all Privileged EXEC Switching Commands 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Group Name Group ID Protocol s VLAN Interface s show port channel This field displays the group name of an entry in the Protocol based VLAN table This field displays the group identifier of the protocol group This field indicates the type of protocol s for this group This field indicates the VLAN associated with this Protocol Group This field lists the slot port interface s that are associated with this Protocol Group This command displays an overview of all port channels LAGs on the switch Format Mode Logical slot port Name Link State Admin Mode Link Trap Mode STP Mode Mbr Ports Port Speed
34. set igmp groupmembershipinterval This command sets the IGMP Group Membership Interval time on the system The Group Membership Interval time is the amount of time in seconds that a switch will wait for a report from a particular group on a particular interface before deleting the interface from the entry This value must be greater than the IGMP Maximum Response time value The range is 1 to 3600 seconds Default 260 seconds Format set Lomp groupmembershipinterval 1 3600 Mode Global Config no set igmp groupmembershipinterval This command sets the IGMP Group Membership Interval time on the system to 260 seconds Format no set igmp groupmembershipinterval Mode Global Config set igmp interfacemode all This command enables IGMP Snooping on all interfaces If an interface which has IGMP Snooping enabled is enabled for routing or is enlisted as a member of a port channel LAG IGMP Snooping functionality will be disabled on that interface IGMP Snooping functionality will subsequently be re enabled if routing is disabled or port channel LAG membership is removed from an interface that has IGMP Snooping enabled Default Disabled Format set igmp interfacemode all Mode Global Config no set igmp interfacemode all This command disables IGMP Snooping on all interfaces Format no set igmp interfacemode all Mode Global Config 8 52 Switching Commands 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed S
35. strap Protocol BootP server or a dhcp server until a response is received none indicates that the switch should be manually con figured with IP information Mode Privileged EXEC remotecon maxsessions This command specifies the maximum number of remote connection sessions that can be established A value of 0 indicates that no remote connection can be established The range is 0 to 3 Default 5 Format remotecon maxsessions 0 5 Mode Privileged EXEC no remotecon maxsessions This command sets the maximum number of remote connection sessions that can be established to the default value Default 5 Format no remotecon maxsessions Mode Privileged EXEC Switching Commands 8 21 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software remotecon timeout This command sets the remote connection session timeout value in minutes A session is active as long as the session has been idle for the value set A value of 0 indicates that a session remains active indefinitely The time is a decimal value from 0 to 160 Note Changing the timeout value for active sessions does not become effective until the session is reaccessed Any keystroke will also activate the new timeout duration Default 5 Format remotecon timeout lt 0 160 gt Mode Privileged EXEC no remotecon timeout This command sets the remote connection session timeout value in minutes to the default Note Changing the ti
36. the entire table is displayed This is the same as entering the optional a11 parameter Alternatively the administrator can enter a MAC Address to display the table entry for the requested MAC address and all entries following the requested MAC address Format Mode Mac Address slot port if Index Status show mac addr table lt macaddr gt all Privileged EXEC A unicast MAC address for which the switch has forwarding and or filtering information The format is 6 or 8 two digit hexadeci mal numbers that are separated by colons for example 01 23 45 67 89 AB In an IVL system the MAC address will be displayed as 8 bytes In an SVL system the MAC address will be displayed as 6 bytes The port which this address was learned This object indicates the ifIndex of the interface table entry asso ciated with this port The status of this entry The meanings of the values are Static The value of the corresponding instance was added by the system or a user when a static MAC filter was defined It cannot be relearned Learned The value of the corresponding instance was learned by observing the source MAC addresses of incoming traffic and is currently in use Management The value of the corresponding instance system MAC address is also the value of an existing instance of dotldStaticAddress It is identified with interface 0 1 and is cur rently used when enabling VLANs for routing Self The value of the corresponding instance
37. vlanonly Config all Global no vlan port acceptframe all Config Switching config vlan port ingressfilter Interface vlan ingressfilter enable disbale gt lt slot port all gt Config Interface no vlan ingressfilter Config Global vlan port ingressfilter all Config Global no vlan port ingressfilter all Config A 38 IS CLI Mapping 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Table 13 2 IS CLI Mapping continued CLI Command Package 7300 Series L3 Switch Command Mode Syntax Switching config protocol create Global vlan protocol group lt groupname gt lt groupname gt Config Switching config protocol delete lt groupid gt Global vlan protocol group remove Config lt groupid gt Switching config protocol protocol add Global vlan protocol group add protocol lt groupid gt lt protocol gt Config lt groupid gt ip arp ipx Switching config protocol protocol remove Global no vlan protocol group add protocol groupid protocol Config lt groupid gt ip arp ipx Switching config protocol vlan add lt groupid gt VLAN protocol group lt groupid gt lt 1 4094 gt lt vlan gt database Switching config protocol vlan remove VLAN no protocol group lt groupid gt lt groupid gt lt vlan gt database lt 1 4094 gt Switching config protocol interface add Interface protocol vlan group lt groupid gt lt
38. 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Table 13 2 IS CLI Mapping continued Package 7300 Series L3 Switch Command CLI Command Mode Syntax Switching show spanningtree cst detailed Privileged EXEC and User EXEC show spanning tree Switching show spanningtree bridge Privileged EXEC and User EXEC show spanning tree brief Switching show spanningtree mst summary Privileged EXEC and User EXEC show spanning tree mst summary Switching Switching show spanningtree mst detailed lt mstid gt show spanningtree cst port summary lt mstid gt lt slot port all gt Privileged EXEC and User EXEC Privileged EXEC and User EXEC show spanning tree mst detailed lt 1 4094 gt show spanning tree mst port summary 0 lt slot port gt all Switching show spanningtree cst port detailed lt mstid gt lt slot port gt Privileged EXEC and User EXEC show spanning tree mst port detailed 0 lt slot port gt Switching Switching Switching show spanningtree vlan lt vlan gt config spanningtree adminmode lt enable disable gt config spanningtree forceversion lt 802 1d 802 lw 802 Is gt Privileged EXEC and User EXEC Global Config Global Config Global Config show spanning tree vlan lt 1 4094 gt spanning tree no spanning tree spanning tree forceversion
39. 10 22 show dius Sorice DEBT uates brin obici aab d bre dr ori ad api s pK 10 23 show policy map Merate isses cinese trasera ras kk rnc baci adig ker tik daa 10 23 show service DOlIGy usce etse 10 25 Chapter 11 CLI Commands ACL Show Commands iore ccic onere SIE Re cesa bur reni uini jus ud osos 11 1 a En o O URL UTER SR RR RUN ca d 11 1 Configuration Commands S HR Tm TT errr DEE E E le E FR EE 11 2 ip access group adii in ad ab 11 3 Materia A A AR 11 3 Chapter 12 DHCP Server Commands DHCP Server Configuration Commande secessus akt etn unte tenu aad nha 12 1 e EE 12 1 ipe Ade nt 12 1 A IB eege EE enee EE 12 1 no client name M ege Serien nd 12 1 A WR no default router CH bends EE T at es TT ee Se 12 2 dns server s 12 2 e MIETEN T eene eege 12 2 hardware address ebbe depu NL Ud Ede Melun ee TT T ne hardwire AS ceo ddp PM Rt col a UR RU He P Ta RU e ERE 12 3 HOS sa oa Ea Mor EMI EAM DE RII UID NUN outa EL ES 12 3 a E 12 3 Jefe E AMM En E 12 4 no ip dhcp excluded oe C naai 12 4 lee le eeh E 12 4 Contents xxiii 202 10009 01 060204 P GQNED GOON iaa P EE 12 5 nO ip dhep pool 1c 12 5 su E On is E TN NIE T TT 12 5 jig c eme 125 1 150 EAE Eee eer
40. 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software 38400 57600 and 115200 baud The factory Default is 9600 baud Character Size The number of bits in a character The number of bits is always 8 Flow Control Whether Hardware Flow Control is enabled or disabled Hard ware Flow Control is always disabled Stop Bits The number of Stop bits per character The number of Stop bits is always 1 Parity Type The Parity Method used on the Serial Port The Parity Method is always None show serviceport This command displays service port configuration information Format show serviceport Mode Privileged EXEC IP Address The IP address of the interface The factory default value is 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask The IP subnet mask for this interface The factory default value is 0 0 0 0 Default Gateway The default gateway for this IP interface The factory default value is 0 0 0 0 ServPort Configuration Protocol Current Indicates what network protocol was used on the last or current power up cycle if any Burned in MAC Address The burned in MAC address used for in band connectivity show snmpcommunity This command displays SNMP community information Six communities are supported You can add change or delete communities The switch does not have to be reset for changes to take effect The SNMP agent of the switch complies with SNMP Version 1 for more about the SNMP specification see the S
41. 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Format Mode GMRP Admin Mode GVRP Admin Mode show garp Privileged EXEC and User EXEC This displays the administrative mode of GARP Multicast Regis tration Protocol GMRP for the system This displays the administrative mode of GARP VLAN Registra tion Protocol GVRP for the system show gmrp configuration This command displays Generic Attributes Registration Protocol GARP information for one or all interfaces Format Mode Interface Join Timer Leave Timer LeaveAll Timer show gmrp configuration lt slot port gt all Privileged EXEC and User EXEC This displays the slot port of the interface that this row in the table describes Specifies the interval between the transmission of GARP PDUs registering or re registering membership for an attribute Cur rent attributes are a VLAN or multicast group There is an instance of this timer on a per Port per GARP participant basis Permissible values are 10 to 100 centiseconds 0 1 to 1 0 sec onds The factory default is 20 centiseconds 0 2 seconds The finest granularity of specification is 1 centisecond 0 01 seconds Specifies the period of time to wait after receiving an unregister request for an attribute before deleting the attribute Current attributes are a VLAN or multicast group This may be consid ered a buffer time for another station to assert reg
42. Address used for in band connectivity Network Configurations Protocol Current Indicates which network protocol is being used Default is none Management VLAN Id Specifies VLAN id Web Mode Indicates whether HTTP Web is enabled Java Mode Indicates whether java mode is enabled network parms network parms lt ipaddr gt lt netmask gt lt gateway gt in Privileged EXEC IP Address range from 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 Subnet Mask range from 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 Gateway Address range from 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 Note The IP address assigned to network in the above table will not be routable If access to management CPU via the routable interface is desired use the ip command 6 4 Quick Start up 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Quick Start up Uploading from Switch to Out of Band PC Only XMODEM Table 6 5 Quick Start up Uploading from Switch to Out of Band PC XMODEM Command Details copy The types are nvram startup config nvram errorlog nvram msglog nvram traplog url config configuration file errorlog error log system trace system trace traplog trap log The URL must be specified as xmodem filepath fileName This starts the upload and also displays the mode of uploading and the type of upload it is and confirms the upload is taking place For exampl
43. Beyond the basic control of the PSE the management stations provides additional power management functions like power quality of service QoS where key users are given higher priority to power in the event of a outage Voice over IP VoIP is the transmission of telephone calls over a data network like one of the many networks that make up the Internet Other NETGEAR products that work with 7300 Series L3 Switch e WG302 e WG602 e WAG302 Power Over Ethernet POE Commands This section shows the additional CLI commands required to provide the management interface to the Power over Ethernet PoE function The commands only applies to FSM7326P model Note For the FSM7326P only ports 0 1 0 24 are eligible to participate in the PoE function poe This command enables or disables the Power over Ethernet function on the specified port s Default enable Format poe Mode Global Config 13 2 FSM7326P Power Over Ethernet Commands 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software poe priority This command sets the priority level for the delivery of power to an attached device The switch may not be able to supply power to all connected devices so the port priority is used to determine which ports will supply power if adequate power capacity is not available for all enabled ports For ports that have the same priority level the lower numbered port will have higher priority Def
44. Config username Switching config loginsession close Privileged disconnect sessionlD all sessionlD all EXEC Switching show switchconfig Privileged show storm control EXEC Switching show port slot port all gt Privileged show port lt slot port gt all EXEC IS CLI Mapping A 33 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Table 13 2 IS CLI Mapping continued Package 7300 Series L3 Switch Command CLI Command Mode Syntax Switching show lag logical slot port all gt Privileged EXEC show port channel logical slot port gt all Switching show lags summary Privileged EXEC and User EXEC show port channel brief Switching show vlan summary Privileged EXEC and User EXEC show vlan brief Switching show vlan detailed lt vlan id gt Privileged EXEC and User EXEC show vlan lt vlanid gt Switching Switching show vlan port lt slot port gt show protocol lt groupid all gt Privileged EXEC and User EXEC Privileged EXEC show vlan port lt slot port gt all show port protocol lt groupid gt all Switching show garp info Privileged EXEC and User EXEC show garp Switching show garp interface lt slot port all gt Privileged EXEC and User EXEC show gmrp configuration lt slot port gt all Switching show i
45. Config Switching Commands 8 41 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software no port lacpmode all This command disables Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP on all ports Format no port lacpmode all Mode Global Config port channel This command configures a new port channel LAG and generates a logical slot and port number for it Display this number using the show port channel Note Before including a port in a port channel set the port physical mode See speed command Format port channel lt name gt Mode Global Config port channel adminmode This command enables a port channel LAG The interface is a logical slot and port for a configured port channel The option a11 sets every configured port channel with the same administrative mode setting Format port channel adminmode logical slot port gt all Mode Global Config no port channel adminmode This command disables a port channel LAG The interface is a logical slot and port for a configured port channel The option a11 sets every configured port channel with the same administrative mode setting Format no port channel adminmode lt logical slot port gt all Mode Global Config port channel linktrap This command enables link trap notifications for the port channel LAG The interface is a logical slot and port for a configured port channel The option a11 sets every configured port
46. Dense Mode Like DVMRP PIM DM uses a flood and prune protocol for building multicast trees However unlike DVMRP PIM DM uses existing unicast protocols for determining the route to the source Q QoS See Quality of Service on page 16 Quality of Service QoS is a networking term that specifies a guaranteed level of throughput Throughput is the amount of data transferred from one device to another or processed in a specified amount of time typically throughputs are measured in bytes per second Bps C 16 Glossary 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software R RADIUS Short for Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RADIUS is an authentication system Using RADIUS you must enter your user name and password before gaining access to a network This information is passed to a RADIUS server which checks that the information is correct and then authorizes access Though not an official standard the RADIUS specification is maintained by a working group of the IETF Real Time Operating System RTOS is a component of the OSAPI module that abstracts operating systems with which other systems can interface Resource Reservation Setup Protocol RSVP is a new Internet protocol being developed to enable the Internet to support specified Qualities of Service QoS Using RSVP an application will be able to reserve resources along a route from source to destination RS VP
47. Field MF classes of traffic name match criteria Service Levels Specify the BA forwarding classes service levels Conceptually DiffServ is a two level hierarchy of classes 1 Service PHB 2 Traffic Class This set of commands consists of class creation deletion and matching with the class match commands specifying layer 3 layer 2 and general match criteria The class match criteria are also known as class rules with a class definition consisting of one or more rules to identify the traffic belonging to the class Note that once a class match criterion is created for a class it cannot be changed or deleted the entire class must be deleted and re created The CLI command root is e1ass map CLI Commands Differentiated Services 10 3 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software class map This command defines a new DiffServ class of type match all match any or match access group The lt classname gt parameter is a case sensitive alphanumeric string from 1 to 31 characters uniquely identifying the class Note Tthe class name default is reserved and must not be used here When used without any match condition this command enters the class map mode The classname is the name of an existing DiffServ class Note The class name default is reserved and is not allowed here The class type of match all indicates all of the individual match conditions must be true fo
48. Format no snmp server enable traps Switching Commands 8 31 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Mode Global Config snmp server enable traps bcaststorm This command enables the broadcast storm trap When enabled broadcast storm traps are sent only if the broadcast storm recovery mode setting associated with the port is enabled Default Enabled Format snmp server enable traps bcaststorm Mode Global Config no snmp server enable traps bcaststorm This command disables the broadcast storm trap When enabled broadcast storm traps are sent only if the broadcast storm recovery mode setting associated with the port is enabled Format no snmp server enable traps bcaststorm Mode Global Config snmp server enable traps linkmode This command enables Link Up Down traps for the entire switch When enabled link traps are sent only if the Link Trap flag setting associated with the port is enabled see snmp trap link status command Default Enabled Format snmp server enable traps linkmode Mode Global Config no snmp server enable traps linkmode This command disables Link Up Down traps for the entire switch Format no snmp server enable traps linkmode Mode Global Config 8 32 Switching Commands 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software snmp server enable traps multiusers This command enables Multiple U
49. IS CLI Mapping continued CLI Command Package 7300 Series L3 Switch Command Mode Syntax Global no bootpdhcprelay disable Config Routing config router bootpdhcprelay Global bootpdhcprelay maxhopcount lt 1 16 gt maxhopcount lt 1 16 gt Config Global no bootpdhcprelay maxhopcount Config Routing config router bootpdhcprelay Global bootpdhcprelay minwaittime 0 100 minwaittime 0 100 Config Global no bootpdhcprelay minwaittime Config Routing config router bootpdhcprelay Global bootpdhcprelay serverip lt ipaddr gt serverip lt ipaddr gt Config Routing config router ecmpmode lt enable Global ip ecmpmode disable gt Config Global no ip ecmpmode Config Routing config router ospf Router 1583compatibility 1583compatibility lt enable disable gt OSPF Config Router no 1583compatibility OSPF Config Routing config router ospf area Router area lt areaid gt authentication encrypt authentication lt areaid gt lt none OSPF none simple simple encrypt gt Config Routing config router rip autosummary Router auto summary lt enable disable gt RIP Config Router no auto summary RIP Config A 22 IS CLI Mapping 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Table 13 2 IS CLI Mapping continued CLI Command Package 7300 Series L3 Switch Command Mode Syntax Routing config router rip splithorizon lt none Router
50. Management Information Base on page 12 MOSPF See Multicast OSPF on page 13 C 12 Glossary 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software MPLS See Multi Protocol Label Switching on page 13 Multicast Backbone The MBONE is a virtual network It is layered on top of portions of the physical Internet to support routing of IP multicast packets since that function has not yet been integrated into many production routers The network is composed of islands that can directly support IP multicast such as multicast LANs like Ethernet linked by virtual point to point links called tunnels The tunnel endpoints are typically workstation class machines having operating system support for IP multicast and running the mrouted multicast routing daemon Multicasting To transmit a message to specific recipients across a network A simple example of multicasting is sending an e mail message to a mailing list Teleconferencing and videoconferencing also use multicasting but require more robust protocols and networks Standards are being developed to support multicasting over a TCP IP network such as the Internet These standards IP Multicast and Mbone will allow users to easily join multicast groups Note that multicasting refers to sending a message to a select group whereas broadcasting refers to sending a message to everyone connected to a network The terms multicast and narrowcast
51. Privileged show dot1x summary lt slot port gt EXEC all detail lt slot port gt statistics lt slot port gt users lt slot port gt Security show dot1x port summary lt slot Privileged port all gt EXEC Security show dot1x port detailed lt slot Privileged port gt EXEC Security show dot1x port stats lt slot port gt Privileged EXEC Security show dot1x port users lt slot port gt Privileged EXEC Security clear dot1x port stats lt slot port all gt Privileged clear dot1x statistics lt slot port gt all EXEC PoE config poe port adminmode Global poe Config PoE config poe port priority lt slot port Global poe priority lt high medium low gt all gt lt high medium low gt Config PoE config poe port limit lt slot port Global poe limit lt 3 16 gt all gt lt 3 16 gt Config PoE config poe usagethreshold Global poe usagethreshold lt 0 100 gt lt 0 100 gt Config PoE show poe port info Privilege show poe port lt slot port all gt PoE show poe info Privilege show poe A 46 IS CLI Mapping 202 10009 01 060204 Appendix B Cabling Guidelines This appendix provides specifications for cables used with a NETGEAR NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Fast Ethernet Cable Guidelines Fast Ethernet uses UTP cable as specified in the IEEE 802 3u standard for 1OOBASE TX The specification requires Category 5 UTP cable consisting of either two pair or four pair twisted insulated copper conductors bound
52. Routing Commands 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Receive version RIP Admin Mode Link State Authentication Type Authentication Key Authentication Key ID Default Metric The RIP version s allowed when receiving updates from the specified interface The types are none RIP 1 RIP 2 Both This is a configured value RIP administrative mode of router RIP operation enable acti vates disable de activates it This is a configured value Indicates whether the RIP interface is up or down This is a con figured value The RIP Authentication Type for the specified interface The types are none simple and encrypt This is a configured value The RIP Authentication Key for the specified interface The actual key will be to avoid compromising privacy This is a configured value The RIP Authentication Key ID for the specified interface This is a configured value A number which represents the metric used for default routes in RIP updates originated on the specified interface This is a con figured value The following information will be invalid if the link state is down Bad Packets Received The number of RIP response packets received by the RIP process Bad Routes Received Updates Sent show ip vrrp which were subsequently discarded for any reason The number of routes contained in valid RIP packets that were ignored for any reason The n
53. Routing Commands 9 11 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software no auto summary This command disables the RIP auto summarization mode Format no auto summary Mode Router RIP Config bootpdhcprelay cidoptmode This command enables the circuit ID option mode for BootP DHCP Relay on the system Default Disabled Format bootpdhcprelay cidoptmode Mode Global Config no bootpdhcprelay cidoptmode This command disables the circuit ID option mode for BootP DHCP Relay on the system Format no bootpdhcprelay cidoptmode Mode Global Config bootpdhcprelay disable This command disables the forwarding of relay requests for BootP DHCP Relay on the system Default Disabled Format bootpdhcprelay disable Mode Global Config no bootpdhcprelay disable This command enables the forwarding of relay requests for BootP DHCP Relay on the system Format no bootpdhcprelay disable Mode Global Config 9 12 Routing Commands 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software bootpdhcprelay maxhopcount This command configures the maximum allowable relay agent hops for BootP DHCP Relay on the system The lt hops gt parameter has a range of 1 to 16 Default 4 Format bootpdhcprelay maxhopcount lt 1 16 gt Mode Global Config no bootpdhcprelay maxhopcount This command configures the default maximum allowable relay agent hops for BootP DHCP
54. Switch Software Annotations The CLI allows the user to type single line annotations at the command prompt for use when writing test or configuration scripts and for better readability The exclamation point character flags the beginning of a comment The comment flag character can begin a word anywhere on the command line and all input following this character is ignored Any command line that begins with the character is recognized as a comment line and ignored by the parser Some examples are provided below Script file for displaying the ip interface Display information about interfaces show ip interface 0 1 Displays the information about the first interface Display information about the next interface show ip interface 0 2 End of the script file 5 4 Command Line Interface Structure 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Chapter 6 Quick Start up The CLI Quick Start up details procedures to quickly become acquainted with the 7300 Series L3 Switch Quick Starting the Switch 1 Read the device Installation Guide for the connectivity procedure In band connectivity allows access to the 7300 Series L3 Switch locally or from a remote workstation The device must be configured with IP information IP address subnet mask and default gateway 2 Turn the Power ON 3 Allow the device to load the software until the login prompt appears
55. To return to User Exec mode enter ctrl Z Policy Map Mode From the Global Configuration mode enter the policy map command Switch Config policy map To exit to the Global Config mode enter exit To return to user EXEC mode enter ctrl Z Policy Class Mode From the Policy Map mode enter the class command Switch Config policy classmap To exit to Policy Map mode enter exit To return to User Exec mode enter ctrl Z Class Map Mode From the Global Config mode enter the class map command Switch Config class map To exit to Global Config mode enter exit To return to User Exec mode enter ctrl Z Router Config OSPF Mode From the Global Configuration mode enter the router ospf command Switch Config router To exit to the Global Config mode enter exit To return to User Exec mode enter ctrl Z 202 10009 01 060204 Mode based CLI User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Table 7 1 Command Mode continued Command Mode Access Method Prompt Exit or Access Next Mode Router Config RIP Mode From the Global Config mode enter the router rip command Switch Config router To exit to the Global Config mode enter exit To return to User Exec mode enter ctrl Z DHCP Pool Configuration Mode From the Global Configuration mode enter the ip dhcp pool lt pool name gt com
56. Translation Sometimes referred to as Transparent Proxying IP Address Overloading or IP Masquerading Involves use of a device called a Network Address Translator which assigns a contrived or logical IP address and port number to each node on an organization s internal network and passes packets using these assigned addresses nm Nanometer 1 x 10e meters non stub area Resource intensive OSPF area that carries a default route static routes intra area routes interarea routes and external routes Non stub areas are the only OSPF areas that can have virtual links configured across them and are the only areas that can contain an ASBR Compare with stub area See also ASAM and OSPF Cisco Systems Inc O Open Shortest Path First A link state algorithm used by the router to determine the current topology of a network Interior Gateway distributes routing information between routers belonging to a single Autonomous System routing C 14 Glossary 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software protocol This protocol s algorithm determines the shortest path from its router to all the other routers in the network This protocol is rapidly replacing RIP on the Internet Open Systems Interconnection OST is a seven 7 layer architecture model for communications systems developed by the ISO for the interconnection of data communications systems Each layer uses and builds on th
57. Y New Connection Enter a name and choose an icon foe the connection Name FSM725 Icon 3988582 Carca Figure 3 2 Connection Description 3 The following screen will appear In the bottom drop down box labeled Connect Using click the arrow and choose the COM port to which the switch will connect In the example below COM is the port selected Click OK B FSM726 Enter details for the phone number that pou wart to diat Countiy region ted Stass 1 Area code ns Phone number EP Connect uring Cae Figure 3 3 COM Port Selection 3 2 Administration Console Telnet Interface 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software 4 When the following screen appears make sure that the port setting are as follows Baud Rate 9600 Data Bits 8 Parity None Stop Bits 1 Flow Control None o A Pod Setiegs Bis per second baste fe x 2 x Seck Bow corno Prime Delate D Cane Zen Figure 3 4 Connection Settings 5 Click OK The HyperTerminal window will open and you should be connected to the switch If you do not get a welcome screen or a system menu press the return key When attached to the User Interface via a Telnet Session the following must be set in order to use the arrow keys Under the terminal pull down menu choose Properties and make sure the VT100 Arrows option is turned on Administration Console Te
58. a port channel LAG GARP functionality will be disabled on that interface GARP functionality will subsequently be re enabled if routing is disabled and port channel LAG membership is removed from an interface that has GARP enabled Default Disabled Format set gmrp interfacemode Mode Interface Config 8 48 Switching Commands 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software no set gmrp interfacemode This command disables GARP Multicast Registration Protocol on a selected interface If an interface which has GARP enabled is enabled for routing or is enlisted as a member of a port channel LAG GARP functionality will be disabled on that interface GARP functionality will subsequently be re enabled if routing is disabled and port channel LAG membership is removed from an interface that has GARP enabled Format no set gmrp interfacemode Mode Interface Config set gmrp interfacemode all This command enables GARP Multicast Registration Protocol on all interfaces If an interface which has GARP enabled is enabled for routing or is enlisted as a member of a port channel LAG GARP functionality will be disabled on that interface GARP functionality will subsequently be re enabled if routing is disabled and port channel LAG membership is removed from an interface that has GARP enabled Default Disabled Format set gmrp interfacemode all Mode Global Config no set gmrp interfacemode
59. accepted and assigned the value of the interface VLAN ID for this port With either option VLAN tagged frames are forwarded in accordance with the IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Specification Default Admit All Format vlan acceptframe vlanonly all Mode Interface Config no vian acceptframe This command sets the frame acceptance mode per interface to Admit All For Admit All mode untagged frames or priority frames received on this interface are accepted and assigned the value of the interface VLAN ID for this port With either option VLAN tagged frames are forwarded in accordance with the IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Specification Format vlan acceptframe vlanonly all Mode Interface Config vlan ingressfilter This command enables ingress filtering If ingress filtering is disabled frames received with VLAN IDs that do not match the VLAN membership of the receiving interface are admitted and forwarded to ports that are members of that VLAN Default Disabled Format vlan ingressfilter Mode Interface Config Switching Commands 8 71 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software no vian ingressfilter This command disables ingress filtering If ingress filtering is disabled frames received with VLAN IDs that do not match the VLAN membership of the receiving interface are admitted and forwarded to ports that are members of that VLAN Format no vlan ingressfilter Mode Interface Config vlan ma
60. advertise Mode Router OSPF Config no area range This command deletes a specified area range The lt ipaddr gt is a valid IP address The lt subnetmask gt is a valid subnet mask Format no area lt areaid gt range lt ipaddr gt lt subnetmask gt Mode Router OSPF Config area stub This command creates a stub area for the specified area ID A stub area is characterized by the fact that AS External LSAs are not propagated into the area Removing AS External LSAs and Summary LSAs can significantly reduce the link state database of routers within the stub area Format area areaid stub Mode Router OSPF Config 9 4 Routing Commands 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software no area stub This command deletes a stub area for the specified area ID Format no area lt areaid gt stub Mode Router OSPF Config area stub summarylsa This command configures the Summary LSA mode for the stub area identified by lt areaid gt The Summary LSA mode is configured as enabled Default Disabled Format area lt areaid gt stub summarylsa Mode Router OSPF Config no area stub summarylsa This command configures the default Summary LSA mode for the stub area identified by lt areaid gt Format no area lt areaid gt stub summarylsa Mode Router OSPF Config area virtual link This command creates the OSPF virtual interface for the specified lt areaid gt and lt neigh
61. all This command disables GARP Multicast Registration Protocol on a selected interface Format no set gmrp interfacemode all Mode Global Config set gvrp adminmode This command enables GVRP Default Disabled Format set gvrp adminmode Mode Privileged EXEC Switching Commands 8 49 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software no set gvrp adminmode This command disables GVRP Format no set gvrp adminmode Mode Privileged EXEC set gvrp interfacemode This command enables GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol for a specific port Default Disabled Format set gvrp interfacemode Mode Interface Config no set gvrp interfacemode This command disables GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol for a specific port If GVRP is disabled Join Time Leave Time and Leave All Time have no effect Format no set gvrp interfacemode Mode Interface Config set gvrp interfacemode all This command enables GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol for all ports Default Disabled Format set gvrp interfacemode all Mode Global Config no set gvrp interfacemode all This command disables GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol for all ports If GVRP is disabled Join Time Leave Time and Leave All Time have no effect Format no set gvrp interfacemode all Mode Global Config 8 50 Switching Commands 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch S
62. an extension of SSL TLS and SSL are not interoperable Telnet A TCP IP application protocol that provides a virtual terminal service allowing a user to log into another computer system and access a device as if the user were connected directly to the device Traffic prioritization Giving time critical data traffic a higher quality of service over other non critical data traffic Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP is a simple form of the File Transfer Protocol FTP TFTP uses the User Datagram Protocol UDP a direct protocol used to communicate datagrams over a network with little error recovery and provides no security features It is often used by servers to boot diskless workstations X terminals and routers Trunking The process of combing a set of trunks that are traffic engineered as a unit for the establishment of connections between switching systems in which all of the communications paths are interchangeable U UTP Unshielded twisted pair is the cable used by IOBASE T and 100BASE Tx Ethernet networks V Virtual Local Area Network Operating at the Data Link Layer Layer 2 of the OSI model the VLAN is a means of parsing a single network into logical user groups or organizations as if they physically resided on a dedicated LAN segment of their own In reality this virtually defined community may have individual members peppered across a large extended LAN The VLAN identifier is part of the 802 1Q tag which i
63. and a multiple spanning tree instance The lt vlanid gt corresponds to an existing VLAN ID Format show spanning tree vlan lt vlanid gt Mode Privileged EXEC and User EXEC VLAN Identifier Associated Instance Identifier for the associated multiple spanning tree instance or CST if associated with the common and internal spanning tree spanning tree This command sets the spanning tree operational mode to enabled Default Disabled Format spanning tree Mode Global Config no spanning tree This command sets the spanning tree operational mode to disabled While disabled the spanning tree configuration is retained and can be changed but is not activated Format no spanning tree Mode Global Config spanning tree configuration name This command sets the Configuration Identifier Name for use in identifying the configuration that this switch is currently using The lt name gt is a string of at most 32 characters Switching Commands 8 83 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Default The base MAC address displayed using hexadecimal notation as specified in IEEE 802 standard Format spanning tree configuration name lt name gt Mode Global Config no spanning tree configuration name This command resets the Configuration Identifier Name to its default Format no spanning tree configuration name Mode Global Config spanning tree configuration revision This
64. are often used interchangeably although narrowcast usually refers to the business model whereas multicast refers to the actual technology used to transmit the data Multicast OSPF With a MOSPF specification an IP Multicast packet is routed based both on the packet s source and its multicast destination commonly referred to as source destination routing As it is routed the multicast packet follows a shortest path to each multicast destination During packet forwarding any commonality of paths is exploited when multiple hosts belong to a single multicast group a multicast packet will be replicated only when the paths to the separate hosts diverge See OSPF on page 15 for more information Multiplexing A function within a layer that interleaves the information from multiple connections into one connection Multi Protocol Label Switching An initiative that integrates Layer 2 information about network links bandwidth latency utilization into Layer 3 IP within a particular autonomous system or ISP in order to simplify and improve IP packet exchange MPLS gives network operators a great deal of flexibility to divert and route traffic around link failures congestion and bottlenecks From a QoS standpoint ISPs will better be able to manage different kinds of data streams based on priority and service plan For instance those who subscribe to a premium service plan or those who receive a lot of streaming media or high bandwidth content
65. automatic negotiation on all ports Format no auto negotiate all Mode Global Config delete interface This command deletes an existing port channel LAG from the configuration The interface is a logical slot and port for a configured port channel The a11 option removes all configured port channels LAGs Format delete interface logical slot port gt all Mode Interface Config Switching Commands 8 39 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software deleteport This command deletes the port from the port channel LAG The interface is a logical slot and port number of a configured port channel Format deleteport lt logical slot port gt Mode Interface Config deleteport This command deletes all configured ports from the port channel LAG The interface is a logical slot and port number of a configured port channel Format deleteport lt logical slot port gt all Mode Global Config monitor session This command configures a probe port and a monitored port for monitor session port monitoring The first slot port is the source monitored port and the second slot port is the destination probe port If this command is executed while port monitoring is enabled it will have the effect of changing the probe and monitored port values Format monitor session source lt slot port gt destination lt slot port gt Mode Global Config no monitor session This command
66. bytes If the type is encrypt a lt keyid gt in the range of 0 and 255 must be specified Default The default authentication type is none Default The default password key is not configured Unauthenticated interfaces do not need an authentication key Default The default keyid is not configured Unauthenticated interfaces do not need an authentication key id Format ip ospf authentication none simple lt key gt encrypt lt key gt lt keyid gt Mode Interface Config no ip ospf authentication This command sets the default OSPF Authentication Type for the specified interface Format no ip ospf authentication Mode Interface Config Routing Commands 9 25 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software ip ospf cost This command configures the cost on an OSPF interface The cost parameter has a range of 1 to 65535 Default 10 Format ip ospf cost 1 5535 Mode Interface Config no ip ospf cost This command configures the default cost on an OSPF interface The cost parameter has a range of 1 to 65535 Default 10 Format no ip ospf cost Mode Interface Config ip ospf dead interval This command sets the OSPF dead interval for the specified interface The value for seconds is a valid positive integer which represents the length of time in seconds that a router s Hello packets have not been seen before its neighbor routers declare that the router
67. can see minimal latency and packet loss When packets enter into a MPLS based network Label Edge Routers LERs give them a label identifier These labels not only contain information based on the routing table entry i e destination bandwidth delay and other metrics but also refer to the IP header field source IP address Layer 4 socket number information and differentiated service Once this classification is complete and mapped different packets are assigned to corresponding Labeled S witch Paths LSPs where Label Switch Glossary C 13 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Routers LSRs place outgoing labels on the packets With these LSPs network operators can divert and route traffic based on data stream type and Internet access customer MUX See Multiplexing on page 13 N NAT See Network Address Translation on page 14 netmask Combined with the IP address the IP Subnet Mask allows a device to know which other addresses are local to it and which must be reached through a gateway or router A number that explains which part of an IP address comprises the network address and which part is the host address on that network It can be expressed in dotted decimal notation or as a number appended to the IP address For example a 28 bit mask starting from the MSB can be shown as 255 255 255 192 or as 28 appended to the IP address Network Address
68. class create all Global class map match all lt classname gt Config lt classmapname gt match access group classmapname lt aclid gt QOS config diffserv class delete Global no class map lt classmapname gt lt classname gt Config QOS config diffserv class rename Global class map rename lt classmapname gt lt classname gt lt newclassname gt Config lt newclassmapname gt QOS config diffserv class match cos Class Ma match cos lt 0 7 gt lt classname gt 0 7 exclude p Config IS CLI Mapping A 7 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Table 13 2 IS CLI Mapping continued CLI Command Package 7300 Series L3 Switch Command Mode Syntax Class Ma match not cos lt 0 7 gt p Config QOS config diffserv class match dstip Class Ma match dstip lt ipaddr gt lt ipmask gt lt classname gt lt ipaddr gt lt ipmask gt p Config exclude Class Ma match not dstip lt ipaddr gt lt ipmask gt p Config QOS config diffserv class match Class Ma match dstl4port lt portkey gt dstl4port keyword lt classname gt p Config lt 0 65535 gt lt 0 65535 gt lt port key gt exclude QOS config diffserv class match Class Ma match not dstl4port lt portkey gt dstl4port number classname p Config lt 0 65535 gt lt 0 65535 gt lt 0 65535 gt exclude QOS config diffserv class match dstl4po
69. class definition a match condition based on the value of the IP Precedence field in a packet which is defined as the high order three bits of the Service Type octet in the IP header the low order five bits are not checked The precedence value is an integer from 0 to 7 The optional not parameter has the effect of negating this match condition for the class i e match all IP Precedence values except for what is specified here Note The ip dscp ip precedence and ip tos match conditions are alternative ways to specify a match criterion for the same Service Type field in the IP header but with a slightly different user notation Note To specify a match on all Precedence values use the match not ip tos lt tosbits gt lt tosmask gt command with tosbits set to 0 and tosmask set to 1F hex Default None Format match not ip precedence 0 7 10 8 CLI Commands Differentiated Services 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Mode Class Map Config match ip tos This command adds to the specified class definition a match condition based on the value of the IP TOS field in a packet which is defined as all eight bits of the Service Type octet in the IP header The value of lt tosbits gt is a two digit hexadecimal number from 00 to ff The value of lt tosmask gt is a two digit hexadecimal number from 00 to ff The optional not parameter has the effect of negati
70. criteria The referenced class is truly a reference and not a copy since additions to a referenced class affect all classes that reference it Changes to any class definition currently referenced by any other class must result in valid class definitions for all derived classes otherwise the change is rejected A class reference may be removed from a class definition The user can display summary and detailed information for classes policies and services All configuration information is accessible via the CLI Web and SNMP user interfaces General Commands The following characteristics are configurable for the platform as a whole 10 2 CLI Commands Differentiated Services 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software diffserv This command sets the DiffServ operational mode to active While disabled the DiffServ configuration is retained and can be changed but it is not activated When enabled Diffserv services are activated Format diffserv Mode Global Config no diffserv This command sets the DiffServ operational mode to inactive While disabled the DiffServ configuration is retained and can be changed but it is not activated When enabled Diffserv services are activated Format no diffserv Mode Global Config Class Commands The class command set is used in DiffServ to define Traffic Classification Specify Behavior Aggregate BA based on DSCP and Multi
71. does not assume any liability that may occur due to the use or application of the product s or circuit layout s described herein Regulatory Compliance Information This device is restricted to indoor use due to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co channel Mobile Satellite and Radar Systems 202 10009 01_060204 Canadian Department of Communications Compliance Statement This Class B Digital apparatus NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch meets all the requirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Regulations Cet appareil numerique del la classe B respect les exigences du Regalement sur le material broilleur du Canada This device comples with Class B limits of Industry of Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation EN 55 022 Declaration of Conformance This is to certify that the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch is shielded against the generation of radio interference in accordance with the application of Council Directive 89 336 EEC Article 4a Conformity is declared by the application of EN 55 022 Class B CISPR 22 iii l 202 10009 01_060204 202 10009 01_060204 Contents Chapter 1 About This Guide EE 1 1 Why thie Doc meni was Created enuncia 1 1 Howo Use This DOCUMEN ascii 1 1 Kees ele
72. enabled routers will then schedule and prioritize packets to meet the prioritization assigned by QoS RSVP is a chief component of a new type of Internet being developed known broadly as an integrated services Internet The general idea is to enhance the Internet to support transmission of real time data RIP See Routing Information Protocol on page 17 router A device that forwards data between networks An IP router forwards data based on IP source and destination addresses Routing Information Protocol RIP is the routing protocol used by the routed process on Berkeley derived UNIX systems Many networks use RIP it works well for small isolated and topologically simple networks RIPng Routing Information Protocol new generation RMON Short for remote monitoring a network management protocol that allows network information to be gathered at a single workstation Whereas SNMP gathers network data from a single type of Management Information Base MIB RMON 1 defines nine additional MIBs that provide a much richer set of data about network usage For RMON to work network devices such as hubs and switches must be designed to support it The newest version of RMON RMON 2 provides data about traffic at the network layer in addition to the physical layer This allows administrators to analyze traffic by protocol Glossary C 17 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software RS
73. entries are added to the table as a result of a learning process or protocol The text description of this multicast table entry The list of interfaces that are designated for forwarding Fwd and filtering Flt show mac address table multicast This command displays the Multicast Forwarding Database MFDB information If the command is entered with no parameter the entire table is displayed This is the same as entering the optional all parameter The user can display the table entry for one MAC Address by specifying the MAC address as an optional parameter Format show mac address table multicast lt macaddr gt all Mode Privileged EXEC Mac Address A unicast MAC address for which the switch has forwarding and or filtering information The format is 6 or 8 two digit hexadeci mal numbers that are separated by colons for example 01 23 45 67 89 AB In an IVL system the MAC address will be displayed as 8 bytes In an SVL system the MAC address will be displayed as 6 bytes Type This displays the type of the entry Static entries are those that are configured by the end user Dynamic entries are added to the table as a result of a learning process or protocol 8 58 Switching Commands 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Component Description Interfaces Forwarding Interfaces The component that is responsible for this entry in the Multicast Forwarding D
74. groupid A group may have more than one protocol associated with it Each interface and protocol combination can only be associated with one group If adding a protocol to a group causes any conflicts with interfaces currently associated with the group this command will fail and the protocol will not be added to the group The possible values for protocol are ip arp and ipx Default none Format vlan protocol group add protocol groupid protocol Mode Global Config no vlan protocol group add protocol This command removes the protocol from this protocol based VLAN group that is identified by this groupid The possible values for protocol are ip arp and ipx Format no vlan protocol group add protocol lt groupid gt proto col Mode Global Config vlan protocol group remove This command removes the protocol based VLAN group that is identified by this lt groupid gt Format vlan protocol group remove groupid Mode Global Config vlan pvid This command changes the VLAN ID per interface Default 1 Format vlan pvid 1 4094 Mode Interface Config 8 76 Switching Commands 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software no vian pvid This command sets the VLAN ID per interface to 1 Format no vlan pvid 1 4094 Mode Interface Config vlan tagging This command configures the tagging behavior for a specific interface in a VLAN to enabled If taggin
75. groupid gt lt slot port all gt Config Switching config protocol interface remove Interface no protocol vlan group lt groupid gt lt groupid gt lt slot port all gt Config Switching config protocol interface remove Global protocol vlan group all lt groupid gt lt groupid gt lt slot port all gt Config Switching config protocol interface remove Global no protocol vlan group all lt groupid gt lt groupid gt lt slot port all gt Config Switching config garp gmrp adminmode Privileged set gmrp adminmode lt enable disable gt EXEC Privileged no set gmrp adminmode EXEC Switching config garp gmrp interfacemode Interface set gmrp interfacemode lt slot port all gt lt enable disable gt Config Interface no set gmrp interfacemode Config Global set gmrp interfacemode all Config IS CLI Mapping A 39 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Table 13 2 IS CLI Mapping continued CLI Command Package 7300 Series L3 Switch Command Mode Syntax Global no set gmrp interfacemode all Config Switching config garp gvrp adminmode Privileged set gvrp adminmode lt enable disable gt EXEC Privileged no set gvrp adminmode EXEC Switching config garp gvrp interfacemode Interface set gvrp interfacemode lt slot port all gt enable disable gt Config Interface no set gvrp interfacemode Config Global set gvrp i
76. gt lt enable OSPF disable gt Config Router no area lt areaid gt stub summarylsa OSPF Config Routing config router ospf area stub create Router area lt areaid gt stub lt areaid gt OSPF Config Routing config router ospf area stub delete Router no area lt areaid gt stub lt areaid gt OSPF Config Routing config router rip adminmode Router enable enable disable RIP Config Router no enable RIP Config Routing config router rip prefrence 0 255 Router distance rip lt 1 255 gt RIP Config Routing config router rip interface Interface ip rip authentication none simple authentication lt slot port gt lt none Config lt key gt encrypt key lt keyid gt simple gt key IS CLI Mapping A 17 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Table 13 2 IS CLI Mapping continued CLI Command Package 7300 Series L3 Switch Command Mode Syntax Interface no ip rip authentication Config Routing config router rip interface Router default information originate defaultmetric lt slot port gt 0 15 RIP Config Routing config router rip interface mode Interface ip rip enable disable Config Interface no ip rip Config Routing config router rip interface version Interface ip rip receive version rip1 rip2 both receive lt slot port gt rip1 rip2 Config none both none Interface
77. gt command content not repeated here for brevity 10 22 CLI Commands Differentiated Services 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software show diffserv service brief This command displays all interfaces in the system to which a DiffServ policy has been attached The direction parameter is optional if specified only services in the indicated direction are shown otherwise service information is shown for both directions where applicable Format Mode DiffServ Mode show diffserv service brief in out Privileged EXEC The current setting of the DiffServ administrative mode An attached policy is only active on an interface while DiffServ is in an enabled mode The following information is repeated for interface and direction only those interfaces configured with an attached policy are shown Interface Direction OperStatus Policy Name The slot number and port number of the interface slot port The traffic direction of this interface service either in or out The current operational status of this DiffServ service interface The name of the policy attached to the interface in the indicated direction show policy map interface This command displays policy oriented statistics information for the specified interface and direction The lt slot port gt parameter specifies a valid slot number and port number for the system The direction parameter indicates t
78. in a single plastic sheath Category 5 cable is certified up to 100 MHz bandwidth 100BASE TX operation uses one pair of wires for transmission and the other pair for receiving and for collision detection When installing Category 5 UTP cabling use the following guidelines to ensure that your cables perform to the following specifications Certification Make sure that your Category 5 UTP cable has completed the Underwriters Laboratories UL or Electronic Testing Laboratories ETL certification process Termination method To minimize cross talk noise maintain the twist ratio of the cable up to the point of termination untwist at any RJ 45 plug or patch panel should not exceed 0 5 inch 1 5 cm Cabling Guidelines B 1 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Category 5 Cable Category 5 distributed cable that meets ANSI EIA TIA 568 A building wiring standards can be a maximum of 328 feet ft or 100 meters m in length divided as follows 20 ft 6 m between the hub and the patch panel if used 295 ft 90 m from the wiring closet to the wall outlet 10 ft 3 m from the wall outlet to the desktop device The patch panel and other connecting hardware must meet the requirements for 100 Mbps operation Category 5 Only 0 5 inch 1 5 cm of untwist in the wire pair is allowed at any termination point Category 5 Cable Specifications Ensure that the fiber cable i
79. indicates whether the address is universally administered b 0 or locally administered b 1 e Bit 7 of byte O called the I G bit indicates whether the destination address is an individual address b 0 or a group address b 1 e The second character of the twelve character macaddr must be 2 6 A or E A locally administered address must have bit 6 On b 1 and bit 7 Off b 0 Format network mac address macaddr Mode Privileged EXEC network mac type This command specifies whether the burned in MAC address or the locally administered MAC address is used Default burnedin Format network mac type local burnedin Mode Privileged EXEC no network mac type This command resets the value of MAC address to its default Format no network mac type Mode Privileged EXEC network parms This command sets the IP Address subnet mask and gateway of the router The IP Address and the gateway must be on the same subnet Format network parms lt ipaddr gt lt netmask gt lt gateway gt 8 20 Switching Commands 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Mode Privileged EXEC network protocol This command specifies the network configuration protocol to be used If you modify this value change is effective immediately Default None Format network protocol none bootp dhcp where bootp indicates that the switch periodically sends requests to a Boot
80. interface This value was configured into the unit Is the administrative mode of router interface participation The possible values are enable or disable This value was configured into the unit Is the administrative mode of the specified interface The possible values of this field are enable or disable This value was config ured into the unit Forward Net Directed Broadcasts Displays whether forwarding of network directed Active State Link Speed Data Rate MAC Address Encapsulation Type broadcasts is enabled or disabled This value was configured into the unit Displays whether the interface is active or inactive An interface is considered active if its link is up and it is in forwarding state Is an integer representing the physical link data rate of the speci fied interface This is measured in Megabits per second Mbps Is the burned in physical address of the specified interface The format is 6 two digit hexadecimal numbers that are separated by colons Is the encapsulation type for the specified interface The types are Ethernet or SNAP show ip interface brief This command displays summary information about IP configuration settings for all ports in the router This command takes no options Format show ip interface brief Mode Privileged EXEC and User EXEC Slot Port The interface being displayed on the row IP Address The IP address of the routing interface in 32 bit dotted decimal format IP
81. into the NSSA Format area areaid nssa no summary Mode Router OSPF Config area nssa translator role OSPF This command configures the translator role of the NSSA A value of always will cause the router to assume the role of the translator the instant it becomes a border router and a value of candidate will cause the router to participate in the translator election process when it attains border router status Format area areaid nssa translator role always candi date Mode Router OSPF Config Routing Commands 9 3 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software area nssa translator stab intv This command configures the translator stability interval of the NSSA The stabilityinterval is the period of time that an elected translator continues to perform its duties after it determines that its translator status has been deposed by another router Format area areaid nssa translator stab intv stability interval Mode Router OSPF Config area range This command creates a specified area range for a specified NSSA The lt ipaddr gt is a valid IP address The lt subnetmask gt is a valid subnet mask The Isdb type must be specified by either summarylink or nssaexternallink and the advertising of the area range can be optionally allowed or suppressed Format area lt areaid gt range lt ipaddr gt lt subnetmask gt summa rylink nssaexternallink advertise not
82. is down The value for the length of time must be the same for all routers attached to a common network This value should be some multiple of the Hello Interval i e 4 Valid values range for seconds is from 1 to 2147483647 Default 40 Format ip ospf dead interval lt 1 2147483647 gt Mode Interface Config no ip ospf dead interval This command sets the default OSPF dead interval for the specified interface Format no ip ospf dead interval Mode Interface Config 9 26 Routing Commands 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software ip ospf hello interval This command sets the OSPF hello interval for the specified interface The value for lt seconds gt is a valid positive integer which represents the length of time in seconds The value for the length of time must be the same for all routers attached to a network Valid values range from 1 to 65535 Default 10 Format ip ospf hello interval lt 1 65535 gt Mode Interface Config no ip ospf hello interval This command sets the default OSPF hello interval for the specified interface Format no ip ospf hello interval Mode Interface Config ip ospf priority This command sets the OSPF priority for the specified router interface The priority of the interface is a priority integer from 0 to 255 A value of 0 indicates that the router is not eligible to become the designated router on this network Default 1
83. is an edge port Edge Port Status The derived value of the edge port status True if operating as an edge port false otherwise Point To Point MAC Status Derived value indicating if this port is part of a point to point link CST Regional Root The regional root identifier in use for this port CST Port Cost The configured path cost for this port show spanning tree mst port summary This command displays the settings of one or all ports within the specified multiple spanning tree instance The parameter lt mstid gt indicates a particular MST instance The parameter lt slot port gt all indicates the desired switch port or all ports If 0 defined as the default CIST ID is passed as the lt mstid gt then the status summary is displayed for one or all ports within the common and internal spanning tree Format show spanning tree mst port summary mstid lt slot port gt all Mode Privileged EXEC and User EXEC MST Instance ID The MST instance associated with this port Switching Commands 8 81 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Slot Port The interface being displayed Type Currently not used STP State The forwarding state of the port in the specified spanning tree instance Port Role The role of the specified port within the spanning tree Link Status The operational status of the link Possible values are Up or Down Link Trap The link tra
84. key to be used for the specified login user The valid encryption protocols are none or des The des protocol requires a key which can be specified on the command line The key may be up to 16 characters long If the des protocol is specified but a key is not provided the user will be prompted for the key If none is specified a key must not be provided The lt username gt is the login user name for which the specified encryption protocol will be used Default no encryption Format users snmpv3 encryption username none des key Mode Global Config no users snmpv3 encryption This command sets the encryption protocol to none The lt username gt is the login user name for which the specified encryption protocol will be used Format no users snmpv3 encryption lt username gt Mode Global Config 8 94 Switching Commands 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Security Commands This section describes commands used for configuring security settings for login users and port users authentication login This command creates an authentication login list The 1istname is up to 15 alphanumeric characters and is not case sensitive Up to 10 authentication login lists can be configured on the switch When a list is created the authentication method local is set as the first method When the optional parameters Option1 Option2 and or Option3
85. monitor Privileged EXEC indicates whether the Port Monitoring feature is enabled or dis abled The possible values are enable and disable is the slot port that is configured as the probe port If this value has not been configured Not Configured will be displayed Monitored Port slot port is the slot port that is configured as the monitored port If this value has not been configured Not Configured will be dis played 8 60 Switching Commands 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software show port This command displays port information Format Mode slot port Type Admin Mode Physical Mode Physical Status Link Status Link Trap LACP Mode show port protocol show port lt slot port gt all Privileged EXEC The physical slot and physical port If not blank this field indicates that this port is a special type of port The possible values are Mon this port is a monitoring port Look at the Port Monitoring screens to find out more information Lag this port is a member of a port channel LAG Probe this port is a probe port Selects the Port control administration state The port must be enabled in order for it to be allowed into the network May be enabled or disabled The factory default is enabled Selects the desired port speed and duplex mode If auto negotia tion support is selected then the duplex mode and speed will be
86. nexthopip gt Config Routing config router vrrp adminmode Global ip vrrp lt enable disable gt Config Global no ip vrrp Config Routing config router vrrp interface Interface ip vrrp lt VrID gt mode adminmode lt slot port gt lt VrID gt Config lt enable disable gt Interface no ip vrrp lt VrID gt mode Config Routing config router vrrp interface priority Interface ip vrrp lt VrID gt priority lt 1 254 gt lt slot port gt VrID 1 254 Config Interface no ip vrrp lt VrID gt priority Config Routing config router vrrp interface Interface ip vrrp VrlD ip lt ipaddress gt ipaddress lt slot port gt lt vrID gt Config lt ipaddr gt lt ipaddr gt Routing config router vrrp interface Interface ip vrrp lt VrID gt preempt preemptmode lt slot port gt lt vrID gt Config lt enable disable gt Interface no ip vrrp lt VrID gt preempt Config Routing config router vrrp interface Interface ip vrrp lt VrlD gt timers advertise advinterval lt slot port gt lt vrlD gt Config 1 255 seconds Interface no ip vrrp VrlD timers advertise Config A 20 IS CLI Mapping 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Table 13 2 IS CLI Mapping continued CLI Command Package 7300 Series L3 Switch Command Mode Syntax Routing config router vrrp interface Interface ip vrrp lt VrID gt authentication lt key
87. number assigned This is applicable in the case of a port channel LAG The operator can use the logical slot number and the logi cal port number to configure the port channel Conventions Network addresses are used to define a link to a remote host workstation or network Network addresses are shown using the following syntax Table 5 1 Network Address Syntax Address Type Format Range ipaddr A B C D 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 decimal macaddr YY YY YY YY YY YY hexidecimal digit pairs Double quotation marks such as System Name with Spaces set off user defined strings If the operator wishes to use spaces as part of a name parameter then it must be enclosed in double quotation marks 6666 Empty strings are not valid user defined strings Command completion finishes spelling the command when enough letters of a command are typed to uniquely identify the command word The command may be executed by typing lt enter gt command abbreviation or the command word may be completed by typing the tab or space bar command completion The value Err designates that the requested value was not internally accessible This should never happen and indicates that there is a case in the software that is not handled correctly The value of designates that the value is unknown Command Line Interface Structure 5 8 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed
88. of a particular class and its defined treatment from the specified policy lt classname gt is the names of an existing DiffServ class Note that this command removes the reference to the class definition for the specified policy Format no class lt classname gt Mode Policy Map Config mark ip dscp This command marks all packets for the associated traffic stream with the specified IP DSCP value The lt dscpval gt value is specified as either an integer from 0 to 63 or symbolically through one of the following keywords af11 af12 af13 af21 af22 af23 af31 af32 af33 af41 af42 af43 be cs0 csl cs2 cs3 cs4 cs5 cs cs7 ef Format mark ip dscp lt dscpval gt Mode Policy Class Map Config Policy Type In Incompatibilities Mark IP Precedence Police all forms mark ip precedence This command marks all packets for the associated traffic stream with the specified IP Precedence value The IP Precedence value is an integer from 0 to 7 Format mark ip precedence 0 7 Mode Policy Class Map Config Policy Type In Incompatibilities Mark IP DSCP Police all forms 10 14 CLI Commands Differentiated Services 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software police simple This command is used to establish the traffic policing style for the specified class The simple form of the police command uses a single data rate and burst size resulting in two outcomes conf
89. on this port to timeout the authentication server The value is expressed in seconds and will be in the range of 1 and 65535 Maximum Requests The maximum number of times the authenticator state machine on this port will retransmit an EAPOL EAP Request Identity before timing out the supplicant The value will be in the range of 1 and 10 Reauthentication Period The timer used by the authenticator state machine on this port to determine when reauthentication of the supplicant takes place The value is expressed in seconds and will be in the range of 1 and 65535 Reauthentication Enabled Indicates if reauthentication is enabled on this port Possible values are True or False Key Transmission Enabled Indicates if the key is transmitted to the supplicant for the specified port Possible values are True or False Control Direction Indicates the control direction for the specified port or ports Pos sible values are both or in If the optional parameter statistics lt slot port gt is used the dot1x statistics for the specified port are displayed Port The interface whose statistics are displayed EAPOL Frames Received The number of valid EAPOL frames of any type that have been received by this authenticator EAPOL Frames Transmitted The number of EAPOL frames of any type that have been transmitted by this authenticator EAPOL Start Frames Received The number of EAPOL start frames that have been received by this authenticator
90. or types specified are added to any match types presently being redistributed Internal routes are redistributed by default Default value for metric not configured Default value for match internal Format for OSPF as source protocol redistribute lt ospf gt metric lt 0 15 gt match internal external 1 external 2 nssa external 1 nssa external 2 Format for other source protocol redistribute bgp static connected metric 0 15 gt Mode Router RIP Config no redistribute This command de configures RIP protocol to redistribute routes from the specified source protocol routers Format no redistribute ospf bgp static connected metric match internal external 1 external 2 nssa external 1 nssa external 2 Mode Router RIP Config Routing Commands 9 33 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software redistribute RIP This command configures RIP protocol to redistribute routes from the specified source protocol routers Default value for metric not configured Default value for match internal Format for OSPF as source protocol redistribute ospf metric lt 0 15 gt match internal external 1 external 2 nssa external 1 nssa external 2 Format for other source protocol redistribute bgp static connected metric 0 15 gt Mode Router RIP Config no redistribute RIP This command de configures RIP protoc
91. ordered sequence additional rules specified for such a class simply extend this list A class type of acl obtains its rule list by interpreting each ACL rule definition at the time the Diffserv class is created Differences arise when specifying match criteria for a class type all since only one value for each non excluded match field is allowed within a class definition If a field is already specified for a class all subsequent attempts to specify the same field fail including the cases where a field can be specified multiple ways through alternative formats The exception to this is when the exclude option is specified in which case this restriction does not apply to the excluded fields The following class restrictions are imposed by the 7300 Series L3 Switch DiffServ design e nested class support limited to e all within all e no nested not conditions e no nested acl class types e each class contains at most one referenced class e hierarchical service policies not supported in a class definition access list matched by reference only and must be sole criterion in a class e Le ACL rules copied as class match criteria at time of class creation with class type any e implicit ACL deny all rule also copied e no nesting of class type acl Regarding nested classes referred to here as class references a given class definition can contain at most one reference to another class which can be combined with other match
92. policy police action Policy Cla conform drop lt policyname gt ss Map lt classname gt Config A 6 IS CLI Mapping 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Table 13 2 IS CLI Mapping continued CLI Command Package 7300 Series L3 Switch Command Mode Syntax QOS show diffserv service stats Privileged show service policy in out summary in out EXEC QOS config diffserv service add lt in out gt Interface service policy in out lt slot port all gt lt policyname gt Config lt policymapname gt QOS config diffserv service remove lt in Interface no service policy in out out gt lt slot port all gt lt policyname gt Config lt policymapname gt QOS config diffserv service add lt in out gt Global service policy in out lt slot port all gt lt policyname gt Config lt policymapname gt QOS config diffserv service remove lt in Global no service policy in out out gt lt slot port all gt lt policyname gt Config lt policymapname gt QOS show diffserv class detailed Privileged show class map lt classname gt lt classname gt EXEC and User EXEC QOS show diffserv class summary Privileged EXEC and User EXEC QOS config diffserv class create any Global class map match all lt classname gt Config lt classmapname gt match access group classmapname lt aclid gt QOS config diffserv
93. received from the source protocol Default 0 Format distribute list 1 199 out ospf bgp static connected Mode Router RIP Config no distribute list out This command is used to specify the access list to filter routes received from the source protocol Format no distribute list 1 199 out ospf bgp static connected Mode Router RIP Config no default information originate This command is used to control the advertisement of default routes Format no default information originate Mode Router RIP Config encapsulation This command configures the link layer encapsulation type for the packet Acceptable values for lt encapstype gt are Ethernet and SNAP The default is Ethernet Format encapsulation ethernet snap Mode Interface Config 9 18 Routing Commands 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Restrictions Routed frames are always Ethernet encapsulated when a frame is routed toa VLAN exit overflow interval This command configures the exit overflow interval for OSPF It describes the number of seconds after entering Overflow state that a router will wait before attempting to leave the Overflow State This allows the router to again originate non default AS external LSAs When set to 0 the router will not leave Overflow State until restarted The range for lt seconds gt is 0 to 2147483647 seconds Default 0 Format exit overflow interval
94. routes Format default metric 0 15 Mode Router RIP Config no default metric RIP This command is used to reset the default metric of distributed routes to its default value Routing Commands 9 15 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Format no default metric Mode Router RIP Config enable OSPF This command resets the default administrative mode of OSPF in the router active Default Enabled Format enable Mode Router OSPF Config no enable OSPF This command sets the administrative mode of OSPF in the router to inactive Format no enable Mode Router OSPF Config enable RIP This command resets the default administrative mode of RIP in the router active Default Enabled Format enable Mode Router RIP Config no enable RIP This command sets the administrative mode of RIP in the router to inactive Format no enable Mode Router RIP Config distance ospf This command sets the route preference value of OSPF in the router Lower route preference values are preferred when determining the best route The type of OSPF can be intra inter type 1 or type 2 The OSPF specification RFC 2328 requires that preferences must be given to the routes learned via OSPF in the following order intra inter type 1 type 2 9 16 Routing Commands 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software The range of p
95. special type of port Admin Mode Selects the Port Control Administration State Physical Mode Selects the desired port speed and duplex mode Physical Status Indicates the port speed and duplex mode Link Status Indicates whether the link is up or down Link Trap Determines whether or not to send a trap when link status changes LACP Mode Displays whether LACP is enabled or disabled on this port 6 2 Quick Start up 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Quick Start up User Account Management Table 6 3 Quick Start up User Account Management Command Details show users Displays all of the users that are allowed to access the switch in Privileged EXEC Access Mode Shows whether the user is able to change parameters on the switch Read Write or is only able to view then Read Only As a factory default admin has Read Write access and guest has Read Only access There can only be one Read Write user and up to 5 Read Only users show loginsession Displays all of the login session information in User EXEC users passwd lt username gt Allows the user to set passwords or change passwords needed in Global Config to login A prompt will appear after the command is entered requesting the users old password In the absence of an old password leave the area blank The operator must press enter to execute the comman
96. statistics EXEC Security config dot1x adminmode lt enable Global dot1x system auth control disable gt Config Global no dot1x system auth control Config Security config dot1x port initialize slot Privileged dot1x initialize lt slot port gt port gt EXEC Security config dot1x port reauthenticate Privileged dotix re authenticate lt slot port gt lt slot port gt EXEC Security config dot1x port controldir lt slot Removed port all gt lt both in gt Security config dot1x port controlmode Global dot1x port control all lt slot port all gt lt forceunauthorized Config force unauthorized forceauthorized auto gt force authorized auto Global no dot1x port control all Config A 44 IS CLI Mapping 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Table 13 2 IS CLI Mapping continued CLI Command Package 7300 Series L3 Switch Command Mode Syntax Interface dot1x port control Config force unauthorized force authorized auto Interface no dot1x port control Config Security config dot1x port quietperiod lt slot Interface dot1x timeout reauth period port gt lt 0 65535 gt Config lt seconds gt quiet period lt seconds gt tx period lt seconds gt supp timeout lt seconds gt server timeout lt 0 65535 gt Security config dot1x port transmitperiod Interface no dot1x timeout reauth perio
97. the collected link state declarations Load balancing The ability to distribute traffic across various ports of a device such as a switch to provide efficient optimized traffic throughout the network Local Area Network A communications network serving users within a limited area such as one floor of a building A LAN typically connects multiple personal computers and shared network devices such as storage and printers Although many technologies exist to implement a LAN Ethernet is the most common for connecting personal computers and is limited to a distance of 1 500 feet LANs can be connected together but if modems and telephones connect two or more LANs the larger network constitutes what is called a WAN or Wide Area Network Loop An event that occurs when two network devices are connected by more than one path thereby causing packets to repeatedly cycle around the network and not reach their destination Glossary C11 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software MAC 1 Medium Access Control In LANs the sublayer of the data link control layer that supports medium dependent functions and uses the services of the physical layer to provide services to the logical link control LLC sublayer The MAC sublayer includes the method of determining when a device has access to the transmission medium 2 Message Authentication Code In computer security a value that is a part o
98. the path cost for this port within a multiple spanning tree instance or the common and internal spanning tree instance depending on the lt mstid gt parameter to the default value i e a pathcost value based on the Link Speed If the port priority token is specified this command sets the priority for this port within a specific multiple spanning tree instance or the common and internal spanning tree instance depending on the lt mstid gt parameter to the default value i e 128 Format no spanning tree mst lt mstid gt cost port priority Mode Interface Config spanning tree mst instance This command adds a multiple spanning tree instance to the switch The instance mstid is a number within a range of 1 to 4094 that corresponds to the new instance ID to be added The maximum number of multiple instances supported by the 7300 Series L3 Switch is 4 Format spanning tree mst instance mstid Mode Global Config no spanning tree mst instance This command removes a multiple spanning tree instance from the switch and reallocates all VLANs allocated to the deleted instance to the common and internal spanning tree The instance mstid is a number that corresponds to the desired existing multiple spanning tree instance to be removed Format no spanning tree mst instance lt mstid gt Mode Global Config spanning tree mst priority This command sets the bridge priority for a specific multiple spanning tree instan
99. tree hello time This command sets the Hello Time parameter for the common and internal spanning tree to the default value i e 2 Format no spanning tree hello time Mode Global Config spanning tree max age This command sets the Bridge Max Age parameter to a new value for the common and internal spanning tree The max age value is in seconds within a range of 6 to 40 with the value being less than or equal to 2 times Bridge Forward Delay 1 Default 20 Format spanning tree max age lt 6 40 gt Mode Global Config 8 86 Switching Commands 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software no spanning tree max age This command sets the Bridge Max Age parameter for the common and internal spanning tree to the default value i e 20 Format no spanning tree max age Mode Global Config spanning tree mst This command sets the Path Cost or Port Priority for this port within the multiple spanning tree instance or in the common and internal spanning tree If the lt mstid gt parameter corresponds to an existing multiple spanning tree instance then the configurations are done for that multiple spanning tree instance If however O defined as the default CIST ID is passed as the lt mstid gt then the configurations are performed for the common and internal spanning tree instance If the cost token is specified this command sets the path cost for this port within a multipl
100. used to display switch settings statistics and other information e Configuration Commands are used to configure features and options of the switch For every configuration command there is a show command that will display the configuration setting e Copy commands are used to transfer configuration and informational files to and from the switch Syntax conventions are described in Chapter 5 Command Line Interface Structure Routing Commands 1583compatibility This command enables OSPF 1583 compatibility Note 1583 compatibility mode is enabled by default If all OSPF routers in the routing domain are capable of operating according to RFC 2328 OSPF 1583 compatibility mode should be disabled Default Enabled Format 1583compatibility Mode Router OSPF Config no 1583compatibility This command disables OSPF 1583 compatibility Format no 1583compatibility Mode Router OSPF Config Routing Commands 9 1 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software area authentication This command specifies the authentication type to be used for the specified area id Default none Format area lt areaid gt authentication none simple encrypt Mode Router OSPF Config no area authentication This command sets the default authentication type to be used for the specified area id Format no area lt areaid gt authentication Mode Router OSPF Config area default cost
101. 0 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Appendix A IS CLI Mapping This chapter illustrates the mapping between CLI commands and the previous 7300 Series L3 Switch commands The Package column indicates the 7300 Series L3 Switch package in which the command is located Table 13 2 IS CLI Mapping CLI Command Package 7300 Series L3 Switch Command Mode Syntax QOS show acl detailed lt aclid gt Privileged show ip access lists lt 1 199 gt EXEC QOS show acl summary Privileged EXEC and User EXEC QOS config acl create lt aclid gt Global access list lt 1 99 gt deny permit Config lt srcip gt lt srcmask gt lt 100 199 gt deny permit every icmp igmp ip tcp udp number lt srcip gt lt srcmask gt eq lt 0 65535 gt lt portkey gt range lt startport gt lt endport gt lt dstip gt lt dstmask gt eq lt 0 65535 gt lt portkey gt range lt startport gt lt endport gt precedence precedence tos tos lt tosmask gt dscp lt dscp gt QOS config acl delete lt aclid gt Global no access list 1 99 lt 100 199 gt Config QOS config acl rule create lt aclid gt lt rulenum gt QOS config acl rule delete lt aclid gt lt rulenum gt IS CLI Mapping A 1 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Tab
102. 02 1D standard for media access control bridges Using the spanning tree algorithm STP provides path redundancy while preventing endless loops in a network An endless loop is created by multiple active paths between stations where there are alternate routes between hosts To establish path redundancy STP creates a logical tree that spans all of the switches in an extended network forcing redundant paths into a standby or blocked state STP allows only one active path at a time between any two network devices this prevents the loops but establishes the redundant links as a backup if the initial link should fail If STP costs change or if one network segment in the STP becomes unreachable the spanning tree algorithm reconfigures the spanning tree topology and reestablishes the link by activating the standby path Without spanning tree in place it is possible that both connections may be simultaneously live which could result in an endless loop of traffic on the LAN 802 1P The IEEE protocol designator for Local Area Network LAN This Layer 2 network standard improves support of time critical traffic and limits the extent of high bandwidth multicast traffic within a bridged LAN To do this 802 1P defines a methodology for introducing traffic class priorities The 802 1P standard allows priority to be defined in all 802 MAC protocols Ethernet Token Bus Token Ring as well as in FDDI For protocols such as Ethernet that do not contain a prio
103. 100 199 gt deny permit evry icmp igmp ip tcp udp lt number gt lt srcip gt lt srcmask gt eq lt portkey gt lt portvalue gt range lt startport gt lt endport gt lt dstip gt lt dstmask gt eq lt portkey gt lt portvalue gt range lt startport gt lt endport gt prece dence lt precedence gt tos lt tos gt lt tosmask gt dscp lt dscp gt Mode Global Config no access list This command deletes an ACL that is identified by the parameter lt accesslistnumber gt from the system Format no access list lt accesslistnumber gt 11 2 CLI Commands ACL 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Mode Global Config ip access group This command attach a specified access control list to an interface Default none Format ip access group lt accesslistnumber gt in out Mode Interface config ip access group all This command attach a specified access control list to all interfaces Default none Format ip access group all lt accesslistnumber gt in out Mode Global config CLI Commands ACL 11 3 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software 11 4 CLI Commands ACL 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Chapter 12 DHCP Server Commands DHCP Server Configuration Commands These co
104. 2 2 or both SSH 1 and SSH 2 1 and 2 can be set Default and 2 Format ip ssh protocol 1 2 Mode Privileged EXEC show ip ssh This command displays the ssh settings Format show ip ssh Mode Privileged EXEC Administrative Mode This field indicates whether the administrative mode of SSH is enabled or disabled Protocol Level The protocol level may have the values of version 1 version 2 or both versions 1 and version 2 Connections This field specifies the current ssh connections Device Configuration Commands addport This command adds one port to the port channel LAG The first interface is a logical slot and port number of a configured port channel Note Before adding a port to a port channel set the physical mode of the port See speed command 8 38 Switching Commands 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Format addport lt logical slot port gt Mode Interface Config auto negotiate This command enables automatic negotiation on a port The default value is enable Format auto negotiate Mode Interface Config no auto negotiate This command disables automatic negotiation on a port Format no auto negotiate Mode Interface Config auto negotiate all This command enables automatic negotiation on all ports The default value is enable Format auto negotiate all Mode Global Config no auto negotiate all This command disables
105. 2 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software ip rip receive version This command configures the interface to allow RIP control packets of the specified version s to be received The value for mode is one of ripl to receive only RIP version 1 formatted packets rip2 for RIP version 2 both to receive packets from either format or none to not allow any RIP control packets to be received Default both Format ip rip receive version ripl rip2 both none Mode Interface Config no ip rip receive version This command configures the interface to allow RIP control packets of the default version s to be received Format no ip rip receive version Mode Interface Config ip rip send version This command configures the interface to allow RIP control packets of the specified version to be sent The value for mode is one of rip to broadcast RIP version 1 formatted packets riplc RIP version 1 compatibility mode which sends RIP version 2 formatted packets via broadcast rip2 for sending RIP version 2 using multicast or none to not allow any RIP control packets to be sent Default riplc Format ip rip send version ripl riplc rip2 none Mode Interface Config no ip rip send version This command configures the interface to allow RIP control packets of the default version to be sent Format no ip rip send version Mode Interface Config 9 30 Routing Commands
106. 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software ip route This command configures a static route The lt networkaddr gt and lt nexthopip gt are valid ip addresses The lt subnetmask gt is a valid subnet mask The metric parameter is an integer value from 0 to 255 The default value is 1 Format ip route lt networkaddr gt lt subnetmask gt lt nexthopip gt met ric Mode Global Config no ip route This command causes a static route to be deleted The lt networkaddr gt and lt nexthopip gt are valid IP address The lt subnetmask gt is a 4 digit dotted decimal number representing a valid Subnet Mask Format no ip route lt networkaddr gt lt subnetmask gt lt nexthopip gt ip route default This command configures the default route The value for lt nexthopip gt is a valid IP address of the next hop router Format ip route default lt nexthopip gt Mode Global Config no ip route default This command causes the static default route to be deleted Format no ip route default Mode Global Config ip route distance This command sets the static route preference value in the router Lower route preference values are preferred when determining the best route Default 60 Format ip route distance lt 1 255 gt Routing Commands 9 31 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Mode Global Config no ip rout
107. 204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Configured Tagging show vlan brief Exclude This port is never a member of this VLAN This is equivalent to registration forbidden in the IEEE 802 1Q standard Autodetect Specifies to allow the port to be dynamically regis tered in this VLAN via GVRP The port will not participate in this VLAN unless a join request is received on this port This is equivalent to registration normal in the IEEE 802 1Q standard Determines the configured degree of participation of this port in this VLAN The permissible values are Include This port is always a member of this VLAN This is equivalent to registration fixed in the IEEE 802 1Q standard Exclude This port is never a member of this VLAN This is equivalent to registration forbidden in the IEEE 802 1Q standard Autodetect Specifies to allow the port to be dynamically regis tered in this VLAN via GVRP The port will not participate in this VLAN unless a join request is received on this port This is equivalent to registration normal in the IEEE 802 1Q standard Select the tagging behavior for this port in this VLAN Tagged specifies to transmit traffic for this VLAN as tagged frames Untagged specifies to transmit traffic for this VLAN as untagged frames This command displays a list of all configured VLANs Format show vlan brief Mode Privileged EXEC and User EXEC VLAN ID There is a
108. 6 case sensitive alphanumeric characters Note IP addresses in the SNMP trap receiver table must be unique If you make multiple entries using the same IP address the first entry is retained and processed All duplicate entries are ignored Format snmptrap ipaddr lt name gt lt ipaddrold gt lt ipaddrnew gt Mode Global Config snmptrap mode This command activates or deactivates an SNMP trap Enabled trap receivers are active able to receive traps Disabled trap receivers are inactive not able to receive traps Format snmptrap mode lt name gt lt ipaddr gt Mode Global Config no snmptrap mode This command deactivates an SNMP trap Disabled trap receivers are inactive not able to receive traps Format no snmptrap mode lt name gt lt ipaddr gt Mode Global Config 8 34 Switching Commands 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software telnet This command regulates new telnet sessions If sessions are enabled new telnet sessions can be established until there are no more sessions available If sessions are disabled no new telnet sessions are established An established session remains active until the session is ended or an abnormal network error ends it Default Enabled Format telnet Mode Privileged EXEC no telnet This command disables telnet sessions If sessions are disabled no new telnet sessions are established Format no telnet Mode Privileged EX
109. 65535 gt Config Security config radius accounting server Global remove lt ipaddr gt Config Security config radius server add lt ipaddr gt Global Config Security config radius server port lt ipaddr gt Global lt 0 65535 gt Config Security config radius server remove Global no radius server host auth acct lt ipaddr gt Config lt ipaddr gt Security config radius accounting server Global radius server key auth acct secret lt ipaddr gt Config lt ipaddr gt Security config radius server secret Global lt ipaddr gt Config Security config radius server primary Global radius server primary lt ipaddr gt lt ipaddr gt Config IS CLI Mapping A 43 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Table 13 2 IS CLI Mapping continued CLI Command Package 7300 Series L3 Switch Command Mode Syntax Security show radius summary Privileged show radius servers EXEC Security show radius server summary Privileged EXEC Security show radius server stats lt ipaddr gt Privileged show radius statistics lt ipaddr gt EXEC Security show radius accounting summary Privileged show radius accounting statistics EXEC lt ipaddr gt Security show radius accounting stats Privileged lt ipaddr gt EXEC Security show radius stats Privileged show radius statistics EXEC Security clear radius stats Privileged clear radius
110. 8 83 Spanning Loos Lodo o no spanning tree Eet ere spanning tree configuration NENG acia a 0 0 no spanning treo configuration Name conocia a e a a 8 84 spanning tree configuration revision no spanning tree configuration revision Spams BODIES WE 8 84 NO SPANNING WES CAGE OOM ies rei e taa sank Dd OO spanning tree forward time sssuse dicci n idis Ehe SE 8 85 n spanning tree forward tiME Lia usse dude dd rae kdo qeu ink Raab UE Elan kdo dk 8 86 spanning tee hell He sii BO o o MN NN 8 86 AG SEIU woe MARGE ORE Epi CR E no spanning tree mst spanning tree mst instance nbus enis ed EE oe des See 8 88 Contents 202 10009 01_060204 xiii naspanning tree mst MSTa s sunno ag bea naga ta n addi air Gaga i n RO spanning tree mst priority no spanning tree mst priority ee RE 89 no spanning tree mst vlan A Pana eS port MOQO nro no spanning tree port mode paming tr s port mode all sin a ne spanning tree port mode all coco a OO User Account Management Commands iii EES bete kreeg Ee LEE ep S mpeg c Aere eer O EE WER A A LED HEH ee 92 users passwd GE S ier 8 93 umi i SSW ED IPPO users snmpv3 accessmode no users snmpv3 access users snmpv3 authentication Legis M Ee NEE n
111. 8 two digit hexadeci mal numbers that are separated by colons for example 01 23 45 67 89 AB In an IVL system the MAC address will be Switching Commands 8 59 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Type Description Interfaces displayed as 8 bytes In an SVL system the MAC address will be displayed as 6 bytes This displays the type of the entry Static entries are those that are configured by the end user Dynamic entries are added to the table as a result of a learning process or protocol The text description of this multicast table entry The list of interfaces that are designated for forwarding Fwd and filtering Flt show mac address table stats This command displays the Multicast Forwarding Database MFDB statistics Format Mode Total Entries show mac address table stats Privileged EXEC This displays the total number of entries that can possibly be in the Multicast Forwarding Database table Most MFDB Entries Ever Used This displays the largest number of entries that have been Current Entries show monitor present in the Multicast Forwarding Database table This value is also known as the MFDB high water mark This displays the current number of entries in the Multicast For warding Database table This command displays the Port monitoring information for the system Format Mode Port Monitor Mode Probe Port slot port show
112. 802 1d 802 lw 802 Is IS CLI Mapping 202 10009 01 060204 A 27 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Table 13 2 IS CLI Mapping continued CLI Command Package 7300 Series L3 Switch Command Mode Syntax Global no spanning tree forceversion Config Switching config spanningtree configuration Global spanning tree configuration name name lt name gt Config lt name gt Global no spanning tree configuration name Config Switching config spanningtree configuration Global spanning tree configuration revision revision lt 0 65535 gt Config lt 0 65535 gt Global no spanning tree configuration Config revision Switching config spanningtree port mode Interface spanning tree port mode all lt slot port all gt lt enable disbale gt Config Interface no spanning tree port mode Config Switching config spanningtree port mode Global spanning tree port mode all lt slot port all gt lt enable disbale gt Config Global no spanning tree port mode all Config Switching config spanningtree port Global spanning tree bpdumigrationcheck migrationcheck lt slot port all gt Config lt slot port gt all lt enable disable gt Global no spanning tree Config bpdumigrationcheck lt slot port gt all Switching config spanningtree bridge maxage Global spanning tree max age lt 6 40 gt lt 6 40 gt Config Global no spanning tree max age
113. Advanced Network Device Layer Software Term for the Device Driver level Aging When an entry for a node is added to the lookup table of a switch it is given a timestamp Each time a packet is received from a node the timestamp is updated The switch has a user configurable timer that erases the entry after a certain length of time with no activity from that node Area Border Router A router located on the border of one or more OSPF areas that connects those areas to the backbone network ABRs are considered members of both the OSPF backbone and the attached areas They therefore maintain routing tables describing both the backbone topology and the topology of the other areas Cisco Systems Inc ARP See Address Resolution Protocol on page 2 C 2 Glossary 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software ASBR See Autonomous System Boundary Router on page 3 Autonomous System Boundary Router ABR located between an OSPF autonomous system and a non OSPF network ASBRs run both OSPF and another routing protocol such as RIP ASBRs must reside in a non stub OSPF area See also ABR non stub area and OSPF Cisco Systems Inc Auto negotiation A feature that allows twisted pair ports to advertise their capabilities for speed duplex and flow control When connected to a port that also supports auto negotiation the link can automatically configure itself to the optimum setup
114. CS octets Packets Transmitted 65 127 Octets The total number of pack ets including bad packets received that were between 65 and 127 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but includ ing FCS octets Packets Transmitted 128 255 Octets The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 128 and 255 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets Packets Transmitted 256 511 Octets The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 256 and 511 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets Packets Transmitted 512 1023 Octets The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets Packets Transmitted 1024 1518 Octets The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 1024 and 1518 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets Packets Transmitted 1519 1522 Octets The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 1519 and 1522 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets Max Info The maximum size of the Info non MAC field that this port will receive or transmit Packets Transmitted Successfully Total The number of frames that have been transmitted by this port t
115. Config lt mstid gt Switching config spanningtree mst vlan add Global spanning tree mst vlan lt mstid gt lt mstid gt lt vlan gt Config lt vlanid gt Switching config spanningtree mst vlan Global no spanning tree mst vlan lt mstid gt remove lt mstid gt lt vlan gt Config lt vlanid gt Switching config spanningtree mst priority Global spanning tree mst priority lt mstid gt lt mstid gt lt 0 61440 gt Config lt 0 61440 gt Global no spanning tree mst priority lt mstid gt Config IS CLI Mapping A 29 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Table 13 2 IS CLI Mapping continued CLI Command Package 7300 Series L3 Switch Command Mode Syntax Switching config spanningtree mst port Interface spanning tree mst lt mstid gt cost pathcost lt mstid gt lt slot port gt Config lt 1 200000000 gt auto lt 1 200000000 auto gt Interface no spanning tree mst lt mstid gt cost Config Switching config spanningtree mst port Interface spanning tree mst lt mstid gt priority lt mstid gt lt slot port gt Config port priority lt 0 240 gt lt 0 240 gt Interface no spanning tree mst lt mstid gt Config port priority Switching show inventory Privileged show hardware EXEC Switching show sysinfo Privileged show sysinfo EXEC Switching show arp switch Privileged show arp switch EXEC Switching show forwardingdb table macaddr Priv
116. EC HTTP Commands ip http secure port This command is used to set the sslt port where port can be 1 65535 and the default is port 443 Default 443 Format ip http secure port portid Mode Privileged EXEC no ip http secure port This command is used to reset the sslt port to the default value Format no ip http secure port Mode Privileged EXEC Switching Commands 8 35 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software ip http secure protocol This command is used to set protocol levels versions The protocol level can be set to TLS1 SSL3 or to both TLS1 and SSL3 Default SSL3 and TLS1 Format ip http secure protocol SSL3 TLS1 Mode Privileged EXEC no ip http secure protocol This command is used to remove protocol levels versions for secure HTTP Format no ip http secure protocol SSL3 TLS1 Mode Privileged EXEC ip http secure server This command is used to enable the secure socket layer for secure HTTP Default Disabled Format ip http secure server Mode Privileged EXEC no ip http secure server This command is used to disable the secure socket layer for secure HTTP Format ip http secure server Mode Privileged EXEC ip http server This command enables access to the switch through the Web interface When access is enabled the user can login to the switch from the Web interface When access is disabled the user cannot login to the switch s We
117. EC User Users configured locally to have access to the specified port show radius This command is used to display the various RADIUS configuration items for the switch as well as the configured RADIUS servers If the optional token servers is not included the following RADIUS configuration items will be displayed Format show radius servers Mode Privileged EXEC Switching Commands 8 109 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Primary Server IP Address Indicates the configured server currently in use for authenti cation Number of configured servers The configured IP address of the authentication server Max number of retransmits The configured value of the maximum number of times a request packet is retransmitted Timeout Duration The configured timeout value in seconds for request re trans missions Accounting Mode Yes or No If the optional token servers is included the following information regarding the configured RADIUS servers is displayed IP Address IP Address of the configured RADIUS server Port The port in use by this server Type Primary or secondary Secret Configured Yes No show radius statistics This command is used to display the statistics for RADIUS or configured server To show the confifured RADIUS server statistic the IP Address specified must match that of a previously configured RADIUS server On execution the following fields are di
118. ECTION uisa ore Bereet 15 8 Appendix C Glossary Ke 16 1 EE 16 2 EE 16 3 E ENEE 16 4 A E E E O E T A 16 5 E 16 6 SE 16 7 EE 16 8 EE 16 9 em MTM TE T 16 9 Eee ren Debo entre Teeter ncn eT oU D ue ELA RM UN UM reer cer crore 16 11 OR 16 12 E 16 14 Bra ni 16 14 mee 16 15 ee 16 16 pem A AN EE sateen ee 16 17 Br ae cra aay A tt ci at he ae cl ceca ga 16 18 RE 16 19 WE 16 20 EE 16 20 NEE 16 21 KE 16 22 Contents XXV 202 10009 01_060204 xxvi Contents 202 10009 01 060204 Chapter 1 About This Guide Thank you for purchasing the NETGEAR 7300 Series L3 Switch Audience This reference manual assumes that the reader has basic to intermediate computer and Internet skills However basic computer network Internet and wireless technology tutorial information is provided in the Appendices This document describes configuration commands for the 7300 Series L3 Switch software The commands can be accessed from the CLI telnet and Web interfaces Why the Document was Created This document was created primarily for system administrators configuring and operating a system using 7300 Series L3 Switch software It is intended to provide an understanding of the configuration options of 7300 Series L3 Switch software It is assumed that the reader has an understanding of the relevant switch platforms It is also assumed that t
119. ED If the Policy Name is not specified this command displays a list of all defined DiffServ policies The following fields are displayed Policy Name Policy Type Class Members show diffserv service The name of this policy Note that the order in which the policies are displayed is not necessarily the same order in which they were created The policy type namely whether it is an inbound or outbound policy definition List of all class names associated with this policy This command displays policy service information for the specified interface and direction The lt slot port gt parameter specifies a valid slot number and port number for the system The direction parameter indicates the interface direction of interest Format Mode DiffServ Admin Mode Interface Direction Operational Status Policy Name Policy Details show diffserv service lt slot port gt in out Privileged EXEC The current setting of the DiffServ administrative mode An attached policy is only in effect on an interface while DiffServ is in an enabled mode The slot number and port number of the interface slot port The traffic direction of this interface service either in or out The current operational status of this DiffServ service interface The name of the policy attached to the interface in the indicated direction Attached policy details whose content is identical to that described for the show policy map lt policymapname
120. ETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software The display parameters when the argument is switchport is as follows Octets Received The total number of octets of data received by the processor excluding framing bits but including FCS octets Total Packets Received Without Error The total number of packets including broadcast packets and multicast packets received by the processor Unicast Packets Received The number of subnetwork unicast packets delivered to a higher layer protocol Multicast Packets Received The total number of packets received that were directed to a multicast address Note that this number does not include packets directed to the broadcast address Broadcast Packets Received The total number of packets received that were directed to the broadcast address Note that this does not include multicast packets Receive Packets Discarded The number of inbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being deliverable to a higher layer protocol A possible reason for discarding a packet could be to free up buffer space Octets Transmitted The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface including framing characters Packets Transmitted without Errors The total number of packets transmitted out of the interface Unicast Packets Transmitted The total number of packets that higher level protocols requested be transmitted to a
121. ETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software show ip ospf database This command displays the link state database This command takes no options The information below will only be displayed if OSPF is enabled Format Mode Router ID Area ID LSA Type LS ID Age Sequence Checksum Options show ip ospf database Privileged EXEC and User EXEC Is a 32 bit dotted decimal number representing the LSDB inter face Is the IP address identifying the router ID The types are router network ipnet sum asbr sum as external group member tmp 1 tmp 2 opaque link opaque area Is a number that uniquely identifies an LSA that a router origi nates from all other self originated LSA s of the same LS type Is a number representing the age of the link state advertisement in seconds Is a number that represents which LSA is more recent Is to total number LSA checksum This is an integer It indicates that the LSA receives special han dling during routing calculations show ip ospf interface This command displays the information for the IFO object or virtual interface tables Format Mode IP Address Subnet Mask OSPF Admin Mode OSPF Area ID show ip ospf interface lt slot port gt Privileged EXEC and User EXEC Represents the IP address for the specified interface This is a configured value Is a mask of the network and host portion of the IP address for the OSPF interface This value was configur
122. EXEC and User EXEC show ip ospf virtual link brief lt areaid gt lt neighbor gt Routing Routing show router route table show router route bestroutes Privileged EXEC and User EXEC Privileged EXEC and User EXEC show ip route show ip route bestroutes Routing show router route entry lt networkaddr gt Privileged EXEC and User EXEC show ip route entry lt networkaddr gt Routing Routing show router route prefrences show router vrrp info Privileged EXEC and User EXEC Privileged EXEC and User EXEC show ip route preferences show ip vrrp 202 10009 01_060204 IS CLI Mapping User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Table 13 2 IS CLI Mapping continued CLI Command Package 7300 Series L3 Switch Command Mode Syntax Routing show router vrrp interface stats Privileged show ip vrrp interface stats lt slot lt slot port gt lt VrID gt EXEC and port lt VriD gt User EXEC Routing show router vrrp interface detailed Privileged show ip vrrp interface lt slot port gt lt slot port gt lt VrID gt EXECand lt VriD gt User EXEC Routing show router vrrp interface Privileged show ip vrrp interface brief summary EXEC and User EXEC Routing show router rtrdiscovery lt slot port Privileged show ip irdp lt slot port gt all all gt EXEC and
123. Eee A 12 6 OTE O A aaa E A deus 12 6 Seice INC E 12 6 E EE 12 6 DHCP Server Show Commands esee 12 6 show ip dhcp binding C 12 7 show MING global contio Sl Lasse tecnici id 12 7 show Ip amem pool Conr ellori uos qai te nod vte aee a a Ueq sb Ke show We doen sever SIMILIS TUE deseen bed e v ub i dg ai a bra 12 8 DHCP Server A e E 12 9 clear ip dhcp binding csi 12 9 clear ip dhep server SIQUSUCE atras VEN Chapter 13 FSM7326P Power Over Ethernet Commands Power Over Ethernet POE Commands score 13 2 POR EE E UU LO SEEN acm ire e UM 13 3 POE lr LE 13 3 poe usagethreshold Genee O EE REO 13 3 aho DOE LE 13 3 cc mE ER E P eT M S 13 4 NI LEE 13 4 ET E g DE m a e MODOS ion Tee Appendix A IS CLI Mapping Appendix B Cabling Guidelines Fast Ethernet Cable Guidelines 1 otto or b tora Ve xxiv Contents 202 10009 01 060204 TT VOTE Category 5 Cable Specifications leido dead re Ee gees EG de D2 Twisted Pair Cables qe ace ege Eed Man een eaten 15 3 Patch Panels and Ee 15 4 Using 1000BASE T Gigabit Ethernet over Category 5 Cable Eben 15 5 RABID E 15 5 Noa End CIS ee e RE 15 6 Raton Cables apa 15 6 RdJ 45 Plug and EE Connections ii Re cR GA IER RIDERE 15 6 CORR
124. Group Management Protocol IGMP is the standard for IP Multicasting on the Internet IGMP is used to establish host memberships in particular multicast groups on a single network The mechanisms of the protocol allow a host to inform its local router using Host Membership Reports that it wants to receive messages addressed to a specific multicast group All hosts conforming to Level 2 of the IP Multicasting specification require IGMP IP See Internet Protocol on page 10 IP Multicasting Sending out data to distributed servers on the MBone Multicast Backbone For large amounts of data IP Multicast is more efficient than normal Internet transmissions because the server can broadcast a message to many recipients simultaneously Unlike traditional Internet traffic that requires separate connections for each source destination pair IP Multicasting allows many recipients to share the same source This means that just one set of packets is transmitted for all the destinations Internet Protocol The method or protocol by which data is sent from one computer to another on the Internet Each computer known as a host on the Internet has at least one IP address that uniquely identifies it among all other computers on the Internet When you send or receive data for example an e mail note or a Web page the message gets divided into little chunks called packets Each of these packets contains both the sender s Internet address and the receiver s a
125. I Commands Differentiated Services 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software This command may be issued at any time if the class is currently referenced by one or more policies or by any other class this deletion attempt shall fail Format no class map lt classname gt Mode Global Config class map rename This command changes the name of a DiffServ class The lt classname gt is the name of an existing DiffServ class The lt newclassname gt parameter is a case sensitive alphanumeric string from 1 to 31 characters uniquely identifying the class Note The class name default is reserved and must not be used here Default None Format class map rename classname lt newclassname gt Mode Global Config match any This command adds to the specified class definition a match condition whereby all packets are considered to belong to the class The optional not parameter has the effect of negating this match condition for the class e none of the packets are considered to belong to the class Default None Format match not any Mode Class Map Config match class map This command adds to the specified class definition the set of match conditions defined for another class The lt refclassname gt is the name of an existing DiffServ class whose match conditions are being referenced by the specified class definition Note There is no not option for this match com
126. IP address to use to connect to a RADIUS authentication server Up to 3 servers can be configured per RADIUS client If the maximum number of configured servers is reached the command will fail until one of the servers is removed by executing the no form of the command If the optional port parameter is used the command will configure the UDP port number to use to connect to the configured RADIUS server In order to configure the UDP port number the IP address must match that of a previously configured RADIUS authentication server The port number must lie between 1 65535 with 1812 being the default value If the acct token is used the command configures the IP address to use for the RADIUS accounting server Only a single accounting server can be configured If an accounting server is currently configured it must be removed from the configuration using the no form of the command before this command succeeds If the optional port parameter is used the command will configure the UDP port to use to connect to the RADIUS accounting server The IP address specified must match that of a previously configured accounting server If a port is already configured for the accounting server then the new port will replace the previously configured value The port must be a value in the range 1 65535 with 1813 being the default value Format radius server host auth acct ipaddr lt port gt Mode Global Config no radius server host T
127. IPP as cid ci pete 9 10 no arp resptime 9 10 cip lg H A no arp retries arp timeout bou inm dd dos His KENE GE STT axe erg Up icici AA 9 11 AUSTEN aia ell NO ALTURA sie e e OU MM 9 12 no bootpdhcprelay cidoptmode Race Tm n ini oss oe 9 12 bogigdiisprelay disable svi imine dI eR ddr Da eu d a ea d b RTE no bootpdricprelay E ai e bootpdhcprelay maxhopcount Ee Soso SE 9 13 nb bootpahoprelav maxhopeplIE E 9 13 bootpdheprelay minwattime cnica UO no boetpdheprelsy minwallime la bo tpdheprelay rie D 9 14 no bootpdhcprelay serverip M M 9 14 clear id ial ee Contents xvii 202 10009 01_060204 no derault intormallon onginate RIP E 9 15 default metric OSPF psc nou Hines Seege insu Krass 9 15 aiv uu cri ISE A e 9 15 dalmata A o E clics 208 at iaa 9 16 no enable OSPF Suerge Segen E Sege 9 16 AMAS D EE 9 16 ho BAIS RIPI canaria er 9 16 distance ospf nm GES 9 16 FNS USS NAT eM 9 17 ied re EE EE A E IIS e EVITE T DT 9 17 no distribute list out Agen 9 e eile Tiea TOUT a no distribute list out no default information originate
128. ML version of this manual 1 Left pane Use the left pane to view the Contents Index Search and Favorites tabs To view the HTML version of the manual you must have a version 4 or later browser with JavaScript enabled 2 Toolbar buttons Use the toolbar buttons across the top to navigate print pages and more The Show in Contents button locates the current topic in the Contents tab Previous Next buttons display the previous or next topic The PDF button links to a PDF version of the full manual The Print button prints the current topic Using this button when a step by step procedure is displayed will send the entire procedure to your printer you do not have to worry about specifying the correct range of pages 3 Right pane Use the right pane to view the contents of the manual Also each page of the manual includes a PDF of This Chapter link at the top right which links to a PDF file containing just the currently selected chapter of the manual About This Guide 1 3 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software How to Print this Manual To print this manual you man choose one of the following several options according to your needs Printing a How To Sequence of Steps in the HTML View Use the Print button E on the upper right of the toolbar to print the currently displayed topic Using this button when a step by step procedure is displayed will
129. Mask The IP mask of the routing interface in 32 bit dotted decimal for mat 9 38 Routing Commands 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Netdir Bcast MultiCast Fwd In Access Mode Out Access Mode show ip irdp Indicates if IP forwards net directed broadcasts on this interface Possible values are Enable or Disable Indicates the multicast forwarding administrative mode on the interface Possible values are Enable or Disable Indicates the inbound access list checking administrative mode on this interface Possible values are Enable or Disable Indicates the outbound access list checking administrative mode on this interface Possible values are Enable or Disable This command displays the router discovery information for all interfaces or a specified interface Format Mode Ad Mode Max Int Min Int Adv Life Preferences show ip ospf show ip irdp slot port all Privileged EXEC and User EXEC Displays the advertise mode which indicates whether router dis covery is enabled or disabled on this interface Displays the maximum advertise interval which is the maximum time allowed between sending router advertisements from the interface in seconds Displays the minimum advertise interval which is the minimum time allowed between sending router advertisements from the interface in seconds Displays advertise lifetime which is the value of the lifeti
130. NACK The number of DHCPNACK messages that were sent by the server DHCP Server Clear Commands These commands clears the DHCP Server address bindings and statistics clear ip dhcp binding This command deletes an automatic address binding from the DHCP server database If is specified the bindings corresponding to all the addresses are deleted address is a valid IP address made up of four decimal bytes ranging from 0 to 255 IP address 0 0 0 0 is invalid Default None Format clear ip dhcp binding address gt Mode Privileged EXEC clear ip dhcp server statistics This command clear DHCP server statistics counters Format clear ip dhcp server statistics Mode Privileged EXEC DHCP Server Commands 12 9 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software 12 10 DHCP Server Commands 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Chapter 13 FSM7326P Power Over Ethernet Commands This chapter provides information on the Power Over Ethernet Commands available in the FSM7326P Switch software The IEEE 802 3 Ethernet standard body has a task force called the 802 3af which specifies the method to deliver power over the LAN 802 3af also known as Power over Ethernet defines a way to build Ethernet power sourcing equipment and powered terminals The specification involves delivering 48 volts of AC power over unshiel
131. NMP RFCs The SNMP agent sends traps through TCP IP to an external SNMP manager based on the SNMP configuration the trap receiver and other SNMP community parameters 8 26 Switching Commands 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Format show snmpcommunity Mode Privileged EXEC SNMP Community Name The community string to which this entry grants access A valid entry is a case sensitive alphanumeric string of up to 16 charac ters Each row of this table must contain a unique community name Client IP Address An IP address or portion thereof from which this device will accept SNMP packets with the associated community The requesting entity s IP address is ANDed with the Subnet Mask before being compared to the IP Address Note That if the Subnet Mask is set to 0 0 0 0 an IP Address of 0 0 0 0 matches all IP addresses The default value is 0 0 0 0 Client IP Mask A mask to be ANDed with the requesting entity s IP address before comparison with IP Address If the result matches with IP Address then the address is an authenticated IP address For example if the IP Address 9 47 128 0 and the corresponding Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 a range of incoming IP addresses would match i e the incoming IP Address could equal 9 47 128 0 9 47 128 255 The default value is 0 0 0 0 Access Mode The access level for this community string Status The status of this community acces
132. OSPF type2 Config Routing config router ospf interface areaid Interface ip ospf areaid lt areaid gt lt slot prot gt lt areaid gt Config Routing config router ospf interface Interface ip ospf authentication none simple authentication lt slot port gt lt none Config lt key gt encrypt key lt keyid gt simple gt key Interface no ip ospf authentication Config IS CLI Mapping A 15 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Table 13 2 IS CLI Mapping continued CLI Command Package 7300 Series L3 Switch Command Mode Syntax Routing config router ospf interface interval Interface ip ospf dead interval dead lt slot port gt lt 1 2147483647 gt Config lt 1 2147483647 gt Interface no ip ospf dead interval Config Routing config router ospf interface interval Interface ip ospf hellointerval lt 1 65535 gt hello lt slot port gt lt 1 65535 gt Config Interface no ip ospf hellointerval Config Routing config router ospf interface interval Interface ip ospf retransmit interval lt 0 3600 gt retransmit lt slot port gt lt 0 3600 gt Config Interface no ip ospf retransmit interval Config Routing config router ospf interface Interface ip ospf transmit delay lt 1 3600 gt iftransitdelay lt slot port gt lt 1 3600 gt Config Interface no ip ospf transmit delay lt 1 3600 gt Config Routing
133. P Mode Link State show ip rip interface brief Privileged EXEC and User EXEC Is the unit slot port identifying each interface The IP source address used by the specified RIP interface The RIP version s used when sending updates on the specified interface The types are none RIP 1 RIP 1c RIP 2 The RIP version s allowed when receiving updates from the specified interface The types are none RIP 1 RIP 2 Both RIP administrative mode of router RIP operation enable acti vates disable de activates it The mode of the interface up or down Routing Commands 9 49 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software show ip route This command causes the entire route table to be displayed This commands takes no options Format Mode Network Address Subnet Mask Protocol Next Hop Intf Next Hop IP Address show ip route Privileged EXEC and User EXEC Is an IP address identifying the network on the specified inter face Is a mask of the network and host portion of the IP address for the router interface Tells which protocol added the specified route The possibilities are local static OSPF or RIP The outgoing router interface to use when forwarding traffic to the next destination The outgoing router IP address to use when forwarding traffic to the next router if any in the path toward the destination Total Number of Routes The total number of
134. Pope pr ep prt M e atte 8 39 Galata NOS ec deleteport ege Geste dia 8 40 o cic en CETT 8 40 qi coi ii eio no momor RENE a 8 40 Montor SESION ModE aa 8 41 D I monitor Session MOT T 8 41 IEN E Ee MO CEE ero e UE port NACH MOIS EE ios doi 8 41 Contents 202 10009 01 060204 STEEN port channel ani MIS apria aa a E no port channel adminmode ccceescceeesceceeeeeeceseeeeseeeecsaeeeseeeeeesaeesseeeeeeas 8 42 port channel linktrap no port channel ie pOr IEN E i genee UU EE no protocol group protocol vian BEOUD usas het rca test dta Ep Haa ii ad ee Ee Tel EE praep KEE TEE 8 44 no protocol vlan group KC E Sergap Mer IGN PEN A 8 45 SET RUE imer pi a nord da no eet qam imer RIAM rn a set garp timer leave i no setga timer LER oe E set garp timer leave all sss nennt 8 46 no set garp timer leave all set garp timer leaveall no set garp timer leaveall set garp timer leaveall all Geer na set gap amer E ET SENTIDA Eesti See a teen Ime ra pp em a na Sel amp ANIMOS e o a A Ea ha SEL amp Inter ecBImiDOdB arcaica Ee OU menace note ll a A no set gmrp interfacemode all sese s i GUT CUMMING RETE Tn n Sel e TI e E pair Bal set gvrp interfacemode no set gvrp interfacemode
135. Pv6 provides for much longer addresses and therefore for the possibility of many more Internet users IPv6 includes the capabilities of IPv4 and any server that can support IPv6 packets can also support IPv4 packets C 10 Glossary 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software L LAN See Local Area Network on page 11 LDAP See Lightweight Directory Access Protocol on page 11 Lightweight Directory Access Protocol A set of protocols for accessing information directories LDAP is based on the standards contained within the X 500 standard but is significantly simpler Unlike X 500 LDAP supports TCP IP which is necessary for any type of Internet access Although not yet widely implemented LDAP should eventually make it possible for almost any application running on virtually any computer platform to obtain directory information such as e mail addresses and public keys Because LDAP is an open protocol applications need not worry about the type of server hosting the directory Learning The bridge examines the Layer 2 source addresses of every frame on the attached networks called listening and then maintains a table or cache of which MAC addresses are attached to each of its ports Link State In routing protocols the declared information about the available interfaces and available neighbors of a router or network The protocol s topological database is formed from
136. RP PDU s received in the GARP layer GVRP PDU s Transmitted The count of GVRP PDU s trans mitted from the GARP layer GVRP Failed Registrations The number of times attempted GVRP registrations could not be completed GMRP PDU s received The count of GMRP PDU s received in the GARP layer GMRP PDU s Transmitted The count of GMRP PDU s trans mitted from the GARP layer GMRP Failed Registrations The number of times attempted GMRP registrations could not be completed STP BPDUs Transmitted Spanning Tree Protocol Bridge Pro tocol Data Units sent STP BPDUs Received Spanning Tree Protocol Bridge Protocol Data Units received RST BPDUs Transmitted Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Bridge Protocol Data Units sent RSTP BPDUs Received Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Bridge Protocol Data Units received MSTP BPDUs Transmitted Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Bridge Protocol Data Units sent MSTP BPDUs Received Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Bridge Protocol Data Units received EAPOL Frames Received The number of valid EAPOL frames of any type that have been received by this authenticator EAPOL Frames Transmitted The number of EAPOL frames of any type that have been transmitted by this authenticator Time Since Counters Last Cleared The elapsed time in days hours minutes and sec onds since the statistics for this port were last cleared 8 10 Switching Commands 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the N
137. RP in the router Format no ip vrrp Mode Global Config ip vrrp mode This command enables the virtual router configured on the specified interface Enabling the status field starts a virtual router The parameter lt vrID gt is the virtual router ID which has an integer value ranging from 1 to 255 Default Disabled Format ip vrrp lt vrID gt mode Mode Interface Config no ip vrrp mode This command disables the virtual router configured on the specified interface Disabling the status field stops a virtual router Format no ip vrrp lt vrID gt mode Mode Interface Config 9 58 Routing Commands 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software ip vrrp ip This command sets the ipaddress value for a virtual router The value for lt ipaddr gt is the IP Address which is to be configured on that interface for VRRP The parameter lt vrID gt is the virtual router ID which has an integer value range from 1 to 255 Default There is no default value for ipaddress Format ip vrrp lt vrID gt ip lt ipaddr gt Mode Interface Config ip vrrp preempt This command sets the preemption mode value for the virtual router configured on a specified interface The parameter lt vrID gt is the virtual router ID which has an integer value range from 1 to 255 Default Enabled Format ip vrrp vrID preempt Mode Interface Config no ip vrrp preempt This command sets the default preemptio
138. Relay on the system Format no bootpdhcprelay maxhopcount Mode Global Config bootpdhcprelay minwaittime This command configures the minimum wait time in seconds for BootP DHCP Relay on the system When the BOOTP relay agent receives a BOOTREQUEST message it MAY use the seconds since client began booting field of the request as a factor in deciding whether to relay the request or not The parameter has a range of 0 to 100 seconds Default 0 Format bootpdhcprelay minwaittime 0 100 Mode Global Config no bootpdhcprelay minwaittime This command configures the default minimum wait time in seconds for BootP DHCP Relay on the system Format no bootpdhcprelay minwaittime Mode Global Config Routing Commands 9 13 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software bootpdhcprelay serverip This command configures the server IP Address for BootP DHCP Relay on the system The lt ipaddr gt parameter is an IP address in a 4 digit dotted decimal format Default 0 0 0 0 Format bootpdhcprelay serverip lt ipaddr gt Mode Global Config no bootpdhcprelay serverip This command configures the default server IP Address for BootP DHCP Relay on the system Format no bootpdhcprelay serverip Mode Global Config clear arp cache This command causes all ARP entries of type dynamic to be removed from the ARP cache If the gateway parameter is specified the dynamic entries of type gateway are
139. SPF Transit Delay for the specified interface Format no ip ospf transmit delay Mode Interface Config 9 28 Routing Commands 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software ip rip This command enables RIP on a router interface Default Disabled Format ip rip Mode Interface Config no ip rip This command disables RIP on a router interface Format no ip rip Mode Interface Config ip rip authentication This command sets the RIP Version 2 Authentication Type and Key for the specified interface The value of lt type gt is either none simple or encrypt The value for authentication key key must be 16 bytes or less The key is composed of standard displayable non control keystrokes from a Standard 101 102 key keyboard If the value of lt type gt is encrypt a keyid in the range of 0 and 255 must be specified Default The default authentication type is none Default The default password key is an empty string Unauthenticated interfaces do not need an authentication key Default The default key id is not defined Unauthenticated interfaces do not need an authentication key id Format ip rip authentication none simple lt key gt encrypt lt key gt lt keyid gt Mode Interface Config no ip rip authentication This command sets the default RIP Version 2 Authentication Type Format no ip rip authentication Mode Interface Config Routing Commands 9 29 20
140. T BPDUs IEEE 802 1w functionality supported e 802 1s MST BPDUs are transmitted IEEE 802 1s functionality supported Default 802 1s Format spanning tree forceversion lt 802 1d 802 1w 802 1s gt Mode Global Config no spanning tree forceversion This command sets the Force Protocol Version parameter to the default value i e 802 1s Format no spanning tree forceversion Mode Global Config spanning tree forward time This command sets the Bridge Forward Delay parameter to a new value for the common and internal spanning tree The forward time value is in seconds within a range of 4 to 30 with the value being greater than or equal to Bridge Max Age 2 1 Default 15 Format spanning tree forward time 4 30 Mode Global Config Switching Commands 8 85 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software no spanning tree forward time This command sets the Bridge Forward Delay parameter for the common and internal spanning tree to the default value i e 15 Format no spanning tree forward time Mode Global Config spanning tree hello time This command sets the Hello Time parameter to a new value for the common and internal spanning tree The hellotime value is in whole seconds within a range of 1 to 10 with the value being less than or equal to Bridge Max Age 2 1 Default 2 Format spanning tree hello time lt 1 10 gt Mode Global Config no spanning
141. The device initial state is called the default mode 4 When the prompt asks for operator login execute the following steps Type the word admin in the login area Since a number of the Quick Setup commands require administrator account rights NETGEAR suggests logging into an administrator account Do not enter a password because there is no password in the default mode e Press the enter key two times e The CLI User EXEC prompt will be displayed e Use enable to switch to the Privileged EXEC mode from User EXEC e Use configure to switch to the Global Config mode from Privileged EXEC e Use exit to return to the previous mode Quick Start up 6 1 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software System Info and System Setup Quick Start up Software Version Information Table 6 1 Quick Start up Software Version Information Command Details show hardware in Privileged EXEC Allows the user to see the software version the device contains System Description The switch s model name Burned in MAC address the MAC address assigned to this switch CPU Software version software release of this switch Quick Start up Physical Port Data Table 6 2 Quick Start up Physical Port Data Command show port all in Privileged EXEC Details Displays the Ports slot port Type Indicates if the port is a
142. Time have no effect The factory default is disabled show gvrp configuration This command displays Generic Attributes Registration Protocol GARP information for one or all interfaces Format show gvrp configuration lt slot port gt all Mode privileged EXEC and User EXEC Interface Join Timer Leave Timer This displays the slot port of the interface that this row in the table describes Specifies the interval between the transmission of GARP PDUs registering or re registering membership for an attribute Cur rent attributes are a VLAN or multicast group There is an instance of this timer on a per Port per GARP participant basis Permissible values are 10 to 100 centiseconds 0 1 to 1 0 sec onds The factory default is 20 centiseconds 0 2 seconds The finest granularity of specification is 1 centisecond 0 01 seconds Specifies the period of time to wait after receiving an unregister request for an attribute before deleting the attribute Current attributes are a VLAN or multicast group This may be consid ered a buffer time for another station to assert registration for the same attribute in order to maintain uninterrupted service There is an instance of this timer on a per Port per GARP participant basis Permissible values are 20 to 600 centiseconds 0 2 to 6 0 Switching Commands 8 55 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software LeaveAll Timer
143. Types Packets Dropped packets received from this server Malformed packets include packets with an invalid length Bad authenticators or signature attributes or unknown types are not included as malformed access responses The number of RADIUS Access Response packets containing invalid authenticators or signature attributes received from this server The number of RADIUS Access Request packets destined for this server that have not yet timed out or received a response The number of authentication timeouts to this server The number of RADIUS packets of unknown types which were received from this server on the authentication port The number of RADIUS packets received from this server on the authentication port and dropped for some other reason show users authentication This command displays all user and all authentication login information It also displays the authentication login list assigned to the default user Format Mode User System Login show users authentication Privileged EXEC This field lists every user that has an authentication login list assigned This field displays the authentication login list assigned to the user for system login Switching Commands 8 111 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software 802 1x Port Security This field displays the authentication login list assigned to the user for 802 1x port security users defaultlo
144. UNN TP Loos rsaioasa danagin OU P M agar aea Lad ci a panied raat RU dla a p spanning tree Dpdumigralioncheck ues aauina aaaea 8 68 no spanning tree bpdumigrationcheck A O OB Cc M s speed ee e is OS storm control broadcast PEN M Ais E ne 8 69 o seus o AAA A 8 69 SEELEN eene Eran IS nterne ET de d VILI TNNT E E TDI 8 70 Fe VIS see ae Stee epes 8 71 van ED TENTI NI UM no vlan acceptframe 8 71 vlan ingressfilter papacy RUE Tu ve See a E 8 71 A A a aaa ai 8 72 Vii MO Ee EI RE rer EL UE 8 72 GE elen 8 72 aca A TN An dan port aceptada Me nl no vlan port acceptframe all NE SES T didici Eed ci ion 8 74 op a UE 8 74 no vlan port ingressfilter all T T A A ell Moe A A AS A ee EE 8 75 vlan port tagging all NES dps iia E etes 8 75 no vlan port tagging all vlan protocol group i t T vlan protocol group add protocol E Spence pus nones 8 xii Contents 202 10009 01 060204 vlan protocol group remove sses i vlan pvid T T TEE ee iod ious sic 8 ee EID EE vlan tagging no vlan tagging ii opaning Tee COn sica Show Spaning pd show spanning tree mst port STE sisside E show spanning iree mst Summary De show spanning tree SUMMAry ci ka 8 82 show spanning tree vlan m Hec SE re
145. User EXEC Routing show router bootpdhcprelay Privileged show bootpdhcprelay EXEC and User EXEC Routing config arp agetime Global arp timeout lt 15 21600 gt lt 15 3600seconds gt Config Global no arp timeout Config Routing config arp cachesize lt 10 128 gt Global arp cachesize lt 48 112 gt Config Global no arp cachesize Config Routing config arp create lt arpentry gt Global arp lt ipaddress gt lt macaddress gt lt macaddr gt Config Routing config arp delete lt arpentry gt Global no arp lt ipaddress gt lt macaddress gt lt macaddr gt Config IS CLI Mapping A 13 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Table 13 2 IS CLI Mapping continued CLI Command Package 7300 Series L3 Switch Command Mode Syntax Routing config arp resptime lt seconds gt Global arp resptime lt 1 10 gt Config Global no arp resptime Config Routing config arp retries Global arp retries 0 10 Config Global no arp retries Config Routing config interface encaps lt slot port gt Interface encapsulation lt ethernet gt lt snap gt lt ethernet snap gt Config Routing config interface routing lt slot port gt Interface routing lt enable disable gt Config Interface no routing Config Routing config ip interface mtu lt slot port gt Interface mtu lt 1522 9216 gt lt 576 1500 gt Config Routing config ip in
146. VLAN Identifier vlanid associated with each VLAN The range of the VLAN ID is 1 to 4094 VLAN Name A string associated with this VLAN as a convenience It can be up to 16 alphanumeric characters long including blanks The default is blank VLAN ID 1 always has a name of Default This field is optional VLAN Type Type of VLAN which can be Default WLAN ID 1 a static one that is configured and permanently defined or a Dynamic one that is created by GVRP registration 8 64 Switching Commands 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software show vlan port This command displays VLAN port information Format Mode slot port Port VLAN ID show vlan port lt slot port gt all Privileged EXEC and User EXEC Indicates by slot id and port number which port is controlled by the fields on this line It is possible to set the parameters for all ports by using the selectors on the top line The VLAN ID that this port will assign to untagged frames or pri ority tagged frames received on this port The value must be for an existing VLAN The factory default is 1 Acceptable Frame Types Specifies the types of frames that may be received on this port Ingress Filtering GVRP Default Priority shutdown This command disables a port Default Format The options are VLAN only and Admit AII When set to VLAN only untagged frames or priority tagged frames rec
147. VP See Resource Reservation Setup Protocol on page 17 RTOS See Real Time Operating System on page 17 S Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is the protocol governing network management and the monitoring of network devices and their functions It is not necessarily limited to TCP IP networks The versions have the following differences SNMP full Security is based on community strings SNMPsec historic Security is based on parties Few if any vendors implemented this version of the protocol which is now largely forgotten SNMPv2p historic For this version much work was done to update the SNMPv1 protocol and the SMIv1 and not just security The result was updated protocol operations new protocol operations and data types and party based security from SNMPsec SNMPv2c experimental This version of the protocol is called community string based SNMPv2 It is an update of the protocol operations and data types of SNMPv2p and uses community based security from SNMPv1 SNMPv2u experimental This version of the protocol uses the protocol operations and data types of SNMPv2c and security based on users SNMPv2 experimental This version combined the best features of SNMPv2p and SNMPv2u It is also called SNMPv2star The documents defining this version were never published as RFCs SNMPvy3 proposed This version of the protocol is a combination of user based security and the protocol operations and d
148. a detection method for determining whether the Ethernet device on the other end of the cable the Powered Device PD is 802 3af compliant or not Most vendors today implement the PSE technology outside of the existing switch a technique called a midspan solution AVAYA and Cisco also implement this technology inside the switch called an end span solution FSM7326P Power Over Ethernet Commands 13 1 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Attached to the PSE is the UPS A UPS is connected to each device that requires alternative power With Power over Ethernet this function is centralized in a UPS connected to the PSE Note that this may require further changes in the environmental conditions of the room needing to support this UPS with all of its electrical and cooling requirements The current delivered to each node is limited to 350 milliamps The total amount of continuous power that can be delivered to each node taking into account some power loss over the cable run is 12 95 watts IP phones and wireless LAN access points typically consume 3 5 to 10 watts Power is carried on two wire pairs to comply with safety standards and existing cable limitations Management may also be added to monitor and control the PSE This management function may be integrated into a standard network management platform using the simple network management protocol SNMP or through a custom platform
149. ace The factory default value is 0 0 0 0 Default Gateway The default gateway for this IP interface The factory default value is 0 0 0 0 Burned In MAC Address The burned in MAC address used for in band connectivity Locally Administered MAC Address If desired a locally administered MAC address can be configured for in band connectivity To take effect MAC Address Type must be set to Locally Administered Enter the address as twelve hexadecimal digits 6 bytes with a colon between each byte Bit 1 of byte O must be set to a 1 and bit 0 toa 0 i e byte 0 should have the following mask xxxx xx10 The MAC address used by this bridge when it must be referred to in a unique fashion It is recommended that this be the numerically smallest MAC address of all ports that belong to this bridge However it is only required to be unique When concatenated with dot1dStpPriority a unique Bridgeldentifier is formed which is used in the Spanning Tree Protocol MAC Address Type Specifies which MAC address should be used for in band con nectivity The choices are the burned in or the Locally Adminis tered address The factory default is to use the burned in MAC address 8 24 Switching Commands 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Network Configuration Protocol Current Indicates which network protocol is being used The options are bootp dhcp none Java Mode Specifies if the s
150. ach CLI command is illustrated using the structure outlined below CLI Command Format Commands are followed by values parameters or both Example 1 network parms lt ipaddr gt lt netmask gt lt gateway gt network parms is the command name e lt ipaddr gt lt netmask gt are the required values for the command e gateway is the optional value for the command Example 2 snmp server location loc snmp server location isthe command name e loc is the required parameter for the command Example 3 clear vlan clear vlanisthe command name Command The text in bold non italic font must be typed exactly as shown Command Line Interface Structure 5 1 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Parameters Parameters are order dependent The text in bold italics should be replaced with a name or number To use spaces as part of a name parameter enclose it in double quotes like this System Name with Spaces Parameters may be mandatory values optional values choices or a combination parameter The lt gt angle brackets indicate that a mandatory parameter must be entered in place of the brackets and text inside them parameter The square brackets indicate that an optional parameter may be entered in place of the brackets and text inside them choicel choice2 The indicates that only one of the paramete
151. ade up of four decimal bytes ranging from 0 to 255 IP address 0 0 0 0 is invalid Default None Format dns server address1 lt address2 gt lt address8 gt Mode DHCP Pool Config Mode no dns server This command removes the DNS Server list Format no dns server Mode DHCP Pool Config Mode 12 2 DHCP Server Commands 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software hardware address This command specifies the hardware address of a DHCP client Hardware address is the MAC address of the hardware platform of the client consisting of 6 bytes in dotted hexadecimal format Type indicates the protocol of the hardware platform It is 1 for 10 MB Ethernet and 6 for IEEE 802 Default Ethernet Format hardware address lt hardwareaddress gt type Mode DHCP Pool Config Mode no hardware address This command removes the hardware address of the DHCP client Format no hardware address Mode DHCP Pool Config Mode host This command specifies the IP address and network mask for a manual binding to a DHCP client Address and Mask are valid IP addresses each made up of four decimal bytes ranging from 0 to 255 IP address 0 0 0 0 is invalid The prefix length is an integer from 0 to 32 Default None Format host address mask prefix length Mode DHCP Pool Config Mode no host This command removes the IP address of the DHCP client Format no host Mode DHCP Pool Conf
152. alue notation the protocol number is a standard value assigned by IANA and is interpreted as an integer from 0 to 255 Note This command does not validate the protocol number value against the current list defined by IANA CLI Commands Differentiated Services 10 9 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software The optional not parameter has the effect of negating this match condition for the class 1 e match all IP Protocol numbers except for the one specified here Default None Format match not protocol protocol name lt 0 255 gt Mode Class Map Config match source address mac This command adds to the specified class definition a match condition based on the source MAC address of a packet The lt address gt parameter is any layer 2 MAC address formatted as six two digit hexadecimal numbers separated by colons e g 00 11 22 dd ee ff The lt macmask gt parameter is a layer 2 MAC address bit mask which need not be contiguous and is formatted as six two digit hexadecimal numbers separated by colons e g ff 07 23 ff fe dc The optional not parameter has the effect of negating this match condition for the class i e match all source MAC addresses except for what is specified here Default None Format match not source address mac lt address gt lt macmask gt Mode Class Map Config match srcip This command adds to the specified class definition a m
153. and is used to configure the primary RADIUS authentication server for this RADIUS client The primary server is the one that is used by default for handling RADIUS requests The remaining configured servers are only used if the primary server cannot be reached A maximum of three servers can be configured on each client Only one of these servers can be configured as the primary If a primary server is already configured prior to this command being executed the server specified by the IP address specified used in this command will become the new primary server The IP address must match that of a previously configured RADIUS authentication server Format radius server primary lt ipaddr gt Mode Global Config radius server retransmit This command sets the maximum number of times a request packet is re transmitted when no response is received from the RADIUS server The retries value is an integer in the range of 1 to 15 Default 10 Switching Commands 8 103 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Format radius server retransmit lt retries gt Mode Global Config no radius server retransmit This command sets the maximum number of times a request packet is re transmitted when no response is received from the RADIUS server to the default value i e 10 Format no radius server retransmit Mode Global Config radius server timeout This command sets the timeout value in
154. are no ip irdp This command disables Router Discovery on an interface Format no ip irdp Mode Interface Config ip irdp address This command configures the address to be used to advertise the router for the interface The valid values for ipaddr are 224 0 0 1 and 255 255 255 255 Default 224 0 0 1 Format ip irdp address lt ipaddr gt Mode Interface Config no ip irdp address This command configures the default address to be used to advertise the router for the interface Format no ip irdp address Mode Interface Config ip irdp holdtime This command configures the value in seconds of the holdtime field of the router advertisement sent from this interface The range is the maxadvertinterval to 9000 seconds Default 3 maxinterval Format ip irdp holdtime maxadvertinterval 9000 Mode Interface Config no ip irdp holdtime This command configures the default value in seconds of the holdtime field of the router advertisement sent from this interface Format no ip irdp holdtime Mode Interface Config 9 22 Routing Commands 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software ip irdp maxadvertinterval This command configures the maximum time in seconds allowed between sending router advertisements from the interface The range for maxadvertinterval is 4 to 1800 seconds Default 600 Format ip irdp maxadvertinterval lt 4 1800 gt Mode Interface Config no ip ird
155. are used an ordered list of methods are set in the authentication login list If the authentication login list does not exist a new authentication login list os first created and then the authentication methods are set in the authentication login list The maximum number of authentication login methods is three The possible method values are local radius and reject The value of 1oca1 indicates that the user s locally stored ID and password are used for authentication The value of radius indicates that the user s ID and password will be authenticated using the RADIUS server The value of reject indicates that the user is never authenticated To authenticate a user the authentication methods in the user s login will be attempted in order until an authentication attempt succeeds or fails Note that the default login list included with the default configuration can not be changed Format authentication login listname methodl method2 method3 Mode Global Config no authentication login This command deletes the specified authentication login list The attempt to delete will fail if any of the following conditions are true e The login list name is invalid or does not match an existing authentication login list e The specified authentication login list is assigned to any user or to the nonconfigured user for any component The login list is the default login list included with the default configuration and was not created using
156. ata types from SNMPv2p and support for proxies The security is based on that found in SNMPv2u and SNMPv2 and updated after much review The documents defining this protocol will soon be published as RFCs SimpleX signaling SX is one of IEEE 802 3 s designations for media For example 1000SX indicates 1000 gigabit Ethernet over short haul or short wavelength optical fiber SMII Serial Media Independent Interface C 18 Glossary 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software SNMP See Simple Network Management Protocol on page 18 Spanning Tree A technique that detects loops in a network and logically blocks the redundant paths ensuring that only one route exists between any two LANs Spanning Tree Protocol STP A protocol that finds the most efficient path between segments of a multi looped bridged network STP allows redundant switches and bridges to be used for network resilience without the broadcast storms associated with looping If a switch or bridge falls a new path to a redundant switch or bridge is opened SRAM Static Random Access Memory STP Spanning Tree Protocol See 802 1D on page 1 for more information stub area OSPF area that carries a default route intra area routes and interarea routes but does not carry external routes Virtual links cannot be configured across a stub area and they cannot contain an ASBR Compare with non stub area Se
157. atabase Possible values are IGMP Snooping GMRP and Static Filtering The text description of this multicast table entry The list of interfaces that are designated for forwarding Fwd and filtering Flt The resultant forwarding list is derived from combining all the component s forwarding interfaces and removing the interfaces that are listed as the static filtering interfaces show mac address table static This command displays the Static MAC Filtering information for all Static MAC Filters If all is selected all the Static MAC Filters in the system are displayed If a macaddr is entered a vlan must also be entered and the Static MAC Filter information will be displayed only for that MAC address and VLAN Format Mode MAC Address VLAN ID Source Port s Destination Port s show mac address table static lt macaddr gt lt vlanid gt all Privileged EXEC Is the MAC Address of the static MAC filter entry Is the VLAN ID of the static MAC filter entry Indicates the source port filter set s slot and port s Indicates the destination port filter set s slot and port s show mac address table staticfiltering This command displays the Static Filtering entries in the Multicast Forwarding Database MFDB table Format Mode Mac Address show mac address table staticfiltering Privileged EXEC A unicast MAC address for which the switch has forwarding and or filtering information The format is 6 or
158. atch condition based on the source IP address of a packet The lt ipaddr gt parameter specifies an IP address The lt ipmask gt parameter specifies an IP address bit mask note that although it resembles a standard subnet mask this bit mask need not be contiguous The optional not parameter has the effect of negating this match condition for the class i e match all source IP addresses except for what is specified here Default None Format match not srcip lt ipaddr gt lt ipmask gt Mode Class Map Config match srcl4port This command adds to the specified class definition a match condition based on the source layer 4 port of a packet using a single keyword or numeric notation or a numeric range notation 10 10 CLI Commands Differentiated Services 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software To specify the match condition as a single keyword notation the value for lt portkey gt is one of the supported port name keywords listed below The currently supported lt portkey gt values are domain echo ftp ftpdata http smtp snmp telnet tftp www Each of these translates into its equivalent port number which is used as both the start and end of a port range To specify the match condition as a numeric value one layer 4 port number is required The port number is an integer from 0 to 65535 To specify the match condition as a range two layer 4 port numbers are r
159. atch not source address mac p Config lt address gt lt macmask gt QOS config diffserv class match vlan Class Ma match vlan lt 1 4094 gt lt classname gt lt 1 4094 gt exclude p Config Class Ma match not vlan lt 1 4094 gt p Config Routing show arp table Privileged show arp EXEC Routing show arp switch Privileged show arp switch EXEC Routing show ip interface lt slot port gt Privileged show ip interface lt slot port gt EXEC Routing show router ip interface summary Privileged show ip interface brief EXEC Routing show ip summary Privileged show ip brief EXEC Routing show ip stats Privileged show ip stats EXEC Routing show ip vlan Privileged show ip vlan EXEC Routing show router ospf info Privileged show ip ospf EXEC and User EXEC Routing show router ospf interface info Privileged show ip ospf interface lt slot port gt slot port EXEC and User EXEC Routing show router ospf interface stats Privileged show ip ospf interface stats slot lt slot port gt EXECand port gt User EXEC A 10 IS CLI Mapping 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Table 13 2 IS CLI Mapping continued CLI Command Package 7300 Series L3 Switch Command Mode Syntax Routing show router ospf interface Privileged show ip ospf interface brief summary EXEC and User EXEC Routing show router ospf area info Privileged
160. ault 20 centiseconds 0 2 seconds Format set garp timer join all lt 10 100 gt Mode Global Config no set garp timer join all This command sets the GVRP join time for all ports and per GARP to 20 centiseconds 0 2 seconds This command has an effect only when GVRP is enabled Format no set garp timer join all Mode Global Config Switching Commands 8 45 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software set garp timer leave This command sets the GVRP leave time per port Leave time is the time to wait after receiving an unregister request fora VLAN or a multicast group before deleting the VLAN entry This can be considered a buffer time for another station to assert registration for the same attribute in order to maintain uninterrupted service time is 20 to 600 centiseconds Note This command has an effect only when GVRP is enabled Default 60 centiseconds 0 6 seconds Format set garp timer leave lt 20 600 gt Mode Interface Config no set garp timer leave This command sets the GVRP leave time per port to 60 centiseconds 0 6 seconds Note This command has an effect only when GVRP is enabled Format no set garp timer leave Mode Interface Config set garp timer leave all This command sets the GVRP leave time for all ports Leave time is the time to wait after receiving an unregister request for a VLAN or a multicast group before deleting the VLAN entry This can be consi
161. ault low Format poe priority lt high medium low gt Mode Global Config poe limit This command sets the power limit in watts for the port The port will not supply more power than the value specified as the limit For the FSM7326P the valid range is 3 18 Default 18 Format poe limit Mode Global Config poe usagethreshold This command sets the power threshold level at which a trap will be generated If the total power consumed is greater than or equal to the specified percentage of the total power available a trap will be sent The switch will continue to provide power even if the threshold is exceeded The threshold value is for providing a warning It does not interrupt the power Valid values are 0 100 Default 80 Format poe usagethreshold 0 100 Mode Global Config show poe port info This command displays a summary for the ports that support the PoE function Format show poe port slot port All gt Mode Privilege FSM7326P Power Over Ethernet Commands 13 3 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software The following fields are displayed for each port If a port does not have link or is not enabled for PoE the following fields display a value of N A Class The Class field reports the class of the powered device according to IEEE802 3af definition Table 13 1 Class of the Powered Device Class Usage Max Power 0 Defau
162. b server Disabling the Web interface takes effect immediately All interfaces are effected 8 36 Switching Commands 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Default enabled Format ip http server Mode Privileged EXEC no ip http server This command disables access to the switch through the Web interface When access is disabled the user cannot login to the switch s Web server Default enabled Format no ip http server Mode Privileged EXEC show ip http This command displays the http settings for the switch Format show ip http Mode Privileged EXEC Secure Server Administrative Mode This field indicates whether the administrative mode of secure HTTP is enabled or disabled Secure Protocol Level The protocol level may have the values of SSL3 TSL1 or both SSL3 and TSL1 Secure Port This field specifies the port configured for SSLT HTTP Mode THis field indicates whether the HTTP mode is enabled or dis abled Secure Shell SSH Commands ip ssh This command is used to enable SSH Default Disabled Format ip ssh Mode Privileged EXEC Switching Commands 8 37 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software no ip ssh This command is used to disable SSH Format no ip ssh Mode Privileged EXEC ip ssh protocol This command is used to set or remove protocol levels or versions for SSH Either SSH1 1 SSH
163. bor gt The lt neighbor gt parameter is the IP address of the neighbor Format area lt areaid gt virtual link lt neighbor gt Mode Router OSPF Config no area virtual link This command deletes the OSPF virtual interface from the given interface identified by lt areaid gt and lt neighbor gt The lt neighbor gt parameter is the IP address of the neighbor Format no area lt areaid gt virtual link lt neighbor gt Mode Router OSPF Config Routing Commands 9 5 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software area virtual link authentication This command configures the authentication type and key for the OSPF virtual interface identified by lt areaid gt and lt neighbor gt The lt neighbor gt parameter is the IP address of the neighbor The value for lt type gt is either none simple or encrypt The key is composed of standard displayable non control keystrokes from a Standard 101 102 key keyboard The authentication key must be 8 bytes or less if the authentication type is simple If the type is encrypt the key may be up to 256 bytes Unauthenticated interfaces do not need an authentication key If the type is encrypt a key id in the range of 0 and 255 must be specified Default The default value for authentication type is none Neither the default password key nor the default key id are configured Format area lt areaid gt virtual link lt neighbor gt authenti
164. bridge with the Designated Port Designated Port Identifier Port on the Designated Bridge that offers the lowest cost to the LAN If 0 defined as the default CIST ID is passed as the lt mstid gt then this command displays the settings and parameters for a specific switch port within the common and internal spanning tree The lt slot port gt is the desired switch port In this case the followig are displayed 8 80 Switching Commands 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Port Identifier The port identifier for this port within the CST Port Priority The priority of the port within the CST Port Forwarding State The forwarding state of the port within the CST Port Role The role of the specified interface within the CST Port Path Cost The configured path cost for the specified interface Designated Root Identifier of the designated root for this port within the CST Designated Port Cost Path Cost offered to the LAN by the Designated Port Designated Bridge The bridge containing the designated port Designated Port Identifier Port on the Designated Bridge that offers the lowest cost to the LAN Topology Change Acknowledgement Value of flag in next Configuration Bridge Pro tocol Data Unit BPDU transmission indicating if a topology change is in progress for this port Hello Time The hello time in use for this port Edge Port The configured value indicating if this port
165. browsing to the menu you want to use 4 8 Web Based Management Interface 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Port Specific Popup Menus The 7300 Series L3 Switch also provides several popup menus for each port NETGEAR 24 2 L3 Managed Switch with PoE GARP Port Configurati Slot Port Port GVRP Mode Port GMRP Mode GARP Timers Join Timer centisecs Leave Timer centisecs Leave All Timer centisecs Port Config Port Detailed Stats Port Summary Stats Spanning Tree Port Config Status VLAN Port Config GARP Port Config IGMP Snooping Interface Config IP Interface Config RIP Interface Config 02 Mm OSPF Interface Config OSPF Interface Stats Disable OSPF Virtual Link Config Disable v OSPF Neighbor Info Detailed OSPF Neighbor Table Figure 4 9 Switch popup menus a FSM7326p You can access a port specific popup menu by right clicking on the port in the image of the switch and browsing to the menu you want to use Web Based Management Interface 202 10009 01_060204 4 9 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software 4 10 Web Based Management Interface 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Chapter 5 Command Line Interface Structure The Command Line Interface CLD syntax conventions and terminology are described in this section E
166. cast packets delivered to a higher layer protocol Multicast Packets Received The total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast address Note that this number does not include packets directed to the broadcast address Broadcast Packets Received The total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast address Note that this does not include multicast packets Packets Received with MAC Errors Total The total number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them from being deliverable to a higher layer proto col Jabbers Received The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets excluding framing bits but includ ing FCS octets and had either a bad Frame Check Sequence FCS with an integral number of octets FCS Error or a bad FCS with a non integral number of octets Alignment Error Note that this definition of jabber is different than the definition in IEEE 802 3 section 8 2 1 5 IOBASES and section 10 3 1 4 1OBASE2 These documents define jabber as the condition where any packet exceeds 20 ms The allowed range to detect jabber is between 20 ms and 150 ms Fragments Undersize Received The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets in length excluding fram ing bits but including FCS octets Alignment Errors The total number of packets received that had a length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets o
167. cation none simple lt key gt encrypt lt key gt lt keyid gt Mode Router OSPF Config no area virtual link authentication This command configures the default authentication type for the OSPF virtual interface identified by lt areaid gt and lt neighbor gt The lt neighbor gt parameter is the IP address of the neighbor Format no area lt areaid gt virtual link lt neighbor gt authentica tion Mode Router OSPF Config area virtual link dead interval This command configures the dead interval for the OSPF virtual interface on the virtual interface identified by lt areaid gt and lt neighbor gt The lt neighbor gt parameter is the IP address of the neighbor The range for lt seconds gt is 1 to 65535 Default 40 Format area areaid virtual link neighbor dead interval lt 1 65535 gt Mode Router OSPF Config 9 6 Routing Commands 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software no area virtual link dead interval This command configures the default dead interval for the OSPF virtual interface on the virtual interface identified by lt areaid gt and lt neighbor gt The lt neighbor gt parameter is the IP address of the neighbor Format no area lt areaid gt virtual link neighbor dead inter val Mode Router OSPF Config area virtual link hello interval This command configures the hello interval for the OSPF virtual interface on the virtual int
168. ce The instance lt mstid gt is a number that corresponds to the desired existing multiple spanning tree instance The priority value is a number within a range of 0 to 61440 in increments of 4096 8 88 Switching Commands 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software If 0 defined as the default CIST ID is passed as the lt mstid gt then this command sets the Bridge Priority parameter to a new value for the common and internal spanning tree The bridge priority value again is a number within a range of 0 to 61440 The twelve least significant bits will be masked according to the 802 1s specification This will cause the priority to be rounded down to the next lower valid priority Default 32768 Format spanning tree mst priority lt mstid gt lt 0 61440 gt Mode Global Config no spanning tree mst priority This command sets the bridge priority for a specific multiple spanning tree instance to the default value i e 32768 The instance lt mstid gt is a number that corresponds to the desired existing multiple spanning tree instance If 0 defined as the default CIST ID is passed as the lt mstid gt then this command sets the Bridge Priority parameter for the common and internal spanning tree to the default value i e 32768 Format spanning tree mst priority lt mstid gt Mode Global Config spanning tree mst vlan This command adds an association between a multiple spanning tre
169. ch has forwarding and or filtering information The format is 6 or 8 two digit hexadeci mal numbers that are separated by colons for example 01 23 45 67 89 AB In an IVL system the MAC address will be displayed as 8 bytes In an SVL system the MAC address will be displayed as 6 bytes Type This displays the type of the entry Static entries are those that are configured by the end user Dynamic entries are added to the table as a result of a learning process or protocol Description The text description of this multicast table entry Interfaces The list of interfaces that are designated for forwarding Fwd and filtering Flt Switching Commands 8 57 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software show mac address table igmpsnooping This command displays the IGMP Snooping entries in the Multicast Forwarding Database MFDB table Format Mode Mac Address Type Description Interfaces show mac address table igmpsnooping Privileged EXEC A unicast MAC address for which the switch has forwarding and or filtering information The format is 6 or 8 two digit hexadeci mal numbers that are separated by colons for example 01 23 45 67 89 AB In an IVL system the MAC address will be displayed as 8 bytes In an SVL system the MAC address will be displayed as 6 bytes This displays the type of the entry Static entries are those that are configured by the end user Dynamic
170. channel in slot port notation Active Ports This field lists the ports that are actively participating in this port channel Management Commands These commands manage the switch and show current management settings bridge aging time This command configures the forwarding database address aging timeout in seconds In an IVL system the fdbid all parameter is required In an SVL system the fdbid all parameter is not used and will be ignored if entered Default 300 Format bridge aging time lt 10 1 000 000 gt fdbid all Mode Global Config Seconds The seconds parameter must be within the range of 10 to 1 000 000 seconds Forwarding Database ID Fdbid Forwarding database ID indicates which forwarding database s aging timeout is being configured All is used to con figure all forwarding database s agetime In an SVL system the fdbid all parameter is not used and will be ignored if entered no bridge aging time This command sets the forwarding database address aging timeout to 300 seconds In an IVL system the fdbid all parameter is required In an SVL system the fdbid all parameter is not used and will be ignored if entered 8 18 Switching Commands 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Format no bridge aging time fdbid all Mode Global Config Forwarding Database ID Fdbid Forwarding database ID indicates which forwarding database s agi
171. channel with the same administrative mode setting 8 42 Switching Commands 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Default Enabled Format port channel linktrap logical slot port gt all Mode Global Config no port channel linktrap This command disables link trap notifications for the port channel LAG The interface is a logical slot and port for a configured port channel The option a11 sets every configured port channel with the same administrative mode setting Format no port channel linktrap logical slot port gt all Mode GlobalConfig port channel name This command defines a name for the port channel LAG The interface is a logical slot and port for a configured port channel and name is an alphanumeric string up to 15 characters This command is used to modify the name that was associated with the port channel when it was created Format port channel name logical slot port gt all lt name gt Mode Global Config protocol group This command attaches a lt vlanid gt to the protocol based VLAN identified by lt groupid gt A group may only be associated with one VLAN at a time however the VLAN association can be changed Default none Format protocol group lt groupid gt vlanid Mode VLAN database no protocol group This command removes the lt vlanid gt from this protocol based VLAN group that is identified by this lt groupid gt
172. cify bandwidth and queue depth management requirements of service levels EF AF etc The policy commands are used to associate a traffic class which was defined by the class command set with one or more QoS policy attributes This association is then assigned to an interface in a particular direction to form a service The user specifies the policy name when the policy is created The DiffServ CLI does not necessarily require that users associate only one traffic class to one policy In fact multiple traffic classes can be associated with a single policy each defining a particular treatment for packets that match the class definition When a packet satisfies the conditions of more than one class preference is based on the order in which the classes were added to the policy with the foremost class taking highest precedence This set of commands consists of policy creation deletion class addition removal and individual policy attributes Note that the only way to remove an individual policy attribute from a class instance within a policy is to remove the class instance and re add it to the policy The values associated with an existing policy attribute can be changed without removing the class instance The CLI command root is po1icy map bandwidth kbps This command identifies a minimum amount of bandwidth to be reserved for the specified class instance within the named policy using an absolute rate notation The committed information ra
173. command sets the Configuration Identifier Revision Level for use in identifying the configuration that this switch is currently using The Configuration Identifier Revision Level is a number in the range of 0 to 65535 Default 0 Format spanning tree configuration revision 0 65535 Mode Global Config no spanning tree configuration revision This command sets the Configuration Identifier Revision Level for use in identifying the configuration that this switch is currently using to the default value i e 0 Format no spanning tree configuration revision Mode Global Config spanning tree edgeport This command specifies that this port is an Edge Port within the common and internal spanning tree This will allow this port to transition to Forwarding State without delay Format spanning tree edgeport Mode Interface Config 8 84 Switching Commands 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software no spanning tree edgeport This command specifies that this port is not an Edge Port within the common and internal spanning tree Format no spanning tree edgeport Mode Interface Config spanning tree forceversion This command sets the Force Protocol Version parameter to a new value The Force Protocol Version can be one of the following e 802 1d ST BPDUs are transmitted rather than MST BPDUs IEEE 802 1d functionality supported e 802 1w RST BPDUs are transmitted rather than MS
174. config diffserv policy shape Policy Cla shape bps average average lt policyname gt ss Map lt 1 4294967295 gt bps peak lt classname gt lt 1 4294967295 gt Config lt 1 4294967295 gt lt 1 4294967295 gt QOS config diffserv policy shape peak Policy Cla lt policyname gt lt classname gt ss Map lt 1 4294967295 gt lt 1 4294967295 gt Config QOS config diffserv policy randomdrop Policy Cla randomdrop lt 1 250000 gt lt policyname gt lt classname gt ss Map lt 1 500000 gt 1 100 lt 1 1000000 gt lt 1 250000 gt lt 1 500000 gt lt 0 100 gt Config lt 0 16 gt lt 0 1000000 gt 0 16 gt QOS config diffserv policy mark cos Policy Cla mark cos 0 7 ip dscp 0 63 lt policyname gt lt classname gt 0 7 ss Map ip precedence lt 0 7 gt Config A 4 IS CLI Mapping 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Table 13 2 IS CLI Mapping continued CLI Command Package 7300 Series L3 Switch Command Mode Syntax QOS config diffserv policy police style Policy Cla police simple lt 1 4294967295 gt simple lt policyname gt classname ss Map lt 1 128 gt conform action drop lt 1 4294967295 gt lt 1 128 gt Config set prec transmit lt 0 7 gt set dscp transmit lt 0 63 gt transmit violate action drop set prec transmit lt 0 7 gt set dscp transmit lt 0 63 gt transmit QOS c
175. config router ospf interface mode Interface ip ospf lt slot port gt enable disable Config Interface no ip ospf Config Routing config router ospf interface priority Interface ip ospf priority 0 255 lt slot port gt 0 255 Config Interface no ip ospf priority Config Routing config router ospf interface cost Interface ip ospf cost lt 1 65535 gt lt ipaddr gt lt slot port gt lt 1 65535 gt Config Interface no ip ospf cost Config A 16 IS CLI Mapping 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Table 13 2 IS CLI Mapping continued CLI Command Package 7300 Series L3 Switch Command Mode Syntax Routing config router ospf area range Router area lt areaid gt range lt ipaddr gt create lt areaid gt lt ipaddr gt OSPF lt subnetmask gt summarylink lt subnetmask gt summ enable Config nssaexternallink advertise disable not advertise Routing config router ospf area range Router no area lt areaid gt range lt ipaddr gt delete lt areaid gt lt ipaddr gt OSPF lt subnetmask gt summarylink lt subnetmask gt summ Config nssaexternallink Routing config router ospf area stub metric Router area lt areaid gt default cost value lt areaid gt lt 1 16777215 gt OSPF lt 1 16777215 gt Config Routing config router ospf area stub Router area lt areaid gt stub summarylsa summarylsa lt areaid
176. d lt slot port gt lt 1 65535 gt Config quiet period tx period supp timeout server timeout Security config dot1x port supptimeout Interface lt slot port gt lt 1 65535 gt Config Security config dot1x port servertimeout Interface lt slot port gt lt 1 65535 gt Config Security config dot1x port reauthperiod Interface lt slot port gt lt 1 65535 gt Config Security config dot1x port maxrequests Interface dot1x max req 1 10 lt slot port gt lt 1 10 gt Config Interface no dot1x max req Config Security config dot1x port reauthenabled Interface dot1x re authentication lt slot port gt lt true false gt Config Interface no dot1x re authentication Config Security config dot1x defaultlogin Global dot1x defaultlogin listname lt listhame gt Config Security config dot1x login user Global dot1x login user listname listname Config IS CLI Mapping A 45 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Table 13 2 IS CLI Mapping continued CLI Command Package 7300 Series L3 Switch Command Mode Syntax Security config dot1x port users add lt user gt Global dot1x user user lt slot port gt all lt slot port all gt Config Security config dot1x port users remove Global no dot1x user user lt slot port gt lt user gt lt slot port all gt Config all Security show dot1x summary
177. d The system then prompts the user for a new password then a prompt to confirm the new password If the new password and the confirmed password match a message will be displayed User password should not be more than eight characters in length copy system running config This will save passwords and all other changes to the device nvram startup config If you do not save config all configurations will be lost when a in Privileged EXEC power cycle is performed on the switch or when the switch is reset logout Logs the user out of the switch in User EXEC and Privileged EXEC Quick Start up IP Address To view the network parameters the operator can access the device by the following three methods e Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP Telnet Quick Start up 6 3 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software e Web Browser Note The user should do a copy system running config nvram startup config after configuring the network parameters so that the configurations are not lost Table 6 4 Quick Start up IP Address Command Details show network Displays the Network Configurations in User EXEC IP Address IP Address of the interface Default IP is 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask IP Subnet Mask for the interface Default is 0 0 0 0 Default Gateway The default Gateway for this interface Default value is 0 0 0 0 Burned in MAC Address The Burned in MAC
178. d In this case for warding means the traffic stream was passed to the next func tional element in the data path such as the switching or routing function or an outbound link transmission element Only dis played for the out direction 10 24 CLI Commands Differentiated Services 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Note None of the counters listed here are guaranteed to be supported on all platforms Only supported counters are shown in the display output show service policy This command displays a summary of policy oriented statistics information for all interfaces in the specified direction The direction parameter indicates the interface direction of interest This command enables or disables the route reflector client A route reflector client relies on a route reflector to re advertise its routes to the entire AS The possible values for this field are enable and disable Format Mode show service policy in out Privileged EXEC The following information is repeated for each interface and direction only those interfaces configured with an attached policy are shown Interface Dir Operational Status Offered Packets Discarded Packets Sent Packets Policy Name The slot number and port number of the interface slot port The traffic direction of this interface service either in or out The current operational status of this DiffServ service
179. d Mode Syntax QOS config acl rule match srcl4port range lt aclid gt lt rulenum gt lt startport gt lt endport gt QOS config acl interface add lt slot port gt Interface ip access group lt 1 199 gt in out lt direction gt lt aclid gt Config QOS config acl interface remove lt slot Interface no ip access group lt 1 199 gt in out port gt lt direction gt lt aclid gt Config QOS config acl rule match dstl4port Interface ip access group lt 1 199 gt in out number lt aclid gt lt rulenum gt Config lt portnumber gt QOS config acl rule match srcl4port Interface number lt aclid gt lt rulenum gt Config lt portnumber gt QOS config diffserv adminmode Global diffserv lt enable disable gt Config Global no diffserv Config QOS show diffserv info Privileged show diffserv EXEC QOS show diffserv service info detailed Privileged show diffserv service lt slot port gt in lt slot port gt lt in out gt EXEC out QOS show diffserv service info summary Privileged show diffserv service brief in out in out EXEC QOS show diffserv policy detailed Privileged show policy map lt policymapname gt lt policyname gt EXEC QOS show diffserv policy summary Privileged show policy map EXEC QOS show diffserv service stats detailed Privileged show policy map interface lt slot port gt lt slot port gt in out EXEC in out QOS config diffserv policy create Global policy map lt policyname gt in out
180. d Switch Software Chapter 10 CLI Commands Differentiated Services This chapter contains the CLI commands used for the QOS Differentiated Services DiffServ package The user configures DiffServ in several stages by specifying 1 Class creating and deleting classes e defining match criteria for a class Note The only way to remove an individual match criterion from an existing class definition is to delete the class and re create it 2 Policy creating and deleting policies associating classes with a policy defining policy statements for a policy class combination 3 Service e adding and removing a policy to from a directional i e inbound outbound interface Packets are filtered and processed based on defined criteria The filtering criteria is defined by a class The processing is defined by a policy s attributes Policy attributes may be defined on a per class instance basis and it is these attributes that are applied when a match occurs Packet processing begins by testing the match criteria for a packet A policy is applied to a packet when a class match within that policy is found CLI Commands Differentiated Services 10 1 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Note that the type of class all any or acl has a bearing on the validity of match criteria specified when defining the class A class type of any processes its match rules in an
181. d to the group Default none Format protocol vlan group all lt groupid gt Mode Global Config no protocol vian group all This command removes all interfaces from this protocol based VLAN group that is identified by this lt groupid gt Format no protocol vlan group all lt groupid gt Mode Global Config 8 44 Switching Commands 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software set garp timer join This command sets the GVRP join time per port and per GARP Join time is the interval between the transmission of GARP Protocol Data Units PDUs registering or re registering membership fora VLAN or multicast group This command has an effect only when GVRP is enabled The time is from 10 to 100 centiseconds Default 20 centiseconds 0 2 seconds Format set garp timer join lt 10 100 gt Mode Interface Config no set garp timer join This command sets the GVRP join time per port and per GARP to 20 centiseconds 0 2 seconds This command has an effect only when GVRP is enabled Format no set garp timer join Mode Interface Config set garp timer join all This command sets the GVRP join time for all ports and per GARP Join time is the interval between the transmission of GARP Protocol Data Units PDUs registering or re registering membership for a VLAN or multicast group This command has an effect only when GVRP is enabled The time is from 10 to 100 centiseconds Def
182. ddress Any packet is sent first to a gateway computer that understands a small part of the Internet The gateway computer reads the destination address and forwards the packet to an adjacent gateway that in turn reads the destination address and so forth across the Internet until one gateway recognizes the packet as belonging to a computer within its immediate neighborhood or domain That gateway then forwards the packet directly to the computer whose address is specified Because a message is divided into a number of packets each packet can if necessary be sent by a different route across the Internet Packets can arrive in a different order than they were sent The Internet Protocol just delivers them It s up to another protocol the Transmission Control Protocol TCP to put them back in the right order IP is a connectionless protocol which means that there is no continuing connection between the end points that are communicating Each packet that travels through the Internet is treated as an independent unit of data without any relation to any other unit of data The reason the packets do get put in the right order is because of TCP the connection oriented protocol that keeps track of the packet sequence in a message In the Open Systems Interconnection OSI communication model IP is in Layer 3 the Networking Layer The most widely used version of IP today is IP version 4 IPv4 However IP version 6 IPv6 is also beginning to be supported I
183. ddress which represents this area range Is a valid subnet mask for this area range Is the type of link advertisement associated with this area range This indicates whether the advertisement status is enabled or dis abled show ip ospf stub table This command displays the OSPF stub table The information below will only be displayed if OSPF is initialized on the switch Format Mode Area ID Type of Service Metric Val Metric Type Import Summary LSA show ip ospf stub table Privileged EXEC and User EXEC Is a 32 bit identifier for the created stub area Is the type of service associated with the stub metric The 7300 Series L3 Switch only supports Normal TOS The metric value is applied based on the TOS It defaults to the least metric of the type of service among the interfaces to other areas The OSPF cost for a route is a function of the metric value Is the type of metric advertised as the default route Controls the import of summary LSAs into stub areas show ip ospf virtual link This command displays the OSPF Virtual Interface information for a specific area and neighbor The lt areaid gt parameter identifies the area and the lt neighbor gt parameter identifies the neighbor s IP Address Format Mode Area ID Neighbor IP Address show ip ospf virtual link lt areaid gt neighbor Privileged EXEC and User EXEC Is the area id of the requested OSPF area Is the neighbor IP Address that is entered
184. ded twisted pair UTP FTP wiring Power over Ethernet PoE is a technology that can integrate data voice and power on a LAN PoE supplies reliable uninterrupted power to Internet Protocol IP telephones wireless LAN access points and other Ethernet devices that use existing Cat5 cables Power over Ethernet when used in conjunction with an uninterrupted power supply UPS ensures continuous operation during power failures PoE saves time and eliminates the cost of installing separate power cabling and AC outlets The power delivered over the Ethernet cabling is automatically activated when a compatible device is identified The power is injected by either new generation Ethernet switches end Span or by a dedicated patch panel like device residing between an ordinary Ethernet switch or hub and the terminals mid span Mid span devices are available with 1 6 12 or 24 ports PoE technology does not degrade the network data communication performance or decrease the network reach Wireless Access points often need to be located in high places like the ceiling where the necessary power lines and data access are not readily available An integrated power data network solves that problem and allows greater flexibility and range in wireless networking In order for the network to carry power you need to add power sourcing equipment PSE This is the source of power and the means to integrate that power onto the network The PSE also provides
185. default is blank 8 14 Switching Commands 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software System Contact System ObjectlD System Up Time MIBs Supported snmp server Text used to identify a contact person for this switch May be up to 31 alpha numeric characters The factory default is blank The base object ID for the switch s enterprise MIB The time in days hours and minutes since the last switch reboot A list of MIBs supported by this agent This command sets the name and the physical location of the switch and the organization responsible for the network The range for name location and contact is from 1 to 31 alphanumeric characters Default Format Mode None snmp server sysname lt name gt location lt loc gt contact lt con gt Global Config Management VLAN Commands network mgmt_vlan This command configures the Management VLAN ID Default Format Mode 1 network mgmt vlan lt 1 4094 gt Privileged EXEC Switching Commands 8 15 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Dot1P Commands classofservice dot1pmapping This command maps an 802 1p priority to an internal traffic class for a device when in Global Config mode The number of available traffic classes may vary with the platform Userpriority and trafficclass can both be the range from 1 7 Under
186. dered a buffer time for another station to assert registration for the same attribute in order to maintain uninterrupted service time is 20 to 600 centiseconds Note This command has an effect only when GVRP is enabled Default 60 centiseconds 0 6 seconds Format set garp timer leave all 20 600 Mode Global Config no set garp timer leave all This command sets the GVRP leave time for all ports to the default 60 centiseconds 0 6 seconds Note This command has an effect only when GVRP is enabled Format no set garp timer leave all 8 46 Switching Commands 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Mode Global Config set garp timer leaveall This command sets how frequently Leave All PDUs are generated per port A Leave All PDU indicates that all registrations will be unregistered Participants would need to rejoin in order to maintain registration The value applies per port and per GARP participation The time may range from 200 to 6000 centiseconds Note This command has an effect only when GVRP is enabled Default 1000 centiseconds 10 seconds Format set garp timer leaveall lt 200 6000 gt Mode Interface Config no set garp timer leaveall This command sets how frequently Leave All PDUs are generated per port to 1000 centiseconds 10 seconds Note This command has an effect only when GVRP is enabled Format no set garp timer leaveall Mode Interface C
187. dresses are displayed Format Mode Service DHCP Number of Ping Packets Excluded Address show ip dhcp global configuration Privileged EXEC and User EXEC The field to display the status of dhcp protocol The maximum number of Ping Packets that will be sent to verify that an ip address id not already assigned The ranges of IP addresses that a DHCP server should not assign to DHCP clients show ip dhcp pool configuration This command displays pool configuration If is specified configuration for all the pools is displayed Format Mode Pool Name Pool Type Lease Time DNS Servers Default Routers show ip dhcp pool configuration lt name gt Privileged EXEC and User EXEC The name of the configured pool The pool type The lease expiration time of the IP Address assigned to the client The list of DNS servers available to the DHCP client The list of the default routers available to the DHCP client DHCP Server Commands 12 7 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Following additional field is displayed for Dynamic pool type Network The network number and the mask for the DHCP address pool Following additional fields are displayed for Manual pool type Client Name Client Identifier Hardware Address Hardware Address Type Host Format Mode Address Pool Automatic bindings Manual bindings Expired bindings Malformed me
188. duplex 10h 10BASE T half duplex 10f 100BASE T full duplex storm control broadcast This command enables broadcast storm recovery mode If the mode is enabled broadcast storm recovery with high and low thresholds is implemented The threshold implementation follows a percentage pattern If the broadcast traffic on any Ethernet port exceeds the high threshold percentage as represented in Broadcast Storm Recovery Thresholds table of the link speed the switch discards the broadcasts traffic until the broadcast traffic returns to the low threshold percentage or less The full implementation is depicted in the Broadcast Storm Recovery Thresholds table Table 8 1 Broadcast Storm Recovery Thresholds Link Speed High Low 10M 20 10 100M 5 2 1000M 5 2 Format switchconfig storm control broadcast Mode Global Covnfig no storm control broadcast This command disables broadcast storm recovery mode The threshold implementation follows a percentage pattern If the broadcast traffic on any Ethernet port exceeds the high threshold percentage as represented in Broadcast Storm Recovery Thresholds table of the link speed the switch discards the broadcasts traffic until the broadcast traffic returns to the low threshold percentage or less The full implementation is depicted in the Broadcast Storm Recovery Thresholds table Switching Commands 8 69 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series La
189. e If the user is using HyperTerminal the user must specify where the file is going to be received by the PC Quick Start up 6 5 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Quick Start up Downloading from Out of Band PC to Switch Only XMODEM Table 6 6 Quick Start up Downloading from Out of Band PC to Switch Only XMODEM Command Details copy url nvram startup config system image Sets the download datatype to be an image or config file The URL must be specified as xmodem filepath fileName For example If the user is using HyperTerminal the user must specify which file is to be sent to the switch The Switch will restart automatically once the code has been downloaded Quick Start up Downloading from TFTP Server Before starting a TFTP server download the operator must complete the Quick Start up for the IP Address Table 6 7 Quick Start up Downloading from TFTP Server Command Details copy lt url gt nvram startup config system image Sets the download datatype to be an image or config file The URL must be specified as tftp ipAddr filepath fileName The nvram startup config option downloads the config file using tftp and system image option downloads the code file 6 6 Quick Start up 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software
190. e Switching config trapflags multiusers enable Global snmp server enable traps multiusers disable Config IS CLI Mapping A 25 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Table 13 2 IS CLI Mapping continued CLI Command Package 7300 Series L3 Switch Command Mode Syntax Global no snmp server enable traps Config multiusers Switching config trapflags stpmode lt enable Global snmp server enable traps stpmode disable gt Config Global no snmp server enable traps Config stpmode Switching config telnet maxsessions lt 0 5 gt Privileged remotecon maxsessions lt 0 5 gt EXEC Privileged no remotecon maxsessions EXEC Switching config telnet mode lt enable Privileged telnet disable gt EXEC Privileged no telnet EXEC Switching config telnet timeout lt 0 160 gt Privileged remnotecon timeout lt 0 160 gt EXEC Privileged no remotecon timeout EXEC Switching config forwardingdb agetime Global bridge aging time lt 10 1000000 gt lt 10 1 000 000 gt fdbid all Config lt 1 4094 gt all Global no bridge aging time lt 1 4094 gt all Config Switching show spanningtree summary Privileged show spanning tree summary EXEC and User EXEC Switching show spanningtree port lt slot port gt Privileged show spanning tree interface lt slot EXECand port gt User EXEC A 26 IS CLI Mapping 202 10009
191. e spanning tree instance or the common and internal spanning tree instance depending on the mstid parameter The pathcost can be specified as a number in the range of 1 to 200000000 or auto If auto is specified the pathcost value will be set based on Link Speed If the port priority token is specified this command sets the priority for this port within a specific multiple spanning tree instance or the common and internal spanning tree instance depending on the lt mstid gt parameter The port priority value is a number in the range of O to 240 in increments of 16 Default cost auto port priorty 128 Format spanning tree mst lt mstid gt cost lt 1 200000000 gt auto port priority lt 0 240 gt Mode Interface Config no spanning tree mst This command sets the Path Cost or Port Priority for this port within the multiple spanning tree instance or in the common and internal spanning tree to the respective default values If the mstid parameter corresponds to an existing multiple spanning tree instance then the configurations are done for that multiple spanning tree instance If however 0 defined as the default CIST ID is passed as the mstid then the configurations are performed for the common and internal spanning tree instance Switching Commands 8 87 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software If the cost token is specified this command sets
192. e 1 to 99 is for normal ACL List and 100 to 199 is extended ACL List The ACL rule is created with the option of permit or deny The protocol to filter for an ACL rule is specified by giving the protocol to be used like cmp igmp ip tcp udp The command specifies a source ip address and source mask for match condition of the ACL rule specified by the srcip and srcmask parameters The source layer 4 port match condition for the ACL rule are specified by the port value parameter The lt startport gt and lt endport gt parameters identify the first and last ports that are part of the port range They have values from 0 to 65535 The ending port must have a value equal or greater than the starting port The starting port ending port and all ports in between will be part of the destination port range The lt portvalue gt parameter uses a single keyword notation and currently has the values of domain echo ftp ftpdata http smtp snmp telnet tftp and www Each of these values translates into its equivalent port number which is used as both the start and end of a port range The command specifies a destination ip address and destination mask for match condition of the ACL rule specified by the dstip and dstmask parameters The command specifies the TOS for an ACL rule depending on a match of precedence or DSCP values using the parameters fos tosmask dscp Default none Format access list 1 99 deny permit srcip src mask gt lt
193. e Size The current number of entries rows in the Policy Table Policy Table Max The maximum allowed entries rows for the Policy Table Policy Instance Table Size The current number of entries rows in the Policy Instance Table Policy Instance Table Max The maximum allowed entries rows for the Policy Instance Table Policy Attribute Table Size The current number of entries rows in the Policy Attribute Table Policy Attribute Table Max The maximum allowed entries rows for the Policy Attribute Table Service Table Size The current number of entries rows in the Service Table Service Table Max The maximum allowed entries rows for the Service Table show policy map This command displays all configuration information for the specified policy The lt policyname gt is the name of an existing DiffServ policy Format show policy map lt policyname gt Mode Privileged EXEC If the Policy Name is specified the following fields are displayed CLI Commands Differentiated Services 10 19 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Policy Name The name of this policy Type The policy type namely whether it is an inbound or outbound policy definition The following information is repeated for each class associated with this policy only those policy attributes actually configured are displayed Class Name The name of this class Mark CoS Denotes the class of serv
194. e also OSPF Cisco Systems Inc Subnet Mask Combined with the IP address the IP Subnet Mask allows a device to know which other addresses are local to it and which must be reached through a gateway or router Switch A device that interconnects several LANs to form a single logical LAN that comprises of several LAN segments Switches are similar to bridges in that they connect LANS of a different type however they connect more LANs than a bridge and are generally more sophisticated SX See SimpleX signaling on page 18 T Telnet A character based UNIX application that enables users with a Telnet server account to log on to a UNIX computer and utilize its resources Glossary C 19 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software TFTP See TLS on page 20 TLS Short for Transport Layer Security TLS is a protocol that guarantees privacy and data integrity between client server applications communicating over the Internet The TLS protocol is made up of two layers The TLS Record Protocol ensures that a connection is private by using symmetric data encryption and ensures that the connection is reliable The second TLS layer is the TLS Handshake Protocol which allows authentication between the server and client and the negotiation of an encryption algorithm and cryptographic keys before data is transmitted or received Based on Netscape s SSL 3 0 TLS supercedes and is
195. e class under this policy Conform DSCP Value This field shows the DSCP mark value if the conform action is markdscp Conform IP Precedence Value This field shows the IP Precedence mark value if the con form action is markprec 10 20 CLI Commanas Differentiated Services 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Exceed Action The current setting for the action taken on a packet considered to exceed to the policing parameters This is not displayed if polic ing not in use for the class under this policy Exceed DSCP Value This field shows the DSCP mark value if this action is markdscp Exceed IP Precedence Value This field shows the IP Precedence mark value if this action is markprec Non Conform Action The current setting for the action taken on a packet considered to not conform to the policing parameters This is not displayed if policing not in use for the class under this policy Non Conform DSCP Value This field displays the DSCP mark value if this action is markdscp Non Conform IP Precedence Value This field displays the IP Precedence mark value if this action is markprec Bandwidth This field displays the minimum amount of bandwidth reserved in either percent or kilobits per second Expedite Burst Size KBytes This field displays the maximum guaranteed amount of bandwidth reserved in either percent or kilobits per second for mat Shaping Average This field i
196. e distance This command sets the default static route preference value in the router Lower route preference values are preferred when determining the best route Format no ip route distance Mode Global Config ip routing This command enables the IP Router Admin Mode for the master switch Format ip routing Mode Global Config no ip routing This command disables the IP Router Admin Mode for the master switch Format no ip routing Mode Global Config redistribute This command configures OSPF protocol to redistribute routes from the specified source protocol routers Default value for metric unspecified Default value fortype 2 Default value for tag 0 Format redistribute rip bgp static connected metric lt 0 16777215 gt metric type 1 2 tag lt 0 4294967295 gt subnets Mode Router OSPF Config 9 32 Routing Commands 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software no redistribute This command configures OSPF protocol to redistribute routes from the specified source protocol routers Format no redistribute rip bgp static connected met ric metric type tag subnets Mode Router OSPF Config redistribute This command configures RIP protocol to redistribute routes from the specified source protocol routers There are five possible match options When you submit the command redistribute ospf match lt match type gt the match type
197. e gt VLAN vlan name lt 1 4094 gt lt newname gt lt 2 4094 gt database Switching config vlan delete lt 2 4094 gt VLAN no vlan name lt 1 4094 gt database Switching config vlan makestatic lt 2 4094 gt VLAN vlan makestatic lt 1 4094 gt database Switching config vlan participation exclude Interface vlan participation exclude include include auto lt 1 4094 gt slot port Config auto lt 1 4094 gt all gt IS CLI Mapping A 37 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Table 13 2 IS CLI Mapping continued CLI Command Package 7300 Series L3 Switch Command Mode Syntax Global vlan participation all exclude Config include auto lt 1 4094 gt Switching config vlan port tagging enable Interface vlan tagging lt 1 4094 gt disable lt 1 4094 gt lt slot port all gt Config Interface no vlan tagging lt 1 4094 gt Config Global vlan port tagging all lt 1 4094 gt Config Global no vlan port tagging all lt 1 4094 gt Config Switching config vlan port pvid lt 1 4094 gt Interface vlan pvid lt 1 4094 gt lt slot port all gt Config Global vlan port pvid all lt 1 4094 gt Config Switching config vlan port acceptframe all Interface vlan acceptframe vlanonly all vlan gt slot port all gt Config Interface no vlan acceptframe Config Global vlan port acceptframe all
198. e instance and a VLAN The VLAN will no longer be associated with the common and internal spanning tree The instance mstid is a number that corresponds to the desired existing multiple spanning tree instance The vlanid corresponds to an existing VLAN ID Format spanning tree mst vlan mstid lt vlanid gt Mode Global Config no spanning tree mst vlan This command removes an association between a multiple spanning tree instance and a VLAN The VLAN will again be associated with the common and internal spanning tree The instance lt mstid gt is a number that corresponds to the desired existing multiple spanning tree instance The lt vlanid gt corresponds to an existing VLAN ID Format no spanning tree mst vlan lt mstid gt lt vlanid gt Switching Commands 8 89 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Mode Global Config spanning tree port mode This command sets the Administrative Switch Port State for this port to enabled Default Disabled Format spanning tree port mode Mode Interface Config no spanning tree port mode This command sets the Administrative Switch Port State for this port to disabled Format no spanning tree port mode Mode Interface Config spanning tree port mode all This command sets the Administrative Switch Port State for all ports to enabled Default Disabled Format spanning tree port mode all Mode Global Config no spanning tree p
199. e network on the speci fied interface Is a mask of the network and host portion of the IP address for the attached network Tells which protocol added the specified route The possibilities are local static OSPF or RIP The outgoing router interface to use when forwarding traffic to the next destination The outgoing router IP address to use when forwarding traffic to the next router if any in the path toward the destination The metric value that is used for this route entry show ip route preferences This command displays detailed information about the route preferences Route preferences are used in determining the best route Lower router preference values are preferred over higher router preference values Format Mode Local Static OSPF Intra OSPF Inter OSPF Type 1 OSPF Type 2 RIP BGP4 show ip route preferences Privileged EXEC and User EXEC This field displays the local route preference value This field displays the static route preference value This field displays the OSPF Intra route preference value This field displays the OSPF Inter route preference value This field displays the OSPF Type 1 route preference value This field displays the OSPF Type 2 route preference value This field displays the RIP route preference value This field displays the BGP 4 route preference value Routing Commands 9 51 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software
200. e services provided by those below it OSI See Open Systems Interconnection on page 15 OSPF See Open Shortest Path First on page 14 P packet A block of information sent over a network A packet typically contains a source and destination network address some protocol and length information a block of data and a checksum PDU See Protocol Data Unit on page 16 PHY The OSI Physical Layer The physical layer provides for transmission of cells over a physical medium connecting two ATM devices This physical layer is comprised of two sublayers the Physical Medium Dependent PMD sublayer and the Transmission Convergence TC sublayer PIM DM See Protocol Independent Multicast Dense Mode on page 16 PMC Packet Mode Channel Point to Point Protocol PPP A protocol allowing a computer using TCP IP to connect directly to the Internet Port Mirroring Also known as a roving analysis port This is a method of monitoring network traffic that forwards a copy of each incoming and outgoing packet from one port of a network switch to another port where the packet can be studied A network administrator uses port mirroring as a diagnostic tool or debugging feature especially when fending off an attack It enables the administrator to keep close track of switch performance and alter it Glossary C 15 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software if necessary Port mi
201. e statistics of the RADIUS accounting server is displayed Accounting Server IP Address IP Address of the configured RADIUS accounting server Round Trip Time Requests Retransmission Responses Malformed Responses Bad Authenticators Pending Requests Timeouts Unknown Types Packets Dropped The time interval in hundredths of a second between the most recent Accounting Response and the Accounting Request that matched it from the RADIUS accounting server The number of RADIUS Accounting Request packets sent to this accounting server This number does not include retransmissions The number of RADIUS Accounting Request packets retransmit ted to this RADIUS accounting server The number of RADIUS packets received on the accounting port from this server The number of malformed RADIUS Accounting Response pack ets received from this server Malformed packets include packets with an invalid length Bad authenticators and unknown types are not included as malformed accounting responses The number of RADIUS Accounting Response packets contain ing invalid authenticators received from this accounting server The number of RADIUS Accounting Request packets sent to this server that have not yet timed out or received a response The number of accounting timeouts to this server The number of RADIUS packets of unknown types which were received from this server on the accounting port The number of RADIUS packets rece
202. econds Is the time it takes for an ARP request timeout This value was configured into the unit Response time is measured in sec onds Retries Is the maximum number of times an ARP request is retried This value was configured into the unit Cache Size Is the maximum number of entries in the ARP table This value was configured into the unit Dynamic Renew Mode Displays whether the ARP component automatically attempts to renew dynamic ARP entries when they age out Total Entry Count Current Peak Field listing the total entries in the ARP table and the peak entry count in the ARP table Routing Commands 9 35 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Static Entry Count Current Max Field listing the static entry count in the ARP table and maximum static entry count in the ARP table The following are displayed for each ARP entry IP Address Is the IP address of a device on a subnet attached to an existing routing interface MAC Address Is the hardware MAC address of that device Interface Is the routing slot port associated with the device ARP entry Type Is the type that was configured into the unit The possible values are Local Gateway Dynamic and Static Age This field displays the current age of the ARP entry since last refresh in hh mm ss format show arp brief This command displays the brief Address Resolution Protocol ARP table information Format
203. ed into the unit This is a configured value States whether OSPF is enabled or disabled on a router interface This is a configured value Represents the OSPF Area Id for the specified interface This is a configured value 9 42 Routing Commands 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Router Priority A number representing the OSPF Priority for the specified inter face This is a configured value Retransmit Interval A number representing the OSPF Retransmit Interval for the specified interface This is a configured value Hello Interval A number representing the OSPF Hello Interval for the specified interface This is a configured value Dead Interval A number representing the OSPF Dead Interval for the specified interface This is a configured value LSA Ack Interval A number representing the OSPF LSA Acknowledgement Inter val for the specified interface Transit Delay Interval A number representing the OSPF Transit Delay for the specified interface This is a configured value Authentication Type The OSPF Authentication Type for the specified interface are none simple and encrypt This is a configured value The information below will only be displayed if OSPF is enabled OSPF Interface Type Broadcast LANs such as Ethernet and IEEE 802 5 take the value broadcast The OSPF Interface Type will be broadcast State The OSPF Interface States are down
204. ed sequentially and only one need be true to indicate a class match Class type acl rules are evaluated in a hybrid manner with those derived from each ACL Rule grouped and evaluated simultaneously while each such grouping is evaluated sequentially The ACL number used to define the class match conditions at the time the class was created This field is only meaningful if the class type is acl Note that the contents of the ACL may have changed since this class was created The name of an existing DiffServ class whose match conditions are being referenced by the specified class definition 10 18 CLI Commands Differentiated Services 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software show diffserv This command displays the DiffServ General Status Group information which includes the current administrative mode setting as well as the current and maximum number of rows in each of the main DiffServ private MIB tables This command takes no options Format show diffserv Mode Privileged EXEC DiffServ Admin mode The current value of the DiffServ administrative mode Class Table Size The current number of entries rows in the Class Table Class Table Max The maximum allowed entries rows for the Class Table Class Rule Table Size The current number of entries rows in the Class Rule Table Class Rule Table Max The maximum allowed entries rows for the Class Rule Table Policy Tabl
205. egare enm pua BIEN E 8 94 See CORTAN EE Mi rr a os OI eR REPE EEUU UC ep EN ERE ERE UEM PERO URP EN Bear Wer E SEMIS E aiios oda uM oaa RN e EE wer i A E 8 96 EE Ee rt EL dot1x login dotix max req ee Kee Se Ge S GE SE GE Ee GE 8 9 A A a dot1x port control no dot1x port control xiv Contents 202 10009 01_060204 A nner RE no dot1x port control All dot1x re authenticate panna feos ee Td Eus Seite eese Vcn nun Eet 8 COTE FS ORC EIGN WEE dot1x system auth control RE lig dor ix SES MUI GOD aia 8 99 dot1x timeout Seege PE isse 8 100 no dot1x user T 8 101 radius ESCONDE MOGE E 8 101 no radius accounting mode M e T xe E nO radius sener MOET Soci deii EUR E a radius server key T 8 IUS Server MS Daria radius server primary e radius server retransmit Le Re Set no radius server retransmit di Elle WE show authentication ERR ere een MARRE dns eeben nto Hani See 8 E RT br RE er SB Ce AMICON EE users login o A aan ane Contents 202 10009 01_060204 Ou PASS A y clear port channel Bpen Run ee Eege Haden
206. eived on this port are discarded When set to Admit All untagged frames or priority tagged frames received on this port are accepted and assigned the value of the Port VLAN ID for this port With either option VLAN tagged frames are forwarded in accordance to the 802 1Q VLAN specification May be enabled or disabled When enabled the frame is dis carded if this port is not a member of the VLAN with which this frame is associated In a tagged frame the VLAN is identified by the VLAN ID in the tag In an untagged frame the VLAN is the Port VLAN ID specified for the port that received this frame When disabled all frames are forwarded in accordance with the 802 1Q VLAN bridge specification The factory default is dis abled May May be enabled or disabled The 802 1p priority assigned to tagged packets arriving on the port Enabled shutdown Switching Commands 8 65 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Mode Interface Config no shutdown This command enables a port Format no shutdown Mode Interface Config shutdown all This command disables all ports Default Enabled Format shutdown all Mode Global Config no shutdown all This command enables all ports Format no shutdown all Mode Global Config snmp trap link status This command enables link status traps by interface Note This command is valid only when the Link Up Down Flag is e
207. ents whether relaying of requests is enabled or disabled Is the IP Address for the BootP DHCP Relay server Is the DHCP circuit Id option which may be enabled or disabled Is the number or requests received Is the number of requests relayed Is the number of packets discarded This command displays all the summary information of the IP This command takes no options Format Mode Default Time to Live Router ID Routing Mode IP Forwarding Mode show ip interface show ip brief Privileged EXEC and User EXEC The computed TTL Time to Live of forwarding a packet from the local router to the final destination Is a 32 bit integer in dotted decimal format identifying the router about which information is displayed This is a configured value Shows whether the routing mode is enabled or disabled Shows whether forwarding of IP frames is enabled or disabled This is a configured value This command displays all pertinent information about the IP interface Format Mode show ip interface lt slot port gt Privileged EXEC and User EXEC Routing Commands 9 37 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software IP Address Subnet Mask Routing Mode Administrative Mode Is an IP address representing the subnet configuration of the router interface This value was configured into the unit Is a mask of the network and host portion of the IP address for the router
208. eously while each such grouping is evaluated sequentially CLI Commands Differentiated Services 10 17 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Match Criteria Values Excluded The Match Criteria fields will only be displayed if they have been configured They will be displayed in the order entered by the user These are evaluated in accordance with the class type The possible Match Criteria fields are Class of Service Destination IP Address Destination Layer 4 Port Destination MAC Address Every IP DSCP IP Precedence IP TOS Protocol Keyword Ref erence Class Source IP Address Source Layer 4 Port Source MAC Address and VLAN This field displays the values of the Match Criteria This field indicates whether or not this Match Criteria is excluded If the Class Name is not specified this command displays a list of all defined DiffServ classes The following fields are displayed Class Name Class Type ACL Number Ref Class Name The name of this class Note that the order in which classes are displayed is not necessarily the same order in which they were created The class type all any or acl indicating how the match criteria are evaluated for this class A class type of all means every match criterion defined for the class is evaluated simultaneously they must all be true to indicate a class match For a type of any each match criterion is evaluat
209. epresenting the OSPF Retransmit Interval for the specified interface This is a configured value A number representing the OSPF Transit Delay for the specified interface This is a configured value A number representing the OSPF LSA Acknowledgement Inter val for the specified interface show ip ospf interface stats This command displays the statistics for a specific interface The information below will only be displayed if OSPF is enabled Format Mode OSPF Area ID Spf Runs show ip ospf interface stats lt slot port gt Privileged EXEC and User EXEC The area id of this OSPF interface The number of times that the intra area route table has been cal culated using this area s link state database Area Border Router Count The total number of area border routers reachable within this area This is initially zero and is calculated in each SPF pass AS Border Router Count The total number of Autonomous System border routers reach Area LSA Count IP Address OSPF Interface Events Virtual Events able within this area The total number of link state advertisements in this area s link state database excluding AS External LSAs The IP address associated with this OSPF interface The number of times the specified OSPF interface has changed its state or an error has occurred The number of state changes or errors that occurred on this virtual link 9 44 Routing Commands 202 10009 01_060204 User Manua
210. equired and together they specify a contiguous port range Each port number is an integer from 0 to 65535 but with the added requirement that the second number be equal to or greater than the first The optional not parameter has the effect of negating this match condition for the class 1 e match all source layer 4 ports except for those within the range specified here The optional not parameter has the effect of negating this match condition for the class i e match all source layer 4 port numbers except for the one specified here Default None Format match not srcl4port lt portkey gt 0 65535 0 65535 gt Mode Class Map Config match vlan This command adds to the specified class definition a match condition based on the value of the layer 2 VLAN Identifier field of a packet The VLAN ID is an integer from 1 to 4094 The optional not parameter has the effect of negating this match condition for the class 1 e match all VLAN Identifier values except for what is specified here Default None Format match not vlan lt 1 4094 gt Mode Class Map Config Policy Commands The policy command set is used in DiffServ to define CLI Commands Differentiated Services 10 11 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Traffic Conditioning Specify traffic conditioning actions policing marking shaping to apply to traffic classes Service Provisioning Spe
211. er network that spans a relatively large geographical area Typically a WAN consists of two or more local area networks LANs Windows Internet Naming Service WINS Windows Internet Naming Service is a server process for resolving Windows based computer names to IP addresses If a remote network contains a WINS server your Windows PCs can gather information from that WINS server about its local hosts This allows your PCs to browse that remote network using the Windows Network Neighborhood feature Glossary C 21 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software WINS WINS Windows Internet Naming Service is a server process for resolving Windows based computer names to IP addresses X XModem One of the most popular file transfer protocols FTPs Xmodem is fairly effective at detecting errors It sends blocks of data together with a checksum and then waits for acknowledgment of the block s receipt The waiting slows down the rate of data transmission considerably but it ensures accurate transmission Xmodem can be implemented either in software or in hardware Many modems and almost all communications software packages support Xmodem However it is useful only at relatively slow data transmission speeds less than 4 800 bps Enhanced versions of Xmodem that work at higher transmission speeds are known as Ymodem and Zmodem C 22 Glossary 202 10009 01_060204
212. erface identified by lt areaid gt and neighbor The neighbor parameter is the IP address of the neighbor The range for seconds is 1 to 65535 Default 10 Format area areaid virtual link neighbor hello interval lt 1 65535 gt Mode Router OSPF Config no area virtual link hello interval This command configures the default hello interval for the OSPF virtual interface on the virtual interface identified by lt areaid gt and lt neighbor gt The lt neighbor gt parameter is the IP address of the neighbor Format no area lt areaid gt virtual link lt neighbor gt hello inter val Mode Router OSPF Config area virtual link retransmit interval This command configures the retransmit interval for the OSPF virtual interface on the virtual interface identified by lt areaid gt and lt neighbor gt The lt neighbor gt parameter is the IP address of the neighbor The range for lt seconds gt is 0 to 3600 Default 5 Format area lt areaid gt virtual link neighbor retransmit interval lt 0 3600 gt Routing Commands 9 7 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Mode Router OSPF Config no area virtual link retransmit interval This command configures the default retransmit interval for the OSPF virtual interface on the virtual interface identified by lt areaid gt and lt neighbor gt The lt neighbor gt parameter is the IP address of the neighb
213. eries Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Table 13 2 IS CLI Mapping continued CLI Command Package 7300 Series L3 Switch Command Mode Syntax Switching config lag deleteport lt logical slot Interface deleteport lt logical slot port gt port gt lt slot port all gt Config Global deleteport lt logical slot port gt all Config Switching config lag adminmode lt logical slot Global port channel adminmode lt logical port all gt lt enable disable gt Config slot port gt all Global no port channel adminmode lt logical Config slot port gt all Switching config lag linktrap lt logical slot port Global port channel linktrap lt logical slot all gt lt enable disable gt Config port gt all Global no port channel linktrap lt logical slot Config port all Switching config lag name lt logical slot port Global port channel name lt logical slot all gt lt name gt Config port gt all lt name gt Switching config lag deletelag lt logical slot Interface delete interface lt logical slot port gt port all gt Config all Switching config lag stpmode logical slot Interface spannig tree logical slot port gt all port all gt off 802 1d fast Config off 802 1d fast Switching config vlan create lt 2 4094 gt VLAN vlan lt 1 4094 gt database VLAN no vlan lt 1 4094 gt database Switching config vlan name lt nam
214. es User Exec Mode Privileged Exec Mode Global Config Mode When the operator logs into the CLI the User Exec mode is the initial mode The User Exec mode contains a limited set of com mands The command prompt shown at this level is Command Prompt Exec gt To have access to the full suite of commands the operator must enter the Privileged Exec mode The Privileged Exec mode requires password authentication From Privileged Exec mode the operator can issue any Exec command or enter the Global Configuration mode The command prompt shown at this level is Command Prompt Exec This mode permits the operator to make modifications to the run ning configuration General setup commands are grouped in this mode From the Global Configuration mode the operator can enter the System Configuration mode the Physical Port config the Interface Configuration mode or the Protocol Specific modes specified below The command prompt at this level is Command Prompt Config From the Global Config mode the operator may enter the following config modes VLAN Mode Interface Config Mode This mode groups all the commands pertaining to VLANs The command prompt shown at this level is Command Prompt VLAN Many features are enabled for a particular interface The Interface commands enable or modify the operation of an interface In this mode a physical port is set up for a specific logical con nection operation The Inte
215. es discarded and excessive frames dis carded Single Collision Frames A count of the number of successfully transmitted frames on a particular interface for which transmis sion is inhibited by exactly one collision Multiple Collision Frames A count of the number of success fully transmitted frames on a particular interface for which trans mission is inhibited by more than one collision Excessive Collisions A count of frames for which transmission on a particular interface fails due to excessive collisions Port Membership The number of frames discarded on egress for this port due to egress filtering being enabled VLAN Viable Discards The number of frames discarded on this port when a lookup on a particular VLAN occurs while that entry in the VLAN table is being modified or if the VLAN has not been configured BPDU s received The count of BPDU s Bridge Protocol Data Units received in the spanning tree layer Switching Commands 8 9 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Dot1x Statistics BPDU s Transmitted The count of BPDU s Bridge Protocol Data Units transmitted from the spanning tree layer 802 3x Pause Frames Received A count of MAC Control frames received on this interface with an opcode indicating the PAUSE operation This counter does not increment when the interface is operating in half duplex mode GVRP PDU s Received The count of GV
216. ex policy or rule statements to determine how to forward a given network packet An analogy is made Glossary C 5 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software to travel services in which a person can choose among different modes of travel train bus airplane degree of comfort the number of stops on the route standby status the time of day or period of year for the trip and so forth For a given set of packet travel rules a packet is given one of 64 possible forwarding behaviors known as per hop behaviors PHBs A six bit field known as the Differentiated Services Code Point DSCP in the Internet Protocol Internet Protocol header specifies the per hop behavior for a given flow of packets Differentiated Services and the Class of Service approach provide a way to control traffic that is both more flexible and more scalability than the Quality of Service approach Diffserv See Differentiated Services on page 5 DNS Short for Domain Name System or Service an Internet service that translates domain names into IP addresses Because domain names are alphabetic they re easier to remember The Internet however is really based on IP addresses Every time you use a domain name therefore a DNS service must translate the name into the corresponding IP address For example the domain name www example com might translate to 198 105 232 4 The DNS system is in fact its own ne
217. f between 64 and 1518 octets inclusive but had a bad Frame Check Sequence FCS with a non integral number of octets Rx FCS Errors The total number of packets received that had a length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets of between 64 and 1518 octets inclusive but had a bad Frame Check Sequence FCS with an integral number of octets Overruns The total number of frames discarded as this port was overloaded with incoming packets and could not keep up with the inflow Received Packets not forwarded 8 6 Switching Commands 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Total A count of valid frames received which were discarded i e filtered by the forwarding process Local Traffic Frames The total number of frames dropped in the forwarding process because the destination address was located off of this port 802 3x Pause Frames Received A count of MAC Control frames received on this interface with an opcode indicating the PAUSE operation This counter does not increment when the interface is operating in half duplex mode Unacceptable Frame Type The number of frames discarded from this port due to being an unacceptable frame type VLAN Membership Mismatch The number of frames dis carded on this port due to ingress filtering VLAN Viable Discards The number of frames discarded on this port when a lookup on a particular VLAN occurs while that en
218. f a message or accompanies a message and is used to determine that the contents origin author or other attributes of all or part of the message are as they appear to be IBM Glossary of Computing Terms MAC address The Media Access Control address is a unique 48 bit hardware address assigned to every network interface card Usually written in the form 01 23 45 67 89 ab Management Information Base When SNMP devices send SNMP messages to the management console the device managing SNMP messages it stores information in the MIB Mbps Megabits per second MBONE See Multicast Backbone on page 13 MD5 MDS creates digital signatures using a one way hash function meaning that it takes a message and converts it into a fixed string of digits also called a message digest When using a one way hash function one can compare a calculated message digest against the message digest that is decrypted with a public key to verify that the message hasn t been tampered with This comparison is called a hashcheck MDIMDIX In cable wiring the concept of transmit and receive are from the perspective of the PC which is wired as a Media Dependant Interface MDI In MDI wiring a PC transmits on pins 1 and 2 At the hub switch router or access point the perspective is reversed and the hub receives on pins 1 and 2 This wiring is referred to as Media Dependant Interface Crossover MDI X See Auto negotiation on page 3 MIB See
219. fic based upon the argument Format show interface ethernet lt slot port gt switchport Mode Privileged EXEC The display parameters when the argument is lt slot port gt is as follows Packets Received Octets Received The total number of octets of data including those in bad packets received on the network excluding framing bits but including FCS octets This object can be used as a rea sonable estimate of ethernet utilization If greater precision is desired the etherStatsPkts and etherStatsOctets objects should be sampled before and after a common interval The result of 8 4 Switching Commands 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software this equation is the value Utilization which is the percent utiliza tion of the ethernet segment on a scale of 0 to 100 percent Packets Received lt 64 Octets The total number of packets including bad packets received that were lt 64 octets in length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets Packets Received 64 Octets The total number of packets including bad packets received that were 64 octets in length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets Packets Received 65 127 Octets The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 65 and 127 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets Packets Received 128 255 Octets The total
220. fic virtual router Represents the priority value for the specific virtual router Represents the advertisement interval for the specific virtual router Is the preemption mode configured on the specified virtual router Represents the status Enable or Disable of the specific router Represents the state Master backup of the specific virtual show ip vrrp interface brief This command displays information about each virtual router configured on the 7300 Series L3 Switch This command takes no options It displays information about each virtual router Format show ip vrrp interface brief Mode Privileged EXEC and User EXEC Slot port Represents the slot port combination of the virtual router VRID Represents the router ID of the virtual router IP Address Is the IP Address that was configured on the virtual router Mode Represents whether the virtual router is enabled or disabled State Represents the state Master backup of the virtual router 9 54 Routing Commands 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software show ip vrrp interface stats This command displays the statistical information about each virtual router configured on the 7300 Series L3 Switch Format show ip vrrp interface stats lt slot port gt lt vrID gt Mode Privileged EXEC and User EXEC Is the time that the virtual router has been up in days hours min utes and seconds State Transitioned to Master Rep
221. figuration for a specified port and the dot1x statistics for a specified port depending on the tokens used Format show dot1x summary lt slot port gt all detail lt slot port gt statistics lt slot port gt Mode Privileged EXEC 8 106 Switching Commands 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software If none of the optional parameters are used the global dot1x configuration summary is displayed Administrative mode Indicates whether authentication control on the switch is enabled or disabled If the optional parameter summary lt slot port gt all is used the dot1x configuration for the specified port or all ports are dis played Port The interface whose configuration is displayed Control Mode The configured control mode for this port Possible values are force unauthorized force authorized auto Operating Control Mode The control mode under which this port is operating Possible values are authorized unauthorized Reauthentication Enabled Indicates whether re authentication is enabled on this port Key Transmission Enabled Indicates if the key is transmitted to the supplicant for the specified port If the optional parameter detail lt slot port gt is used the detailed dot1x configuration for the specified port are displayed Port The interface whose configuration is displayed Protocol Version The protocol version associated with this p
222. for all other users Format users snmpv3 accessmode lt username gt readonly read write Mode Global Config no users snmpv3 accessmode This command sets the snmpv3 access privileges for the specified login user as read write for admin user readonly for all other users The lt username gt is the login user name for which the specified access mode will apply Format no users snmpv3 accessmode lt username gt Mode Global Config Switching Commands 8 93 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software users snmpv3 authentication This command specifies the authentication protocol to be used for the specified login user The valid authentication protocols are none md5 or sha If md5 or sha are specified the user login password will be used as the snmpv3 authentication password The lt username gt is the login user name for which the specified authentication protocol will be used Default no authentication Format users snmpv3 authentication lt username gt none md5 sha Mode Global Config no users snmpv3 authentication This command sets the authentication protocol to be used for the specified login user to none The lt username gt is the login user name for which the specified authentication protocol will be used Format users snmpv3 authentication lt username gt Mode Global Config users snmpv3 encryption This command specifies the encryption protocol and
223. for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Default auto Format dot1x port control force unauthorized force authorized auto Mode Interface Config no dot1x port control This command sets the authentication mode to be used on the specified port to auto Format no dot1x port control Mode Interface Config dot1x port control All This command sets the authentication mode to be used on all ports The control mode may be one of the following e force unauthorized The authenticator PAE unconditionally sets the controlled port to unauthorized e force authorized The authenticator PAE unconditionally sets the controlled port to authorized e auto The authenticator PAE sets the controlled port mode to reflect the outcome of the authentication exchanges between the supplicant authenticator and the authentication server Default auto Format dot1x port control all force unauthorized force authorized auto Mode Global Config no dot1x port control All This command sets the authentication mode to be used on all ports to auto Format no dot1x port control all Mode Global Config 8 98 Switching Commands 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software dot1x re authenticate This command begins the re authentication sequence on the specified port This command is only valid if the control mode for the specified port is auto If the contro
224. formation with the MAC Bridges attached to the same LAN segment and for that information to be disseminated across all Bridges in the Bridged LAN that support Extended Filtering Services The operation of GMRP relies upon the services provided by the GARP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol GVRP allows workstations to request admission to a particular VLAN for multicast purposes Gateway A local device usually a router that connects hosts on a local network to other networks GE See Gigabit Ethernet on page 8 Generic Attribute Registration Protocol GARP provides a generic attribute dissemination capability that is used by participants in GARP Applications called GARP Participants to register and de register attribute values with other GARP Participants within a Bridged LAN The definition of the attribute types the values that they can carry and the semantics that are associated with those values when registered are specific to the operation of the GARP Application concerned Gigabit Ethernet An Ethernet system that is designed to operate at 1000 Mbps 1 Gbps GIP See GARP Information Propagation on page 8 C 8 Glossary 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software GMRP See GARP Multicast Registration Protocol on page 8 GVD GARP VLAN Database GVRP See GARP VLAN Registration Protocol on page 8 H Half duplex A system that allows packet
225. from 0 to 255 A value of 0 indicates that the router is not eligible to become the designated router on this network The types are Down initial state of the neighbor conversation no recent infor mation has been received from the neighbor Attempt no recent information has been received from the neighbor but a more concerted effort should be made to contact the neighbor Init an Hello packet has recently been seen from the neighbor but bi directional communication has not yet been established 2 way communication between the two routers is bi directional Routing Commands 9 45 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Events Permanence Hellos Suppressed Exchange start the first step in creating an adjacency between the two neighboring routers the goal is to decide which router is the master and to decide upon the initial DD sequence number Exchange the router is describing its entire link state database by sending Database Description packets to the neighbor Loading Link State Request packets are sent to the neighbor asking for the more recent LSAs that have been discovered but not yet received in the Exchange state Full the neighboring routers are fully adjacent and they will now appear in router LSAs and network LSAs The number of times this neighbor relationship has changed state or an error has occurred This variable displays the s
226. g is enabled traffic is transmitted as tagged frames If tagging is disabled traffic is transmitted as untagged frames The ID is a valid VLAN identification number Format vlan tagging lt 1 4094 gt Mode Interface Config no vlan tagging This command configures the tagging behavior for a specific interface in a VLAN to disabled If tagging is disabled traffic is transmitted as untagged frames The ID is a valid VLAN identification number Format no vlan tagging 1 4094 Mode Interface Config Spanning Tree Commands This section provides detailed explanation of the spanning tree commands The commands are divided into two functional groups e Show commands display spanning tree settings statistics and other information e Configuration Commands configure features and options of the switch For every configuration command there is a show command that displays the configuration setting show spanning tree This command displays spanning tree settings for the common and internal spanning tree when the optional parameter brief is not included in the command The following details are displayed Switching Commands 8 77 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Format show spanning tree brief Mode Privileged EXEC and User EXEC Bridge Priority Configured value Bridge Identifier Time Since Topology Change in seconds Topology Change Count Number of times changed
227. g the serial port Telnet or Web A new user may be added to the switch by entering a name in a blank entry The user name may be up to eight characters and is not case sensitive Two users are included as the factory default admin and guest Switching Commands 8 91 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Access Mode Shows whether the operator is able to change parameters on the switch Read Write or is only able to view them Read Only As a factory default admin has Read Write access and guest has Read Only access There can only be one Read Write user and up to five Read Only users SNMPv3 AccessMode This field displays the SNMPv3 Access Mode If the value is set to ReadWrite the SNMPv3 user will be able to set and retrieve parameters on the system If the value is set to ReadOnly the SNMPv3 user will only be able to retrieve parameter information The SNMPv3 access mode may be different than the CLI and Web access mode SNMPv3 Authentication This field displays the authentication protocol to be used for the specified login user SNMPv3 Encryption This field displays the encryption protocol to be used for the specified login user users name This command adds a new user account if space permits The account username can be up to eight characters in length The name may be comprised of alphanumeric characters as well as the dash and underscore _
228. gin This command assigns the authentication login list to use for non configured users when attempting to log in to the system This setting is overridden by the authentication login list assigned to a specific user if the user is configured locally If this value is not configured users will be authenticated using local authentication only Format users defaultlogin listname Mode Global Config users login This command assigns the specified authentication login list to the specified user for system login The user must be a configured user and the lt listname gt must be a configured login list If the user is assigned a login list that requires remote authentication all access to the interface from all CLI web and telnet sessions will be blocked until the authentication is complete Note that the login list associated with the admin user can not be changed to prevent accidental lockout from the switch Format users login user listname Mode Global Config System Utilities This section describes system utilities clear config This command resets the configuration to the factory defaults without powering off the switch The switch is automatically reset when this command is processed You are prompted to confirm that the reset should proceed Format clear config 8 112 Switching Commands 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Mode Pr
229. gmpsnooping Privileged EXEC and User EXEC Privileged EXEC show gvrp configuration lt slot port gt all show igmpsnooping A 34 202 10009 01_060204 IS CLI Mapping User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Table 13 2 IS CLI Mapping continued CLI Command Package 7300 Series L3 Switch Command Mode Syntax Switching show mfdb table macaddr all Privileged show mac address table multicast EXEC lt macaddr gt all Switching show mfdb gmrp Privileged show mac address table gmrp EXEC Switching show mfdb igmpsnooping Privileged show mac address table EXEC igmpsnooping Switching show mfdb statisticfiltering Privileged show mac address table EXEC staticfiltering Switching show mfdb stats Privileged show mac address table stats EXEC Switching show mirroring Privileged show monitor EXEC Switching config switchconfig broadcast Global storm control broadcast lt enable disable gt Config Global no storm control broadcast Config Switching config switchconfig flowcontrol Global storm control flowcontrol lt enable disable gt Config Global no storm control flowcontrol Config Switching config port adminmode lt slot port Interface shutdown all gt lt enable disable gt Config Interface no shutdown Config Global shutdown all Config Global no shutdown all Config Switching config port linkt
230. gt authdetails lt slot port gt lt vrlID gt Config none simple key Interface no ip vrrp VrlD authentication Config Routing config router vrrp removedetails Interface ip vrrp removedetails VrID lt slot port gt lt vrID gt Config Routing config router rtrdiscovery Interface ip irdp holdtime lt maxinterval 9000 gt adminmode lt slot port gt lt enable Config maxadvertinterval lt 4 1800 gt disable gt minadvertinterval lt 3 maxinterval gt preference lt 2147483648 2147483647 gt address lt address gt Interface no ip irdp Config Routing config router rtrdiscovery maxinterval lt slot port gt lt 4 1800 gt Routing config router rtrdiscovery mininterval lt slot port gt lt 3 maxinterval gt Routing config router rtrdiscovery lifetime lt slot port gt lt max interval 9000 gt Routing config router rtrdisocvery address lt slot port gt lt ipaddr gt Routing config router rtrdisocvery prefrence lt slot port gt lt 2147483648 2147483647 gt Routing config router bootpdhcprelay Global bootpdhcprelay cidoptmode cidoptmode lt enable disable gt Config Global no bootpdhcprelay cidoptmode Config Routing config router bootpdhcprelay Global bootpdhcprelay disable adminmode lt enable disable gt Config IS CLI Mapping A 21 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Table 13 2
231. he interface direction of interest Note This command is only allowed while the DiffServ administrative mode is enabled Format Interface Direction Operational Status Policy Name show policy map interface slot port in out The slot number and port number of the interface slot port The traffic direction of this interface service either in or out The current operational status of this DiffServ service interface The name of the policy attached to the interface in the indicated direction Interface Offered Octets Packets A cumulative count of the octets packets offered to this service interface in the specified direction before the defined DiffServ treatment is applied CLI Commands Differentiated Services 10 23 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Interface Discarded Octets Packets A cumulative count of the octets packets discarded by this service interface in the specified direction for any reason due to DiffServ treatment Interface Sent Octets Packets A cumulative count of the octets packets forwarded by this service interface in the specified direction after the defined DiffServ treatment was applied In this case forwarding means the traffic stream was passed to the next functional element in the data path such as the switching or routing function or an out bound link transmission element The following information is repeated for each c
232. he reader has a basic knowledge of Ethernet and networking concepts How to Use This Document This document describes configuration commands for the 7000 Series L3 Managed Switch software The commands can be accessed from the CLI telnet and Web interfaces e Chapter 6 Quick Start up details the procedure to quickly become acquainted with the 7000 Series L3 Managed Switch Software e Chapter 8 Switching Commands describes the Switching commands e Chapter 9 Routing Commands describes the Routing commands About This Guide 1 1 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Note Refer to the release notes for the 7000 Series L3 Managed Switch Software application level code The release notes detail the platform specific functionality of the Switching Routing SNMP Config Management and Bandwidth Provisioning packages Typographical Conventions This guide uses the following typographical conventions Table 1 Typographical conventions italics Emphasis bold times roman User input Enter Named keys in text are shown enclosed in square brackets The notation Enter is used for the Enter key and the Return key Ctrl C Two or more keys that must be pressed simultaneously are shown in text linked with a plus sign SMALL CAPS DOS file and directory names Special Message Formats This guide uses the following formats t
233. he specified authentication login list to the specified user for 802 1x port security The user parameter must be a configured user and the listname parameter must be a configured authentication login list Format dot1x login lt user gt lt listname gt Mode Global Config dot1x max req This command sets the maximum number of times the authenticator state machine on this port will transmit an EAPOL EAP Request Identity frame before timing out the supplicant The lt count gt value must be in the range 1 10 Default 2 Format dot la max req count Mode Interface Config no dot1x max req This command sets the maximum number of times the authenticator state machine on this port will transmit an EAPOL EAP Request Identity frame before timing out the supplicant to the default value i e 2 Format no dotlx max req Mode Interface Config dot1x port control This command sets the authentication mode to be used on the specified port The control mode may be one of the following e force unauthorized The authenticator PAE unconditionally sets the controlled port to unauthorized e force authorized The authenticator PAE unconditionally sets the controlled port to authorized e auto The authenticator PAE sets the controlled port mode to reflect the outcome of the authentication exchanges between the supplicant authenticator and the authentication server Switching Commands 8 97 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual
234. hey are dropped Default Disabled Format ip netdirbcast Mode Interface Config no ip netdirbcast This command disables the forwarding of network directed broadcasts When disabled network directed broadcasts are dropped Format no ip netdirbcast Mode Interface Config ip ospf This command enables OSPF on a router interface Default Disabled Format ip ospf Mode Interface Config no ip ospf This command disables OSPF on a router interface 9 24 Routing Commands 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Format no ip ospf Mode Interface Config ip ospf areaid This command sets the OSPF area to which the specified router interface belongs The value for lt areaid gt is an IP address formatted as a 4 digit dotted decimal number that uniquely identifies the area to which the interface connects Assigning an area id which does not exist on an interface causes the area to be created with default values Format ip ospf areaid lt areaid gt Mode Interface Config ip ospf authentication This command sets the OSPF Authentication Type and Key for the specified interface The value of lt type gt is either none simple or encrypt The key is composed of standard displayable non control keystrokes from a Standard 101 102 key keyboard The authentication key must be 8 bytes or less if the authentication type is simple If the type is encrypt the key may be up to 256
235. his command is used to remove the configured RADIUS authentication server or the RADIUS accounting server If the auth token is used the previously configured RADIUS authentication server is removed from the configuration Similarly if the acct token is used the previously configured RADIUS accounting server is removed from the configuration The lt ipaddr gt parameter must match the IP address of the previously configured RADIUS authentication accounting server Format no radius server host auth acct lt ipaddress gt Mode Global Config 8 102 Switching Commands 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software radius server key This command is used to configure the shared secret between the RADIUS client and the RADIUS accounting authentication server Depending on whether the auth or acct token is used the shared secret will be configured for the RADIUS authentication or RADIUS accounting server The IP address provided must match a previously configured server When this command is executed the secret will be prompted The secret must be an alphanumeric value not exceeding 20 characters Format radius server key auth acct lt ipaddr gt Mode Global Config radius server msgauth This command enables the message authenticator attribute for a specifiedserver Default radius server msgauth lt ipaddr gt Mode Global Config radius server primary This comm
236. ice value that is set in the 802 1p header of outbound packets This is not displayed if the mark cos was not specified Mark IP DSCP Denotes the mark re mark value used as the DSCP for traffic matching this class This is not displayed if mark ip description is not specified using the police two rate command or if policing is in use for the class under this policy Mark IP Precedence Denotes the mark re mark value used as the IP Precedence for traffic matching this class This is not displayed if precedence is not specified using police two rate command or if either mark DSCP or policing is in use for the class under this policy Policing Style This field denotes the style of policing if any used simple sin gle rate or two rate Committed Rate Kbps This field displays the committed rate used in simple policing single rate policing and two rate policing Committed Burst Size KB This field displays the committed burst size used in simple policing single rate policing and two rate policing Excess Burst Size KB This field displays the excess burst size used in single rate polic ing Peak Rate Kbps This field displays the peak rate used in two rate policing Peak Burst Size KB This field displays the peak burst size used in two rate policing Conform Action The current setting for the action taken on a packet considered to conform to the policing parameters This is not displayed if polic ing is not in use for th
237. ie ibd nasal ni Quick Start up Uploading Geier Switch to ur of Band PC Only XMODEM sti Quick Start up Downloading from Out of Band PC to Switch Only XMODEM wine 8 6 Quick Start up Downloading from TFTP Server c cccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeees 6 6 Quick Start up Factory Default ainda dd Chapter 7 Mode based CLI Mode based Topology SE gie sip fees ere re eer C Mode based Command Hierarchy sss nennen 7 5 low ol bera eege tnt cer Ed er en cvm re tere treme fire reer iter ep SI eH DI WM DI IRE E No Farm or 3 Deb TAROT wissen GLORY EXE Ent ri n D EF EARN a Rer a dE t A S S 7 8 Behavior of Command Help mm ere TE re vn FO Chapter 8 Switching Commands System Information and Stalistes Comimabede css retained metae d o A A 8 1 A A eet earn terre rte 8 2 show TA EI A A 8 2 ENCIMA E al 8 3 vi Contents 202 10009 01_060204 SHOW interface le sons ede dpa cr Perla era BE LH v d ERE apex br A SHOW logging seria i show mac addr table SE jasia Binasi 8 ano DIUI E show running config EE ll Management VLAN Commands SES SEN NM iens d T iam 8 15 Le EE 8 15 Dota Fem E E classofservice dotipmapping THER Gegen b ien peer 8 16 show classofservice MOT TFT ee ME 8 16 cl e o DUET MIB DOMI aeria ERR D PR ofa ore ad AS AA A LAG Port Channel 802 3ad C
238. ig Mode DHCP Server Commands 12 3 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software ip dhcp excluded address This command specifies the IP addresses that a DHCP server should not assign to DHCP clients Low address and high address are valid IP addresses each made up of four decimal bytes ranging from 0 to 255 IP address 0 0 0 0 is invalid Default None Format ip dhcp excluded address lt lowaddress gt highaddress Mode Global Config no ip dhcp excluded address This command removes the excluded IP addresses for a DHCP client Low address and high address are valid IP addresses each made up of four decimal bytes ranging from 0 to 255 IP address 0 0 0 0 is invalid Format no ip dhcp excluded address lt lowaddress gt highad dress Mode Global Config ip dhcp ping packets This command is used to specify the number in a range from 2 10 of packets a DHCP server sends to a pool address as part of a ping operation Setting the number of ping packets to 0 is the same as no ip dhcp ping packets and will prevent the server from pinging pool addresses Default 2 Format ip dhcp ping packets lt 0 2 10 gt Mode Global Config no ip dhcp ping packets This command prevents the server from pinging pool addresses and will set the number of packets to 0 Default 0 Format no ip dhcp ping packets Mode Global Config 12 4 DHCP Server Commands 202 10009 01_060204 User Manua
239. ileged show mac addr table lt macaddr gt all EXEC all Switching show stats port detailed lt slot port gt Privileged show interface ethernet lt slot port gt EXEC switchport Switching show stats switch detailed Privileged EXEC Switching show stats port summary lt slot Privileged show interface lt slot port gt port gt EXEC switchport Switching show stats switch summary Privileged EXEC Switching show eventlog Privileged show eventlog EXEC Switching show msglog Privileged show msglog EXEC A 30 IS CLI Mapping 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Table 13 2 IS CLI Mapping continued CLI Command Package 7300 Series L3 Switch Command Mode Syntax Switching show traplog Privileged show logging EXEC Switching config sysname lt name gt Global snmp server sysname lt name gt Config Switching config syslocation location Global snmp server location loc Config Switching config syscontact contact Global snmp server contact con Config Switching ping lt ipaddr gt Privileged ping lt ipaddress gt EXEC and User EXEC Switching reset system Privileged reload EXEC Switching transfer upload mode lt xmodem Privileged copy nvram errorlog tftp gt EXEC nvram msglog nvram startup config nvram traplog url lt url gt nvram startup config system image nvram s
240. in band or out of band mechanisms Management is standards based with configuration parameters and a private MIB providing control for functions not completely specified in the MIBs Table 2 1 Management Method Comparing Switch Management Methods Advantages Disadvantages Administration console Out of band access via direct cable connection means network bottlenecks crashes and downtime do not slow or prevent access No IP address or subnet needed Menu or CLI based HyperTerminal access to full functionality HyperTerminal are built into Microsoft Windows 95 98 NT 2000 operating systems Secure make sure the switch is installed in a secure area Must be near switch or use dial up connection Not convenient for remote users Not graphical Web browser Can be accessed from any location via the Security can be compromised hackers ior Telnet switch s IP address can attack if they know IP address Ideal for configuring the switch remotely e May encounter lag times on poor Compatible with Internet Explorer and connections Netscape Navigator Web browsers Displaying graphical objects over a e Familiar browser interface browser interface may slow navigation Graphical data available e Most visually appealing Menu or CLI interfaces available SNMP Agent Communicates with switch functions at the Requires SNMP manager software Management Information Base MIB level k Least vi
241. ink Up Down Flag Multiple Users Flag Spanning Tree Flag Broadcast Storm Flag show trapflags Privileged EXEC May be enabled or disabled The factory default is enabled Indi cates whether authentication failure traps will be sent May be enabled or disabled The factory default is enabled Indi cates whether link status traps will be sent Multiple Users Flag May be enabled or disabled The factory default is enabled Indi cates whether a trap will be sent when the same user ID is logged into the switch more than once at the same time either via telnet or serial port May be enabled or disabled The factory default is enabled Indi cates whether spanning tree traps will be sent May be enabled or disabled The factory default is enabled Indi cates whether broadcast storm traps will be sent DVMRP Traps May be enabled or disabled The factory default is disabled Indi cates whether DVMRP traps will be sent OSPF Traps May be enabled or disabled The factory default is disabled Indi cates whether OSPF traps will be sent PIM Traps May be enabled or disabled The factory default is disabled Indi cates whether PIM traps will be sent 8 28 Switching Commands 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software snmp server community This command adds and names a new SNMP community A community name is a name associated with the switch and with a set of SNMP manage
242. interface A count of the total number of packets offered to all class instances in this service before their defined DiffServ treatment is applied These are overall per interface per direction counts A count of the total number of packets discarded for all class instances in this service for any reason due to DiffServ treatment These are overall per interface per direction counts A count of the total number of packets forwarded for all class instances in this service after their defined DiffServ treatments were applied In this case forwarding means the traffic stream was passed to the next functional element in the data path such as the switching or routing function or an outbound link transmis sion element These are overall per interface per direction counts The name of the policy attached to the interface Note None of the counters listed here are guaranteed to be supported on all platforms Only supported counters are shown in the display output CLI Commands Differentiated Services 10 25 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software 10 26 CLI Commands Differentiated Services 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Show Commands Chapter 11 CLI Commands ACL show ip access lists This command displays an Access Control List ACL and all of the rules that are defined for the ACL The lt accessli
243. ion System Name System Location System Contact IP Address System Object ID OID System Up Time 4 4 202 10009 01_060204 Web Based Management Interface User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Interactive Switch Image NETGEAR 24 2 L3 Managed Switch with PoE 1 3 13 15 17 19 a 23 FSM 7326p a 16 SE KMA KEE ciat P pwr 2 4 o 1 TE 39 Figure 4 6 Interactive switch image This dynamic image shows various real time conditions about the switch including the status fan operation power and the connectivity and traffic indication for each port In addition using the popup menus described below you can directly access a wealth of information by right clicking on a port and selecting a menu item from the popup menu that displays Menus The Web based interface enables navigation through several menus The main navigation menu is on the left of every page and contains the screens that let you access all the commands and Statistics the switch provides Web Based Management Interface 4 5 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software pa System H Management as System 2 P Information 2 amp Message Log e E Event Log E Switch Stats 5 Switch Summary SCH Utilities Eg Access Eg Security j Ge PoE SC Switch Eg Routing SC Traffic Management Ea Smart Wizard Figure 4 7 Menu navigation
244. iority This command configures the default 802 1p port priority assigned for untagged packets for a specific interface The range for the priority is 0 7 Default 0 Format vlan priority lt priority gt Mode Interface Config LAG Port Channel 802 3ad Commands port channel staticcapability This command enables the support of port channels static link aggregations LAGs on the device By default the static capability for all port channels is disabled Default Disabled Format port channel staticcapability Mode Global Config no port channel staticcapability This command disables the support of static port channels link aggregations LAGs on the device Default Disabled Format no port channel staticcapability Mode Global Config show port channel brief This command displays the static capability of all port channels LAGs on the device as well as a summary of individual port channels Format show port channel brief Mode Privileged EXEC and User EXEC Switching Commands 8 17 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Static Capability This field displays whether or not the device has static capability enabled For each port channel the following information is displayed Name This field displays the name of the port channel Link State This field indicates whether the link is up or down Mbr Ports This field lists the ports that are members of this port
245. ipaddr gt is the IP Address of the interface The value for lt subnetmask gt is a 4 digit dotted decimal number which represents the Subnet Mask of the interface This changes the label IP address in show ip interface Format ip address lt ipaddr gt lt subnetmask gt Mode Interface Config no ip address This command deletes an IP address from an interface The value for lt ipaddr gt is the IP Address of the interface The value for lt subnetmask gt is a 4 digit dotted decimal number which represents the Subnet Mask of the interface Format no ip address lt ipaddr gt lt subnetmask gt Mode Interface Config 9 20 Routing Commands 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software ip ecmpmode This command enables ECMP mode on the router Default Disabled Format ip ecmpmode Mode Global Config no ip ecmpmode This command disables ECMP mode on the router Format no ip ecmpmode Mode Global Config ip forwarding This command enables forwarding of IP frames Default Enabled Format ip forwarding Mode Global Config no ip forwarding This command disables forwarding of IP frames Format no ip forwarding Mode Global Config ip irdp This command enables Router Discovery on an interface Default Enabled Format ip irdp Mode Interface Config Routing Commands 9 21 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Softw
246. is the address of one of the switch s physical interfaces the system s own MAC address Switching Commands 8 13 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software GMRP Learned The value of the corresponding was learned via GMRP and applies to Multicast Other The value of the corresponding instance does not fall into one of the other categories show msglog This command displays the message log maintained by the switch The message log contains system trace information The trap log contains a maximum of 256 entries that wrap Format show msglog Mode Privileged EXEC Message The message that has been logged Note Message log information is not retained across a switch reset show running config This command is used to display the current setting of different protocol packages supported on switch This command displays only those parameters the values of which differ from default value The output is displayed in the script format which can be used to configure another switch with same configuration Format show running config Mode Privileged EXEC show sysinfo This command displays switch information Format show sysinfo Mode Privileged EXEC Switch Description Text used to identify this switch System Name Name used to identify the switch System Location Text used to identify the location of the switch May be up to 31 alpha numeric characters The factory
247. istration for the same attribute in order to maintain uninterrupted service There is an instance of this timer on a per Port per GARP participant basis Permissible values are 20 to 600 centiseconds 0 2 to 6 0 seconds The factory default is 60 centiseconds 0 6 seconds The finest granularity of specification is 1 centisecond 0 01 sec onds This Leave All Time controls how frequently LeaveAll PDUs are generated A LeaveAll PDU indicates that all registrations will shortly be deregistered Participants will need to rejoin in order to maintain registration There is an instance of this timer on a per Switching Commands 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Port GMRP Mode Port GVRP Mode Port per GARP participant basis The Leave All Period Timer is set to a random value in the range of LeaveAllTime to 1 5 LeaveAllTime Permissible values are 200 to 6000 centisec onds 2 to 60 seconds The factory default is 1000 centiseconds 10 seconds The finest granularity of specification is 1 centisec ond 0 01 seconds Indicates the GMRP administrative mode for the port It may be enabled or disabled If this parameter is disabled Join Time Leave Time and Leave All Time have no effect The factory default is disabled Indicates the GVRP administrative mode for the port It may be enabled or disabled If this parameter is disabled Join Time Leave Time and Leave All
248. itch Software no dot1x timeout This command sets the value in seconds of the timer used by the authenticator state machine on this port to the default values Depending on the token used the corresponding default values are set Format no dot1x timeout reauth period quiet period tx period supp timeout server timeout Mode Interface Config dot1x user This command adds the specified user to the list of users with access to the specified port or all ports The lt user gt parameter must be a configured user Format dot1x user user lt slot port gt all Mode Global Config no dot1x user This command removes the user from the list of users with access to the specified port or all ports Format no dot1x user user lt slot port gt all Mode Global Config radius accounting mode This command is used to enable the RADIUS accounting function Default Disabled Format radius accounting mode Mode Global Config no radius accounting mode This command is used to set the RADIUS accounting function to the default value i e the RADIUS accounting function is disabled Format no radius accounting mode Mode Global Config Switching Commands 8 101 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software radius server host This command is used to configure the RADIUS authentication and accounting server If the auth token is used the command configures the
249. ived from this server on the accounting port and dropped for some other reason Switching Commands 8 105 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software show authentication This command displays the ordered authentication methods for all authentication login lists Format Mode show authentication Privileged EXEC Authentication Login List This displays the authentication login listname Method 1 Method 2 Method 3 This displays the first method in the specified authentication login list if any This displays the second method in the specified authentication login list if any This displays the third method in the specified authentication login list if any show authentication users This command displays information about the users assigned to the specified authentication login list If the login is assigned to non configured users the user default will appear in the user column Format Mode User Component show dot1x show authentication users lt listname gt Privileged EXEC This field displays the user assigned to the specified authentica tion login list This field displays the component User or 802 1x for which the authentication login list is assigned This command is used to show a summary of the global dot1x configuration summary information of the dot1x configuration for a specified port or all ports the detailed dot1x con
250. ivileged EXEC clear counters This command clears the stats for a specified lt slot port gt or for all the ports or for the entire switch based upon the argument Format clear counters lt slot port gt all Mode Privileged EXEC clear igmpsnooping This command clears the tables managed by the IGMP Snooping function and will attempt to delete these entries from the Multicast Forwarding Database Format clear igmpsnooping Mode Privileged EXEC clear pass This command resets all user passwords to the factory defaults without powering off the switch You are prompted to confirm that the password reset should proceed Format clear pass Mode Privileged EXEC clear port channel This command clears all port channels LAGs Format clear port channel Mode Privileged EXEC clear traplog This command clears the trap log Format clear traplog Mode Privileged EXEC Switching Commands 8 113 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software clear vlan This command resets VLAN configuration parameters to the factory defaults Format clear vlan Mode Privileged EXEC copy This command uploads and downloads to from the switch Local URLs can be specified using tftp or xmodem The following can be specified as the source file for uploading from the switch startup config nvram startup config error log nvram errorlog message log nvram msglog and trap log nvram t
251. kestatic This command changes a dynamically created VLAN one that is created by GVRP registration to a static VLAN one that is permanently configured and defined The ID is a valid VLAN identification number VLAN range is 2 4094 Format vlan makestatic lt 2 4094 gt Mode VLAN database vlan name This command changes the name of a VLAN The name is an alphanumeric string of up to 16 characters and the ID is a valid VLAN identification number ID range is 1 4094 Default The name for VLAN ID 1 is always Default The name for other VLANs is defaulted to a blank string Format vlan name 2 4094 name Mode VLAN database no vlan name This command sets the name of a VLAN to a blank string The VLAN ID is a valid VLAN identification number ID range is 1 4094 Format no vlan name 2 4094 Mode VLAN database vlan participation This command configures the degree of participation for a specific interface in a VLAN The ID is a valid VLAN identification number and the interface is a valid interface number 8 72 Switching Commands 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Format vlan participation exclude include auto lt 1 4094 gt Mode Interface Config Participation options are include The interface is always a member of this VLAN This is equiva lent to registration fixed exclude The interface is never a member of this VLAN This is equivalen
252. l LSAs entries that can be stored in the link state database This command displays information about the area The lt areaid gt identifies the OSPF area that is being displayed Format Mode ArealD Aging Interval External Routing show ip ospf area lt areaid gt Privileged EXEC and User EXEC Is the area id of the requested OSPF area Is a number representing the aging interval for this area Is a number representing the external routing capabilities for this area Authentication Type ls the configured authentication type to use for this area Spf Runs Is the number of times that the intra area route table has been cal culated using this area s link state database Area Border Router Count The total number of area border routers reachable within this Area LSA Count Area LSA Checksum Stub Mode Import Summary LSAs Metric Value Metric Type area Total number of link state advertisements in this area s link state database excluding AS External LSA s A number representing the Area LSA Checksum for the specified AreaID excluding the external LS type 5 link state advertise ments Represents whether the specified Area is a stub area or not The possible values are enabled and disabled This is a configured value Is a number representing the Metric Value for the specified area Is the Default Metric Type for the specified Area Routing Commands 9 41 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the N
253. l for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Neighbor Events External LSA Count The number of times this neighbor relationship has changed state or an error has occurred The number of external LS type 5 link state advertisements in the link state database LSAs Received The number of LSAs received Originate New LSAs The number of LSAs originated show ip ospf neighbor This command displays the OSPF neighbor table list When a particular neighbor ID is specified detailed information about a neighbor is given The information below will only be displayed if OSPF is enabled and the interface has a neighbor The IP address is the IP address of the neighbor Format Mode Interface Router Id Options Router Priority State show ip ospf neighbor lt ipaddr gt lt slot port gt Privileged EXEC and User EXEC Is the slot port identifying the internal interface number of the OSPF neighbor Is a 4 digit dotted decimal number identifying neighbor router An integer value that indicates the optional OSPF capabilities supported by the neighbor The neighbor s optional OSPF capa bilities are also listed in its Hello packets This enables received Hello Packets to be rejected 1 e neighbor relationships will not even start to form if there is a mismatch in certain crucial OSPF capabilities Displays the OSPF priority for the specified interface The prior ity of an interface is a priority integer
254. l for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software ip dhcp pool This command configures a DHCP address pool name on a DHCP server and enters DHCP pool configuration mode Default None Format ip dhcp pool lt name gt Mode Global Config Mode no ip dhcp pool This command removes the DHCP address pool The name should be previously configured pool name Format no ip dhcp pool lt name gt Mode Global Config Mode lease This command configures the duration of the lease for an IP address that is assigned from a DHCP server to a DHCP client The overall lease time should be between 1 86400 minutes If infinite is specified lease is set for 60 days Days is an integer from 0 to 59 Hours is an integer from 0 to 1339 Minutes is an integer from 0 to 86399 Default 1 day Format lease lt days gt hours minutes infinite Mode DHCP Pool Config no lease This command restores the default value of the lease time for DHCP Server Format no lease Mode DHCP Pool Config DHCP Server Commands 12 5 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software network This command is used to configure the subnet number and mask for a DHCP address pool on the server Network number is a valid IP address made up of four decimal bytes ranging from 0 to 255 IP address 0 0 0 0 is invalid Mask is the IP subnet mask for the specified address pool The prefix length is an integer fro
255. l mode is not auto an error will be returned Format dot1x re authenticate lt slot port gt Mode Privileged EXEC dot1x re authentication This command enables re authentication of the supplicant for the specified port Default Disabled Format dot1x re authentication Mode Interface Config no dot1x re authentication This command disables re authentication of the supplicant for the specified port Format no dot1x re authentication Mode Interface Config dot1x system auth control This command is used to enable the dot1x authentication support on the switch By default the authentication support is disabled While disabled the dot1x configuration is retained and can be changed but is not activated Default Disabled Format dot1x system auth control Mode Global Config no dot1x system auth control This command is used to disable the dot1x authentication support on the switch Format no dot1x system auth control Switching Commands 8 99 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Mode Global Config dot1x timeout This command sets the value in seconds of the timer used by the authenticator state machine on this port Depending on the token used and the value in seconds passed various timeout configurable parameters are set The following tokens are supported reauth period Sets the value in seconds of the timer used by the authenticator state machine on thi
256. lass instance within this pol icy Class Name The name of this class instance In Offered Octets Packets A count of the octets packets offered to this class instance before the defined DiffServ treatment is applied Only displayed for the in direction In Discarded Octets Packets A count of the octets packets discarded for this class instance for any reason due to DiffServ treatment of the traffic class Only displayed for the in direction Tail Dropped Octets Packets A count of the octets packets discarded due to tail dropping from a transmission queue typically due to the effects of traffic shaping These counts may not be supported on all platforms Only displayed for the out direction Random Dropped Octets Packets A count of the octets packets discarded due to WRED active queue depth management typically due to the effects of traffic shaping These counts are only applicable for a class instance whose policy attributes includes random dropping and may not be supported on all platforms Only displayed for the out direction Shape Delayed Octets Packets A count of the octets packets that were delayed due to traffic shaping These counts are only applicable for a class instance whose policy attributes includes shaping and may not be supported on all platforms Only displayed for the out direction Sent Octets Packets A count of the octets packets forwarded for this class instance after the defined DiffServ treatment was applie
257. le 13 2 IS CLI Mapping continued CLI Command Package 7300 Series L3 Switch Command Mode Syntax QOS config acl rule action lt aclid gt lt rulenum gt lt permit deny gt QOS config acl rule match dstip lt aclid gt lt rulenum gt lt ipaddr gt lt ipmask gt QOS config acl rule match dstl4port keyword lt aclid gt lt rulenum gt lt portkey gt QOS config acl rule match dstl4port range lt aclid gt lt rulenum gt lt startport gt lt endport gt QOS config acl rule match every lt aclid gt lt rulenum gt lt true false gt QOS config acl rule match ipdscp lt aclid gt lt rulenum gt lt dscpval gt QOS config acl rule match ipprecedence lt aclid gt lt rulenum gt lt precedenceval gt QOS config acl rule match iptos lt aclid gt lt rulenum gt lt tosbits gt lt tosmask gt QOS config acl rule match protocol keyword lt aclid gt lt rulenum gt lt protocolkey gt QOS config acl rule match protocol number lt aclid gt lt rulenum gt lt protocolnum gt QOS config acl rule match srcip lt aclid gt lt rulenum gt lt ipaddr gt lt ipmask gt QOS config acl rule match srcl4port keyword lt aclid gt lt rulenum gt lt portkey gt A 2 IS CLI Mapping 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Table 13 2 IS CLI Mapping continued CLI Command Package 7300 Series L3 Switch Comman
258. leen 1 2 E e E rn 1 2 Features of the HTML Version of this Manual eese 1 3 HOYTS PROL MEA rr PUDE aao US tres n eR dE Rod SUE Ru duds 1 4 Chapter 2 Switch Management Overview ica eM 2 1 Switch Management OYVervieW Me 2 1 Chapter 3 Administration Console Telnet Interface Set Up Your Switch Using Direct Console Access A 3 1 Chapter 4 Web Based Management Interface Web Based Management OVOlviBW siii secca tete ug a Eden 4 1 How to Log In to the Managed SORA crisis 4 2 Web Based Management Utility Features eeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeneee eee 4 4 DVS ACUI IMAGE EE 4 5 Man I e ETT 4 6 ce rci d iP aes 4 7 Manageme eee M 4 7 SU io dd 4 7 E E 4 8 HES 3r MS a A AA A AA AAA ASA 4 8 E AA A 4 8 System Wide Popup MENUS estaran 4 8 Contents v 202 10009 01_060204 Port Specifie Popup Metis sires cut rates sscarsteasvacsnaastaganntenniagnindtnd ax hu a EE Chapter 5 Command Line Interface Structure pomi A Rb n GE emanates 5 1 COMME ys EES n E TE 5 2 Conventions em eee eee TTE GES GER D GE GER THES 5 3 Aaa nterne RR PUR ann EERE eile 5 4 Chapter 6 Quick Start up eee li A O 6 1 System Info and System Setup a inert Quick Start up Software Version D SOEN DICAM NEM MM t Quick Start up Physical Port Dala iiic eer akon se ix dad 6 2 Quick Start up User Account Management BE ENG Siarl up IP ARABES o
259. lick the help or the question mark to read the help menu The help menu contains e Web Based Management Introduction to the Web management features Web Based Management Interface 4 1 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software e Device Management Introduction of the basic icons and management of the device e Interface Operations Describes Web browser requirements and common commands e Product Overview Describes supported SNMP and Web management features e Summary of Features Feature List How to Log In to the Managed Switch The NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch can be configured remotely from Microsoft Internet Explorer browser version 5 0 or above or Netscape Navigator web browser version 4 78 or above 1 Determine the IP address of your managed switch 2 Opena Web browser such as Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator 3 Loginto the managed switch using whatever IP address the unit is currently configured with Use the default user name of admin and default of no password or whatever LAN address and password you have set up http 192 168 0 1 K Figure 4 2 7300 IP address in browser address bar A login window opens N ETG EAR 7 FSM7326P 24 2 L3 Managed Switch with POE Figure 4 3 Login splash screen for the Managed Switch 4 2 Web Based Management Interface 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series La
260. lnet Interface 3 3 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software 3 4 Administration Console Telnet Interface 202 10009 01_060204 Chapter 4 Web Based Management Interface Your NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch provides a built in browser interface that lets you configure and manage it remotely using a standard Web browser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer 5 0 or later or Netscape Navigator 6 0 or later This interface also allows for system monitoring and management of the switch The help page covers many of the basic functions and features of the switch and it s web interface When you configure the switch for the first time from the console you can assign an IP address and subnet mask to the switch Thereafter you can access the switch s Web interface directly using your Web browser by entering the switch s IP address into the address bar In this way you can use your Web browser to manage the switch from a central location just as if you were directly connected to the switch s console port Figure 4 1 shows this management method NETGEAR 7000 Series Managed Switch PC UNIX Workstation Macintosh Terminal Figure 4 1 Web Management Method Web Based Management Overview The menu options available are System Management Switch Routing Traffic Management and Smart Wizard There is a help menu in the top of right side of screen you can c
261. lt 0 44 12 95 1 Optional 0 44 3 84 2 Optional 3 84 6 49 3 Optional 6 49 12 95 4 Not Allowed Reserved Output The Output field reports the power supplied to the powered device in watts Limit The LIMIT field is the preset limit defined by the config poe port limit command This value is stated in watts Status The Status field reports the state of power supplied to the associated port Possible values are e Disabled the POE function is disabled on this port e Searching the port is detecting POE device Delivering Power the port is providing power to POE device e Fault the POE device is not IEEE compliance no power is provided e Test the port is in testing state e Other Fault the port has experience problems other than compliance issue When a port begins to deliver power there will be a trap indicating so When a port stops delivering power there will be a trap indicating so 13 4 FSM7326P Power Over Ethernet Commands 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software show poe This command displays the total power available and the total power consumed in the system Format show poe Mode Privilege FSM7326P Power Over Ethernet Commands 13 5 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software 13 6 FSM7326P Power Over Ethernet Commands 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 730
262. m the fdbid all parameter is required In an SVL system the fdbid all parameter is not used and will be ignored if entered Default all Format show forwardingdb agetime fdbid all Mode Privileged EXEC Forwarding DB ID Fdbid Forwarding database ID indicates the forwarding data base whose aging timeout is to be shown The all option is used to display the aging timeouts associated with all forwarding data bases This field displays the forwarding database ID in an IVL system This field will not be displayed in an SVL system Switching Commands 8 23 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Agetime Displays the address aging timeout for the associated forwarding database in IVL In an SVL system this will display the system s address aging timeout value in seconds show network This command displays configuration settings associated with the switch s network interface The network interface is the logical interface used for in band connectivity with the switch via any of the switch s front panel ports The configuration parameters associated with the switch s network interface do not affect the configuration of the front panel ports through which traffic is switched or routed Format show network Mode Privileged EXEC and User EXEC IP Address The IP address of the interface The factory default value is 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask The IP subnet mask for this interf
263. m 0 to 32 Default None Format network networknumber mask prefixlength Mode DHCP Pool Config no network This command removes the subnet number and mask Format no network Mode DHCP Pool Config service dhcp This command enables the DHCP server and relay agent features on the router Default Disabled Format service dhcp Mode Global Config no service dhcp This command disables the DHCP server and relay agent features Format no service dhcp Mode Global Config DHCP Server Show Commands These commands display the DHCP Server address bindings and statistics 12 6 DHCP Server Commands 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software show ip dhcp binding This command displays address bindings for the specific IP address on the DHCP server If no IP address is specified the bindings corresponding to all the addresses are displayed Format Mode IP address Hardware Address Lease expiration Type show ip dhcp binding address Privileged EXEC and User EXEC The IP address of the client The MAC Address or the client identifier The lease expiration time of the IP Address assigned to the client The manner in which IP Address was assigned to the client show ip dhcp global configuration This command displays address bindings for the specific IP address on the DHCP server If no IP address is specified the bindings corresponding to all the ad
264. mand Default None Format match class map lt refclassname gt Mode Class Map Config CLI Commands Differentiated Services 10 5 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Restrictions The class types of both lt classname gt and lt refclassname gt must be identical 1 e any vs any or all vs all A class type of acl is not supported by this command Cannot specify refclassname the same as lt classname gt 1 e self referencing of class name not allowed At most one other class may be referenced by a class Any attempt to delete the re c1assname class while still refer enced by any lt classname gt shall fail The combined match criteria of lt classname gt and refclass name must be an allowed combination based on the class type Any subsequent changes to the lt refclassname gt class match cri teria must maintain this validity or the change attempt shall fail The total number of class rules formed by the complete reference class chain includes both predecessor and successor classes must not exceed a platform specific maximum In some cases each removal of a refclass rule reduces the maxi mum number of available rules in the class definition by one no match class map This command removes from the specified class definition the set of match conditions defined for another class The lt refclassname gt is the name of an existing DiffServ class
265. mand Mode based Topology Routing Config dhcp pool To exit to Global Configuration mode enter exit To return to user EXEC mode enter ctrl Z The CLI tree is built on a mode concept where the commands are available according to the interface Some of the modes are depicted in the mode based CLI Figure 1 Mode based CLI 202 10009 01_060204 7 3 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software User Exec cdmmands are also accgssible in Privileged Exec mode Return to Exec prompt I I I I I I I I i Privileged Global Config Circuit Config Router Config FIGURE 1 Mode based CLI Access to all commands in the Privileged Exec mode and below are restricted through a password 7 4 Mode based CLI 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Mode based Command Hierarchy The CLI is divided into various modes The Commands in one mode are not available until the operator switches to that particular mode with the exception of the User Exec mode commands The User Exec mode commands may also be executed in the Privileged Exec mode The commands available to the operator at any point in time depend upon the mode Entering a question mark at the CLI prompt displays a list of the available commands and descriptions of the commands The CLI provides the following mod
266. me field of the router advertisement sent from the interface in seconds Displays the preference of the address as a default router address relative to other router addresses on the same subnet This command displays information relevant to the OSPF router This command takes no options Format Mode Router ID show ip ospf Privileged EXEC and User EXEC Is a 32 bit integer in dotted decimal format identifying the router about which information is displayed This is a configured value Routing Commands 9 39 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software OSPF Admin Mode ASBR Mode The administrative mode of OSPF in the router This is a config ured value Reflects whether the ASBR mode is enabled or disabled Enable implies that the router is an autonomous system border router Router automatically becomes an ASBR when it is configured to redistribute routes learnt from other protocol The possible values for the ASBR status is enabled if the router is configured to re distribute routes learnt by other protocols or disabled if the router is not configured for the same RFC 1583 Compatibility Reflects whether 1583 compatibility is enabled or disabled This Default metric Source Metric value Match value Type value Tag value Subnets Distribute list Default info originate is a configured value RDefault value for redistributed routes Source protocol ro
267. meout value for active sessions does not become effective until the session is reaccessed Any keystroke will also activate the new timeout duration Default 5 Format no remotecon timeout Mode Privileged EXEC serial baudrate This command specifies the communication rate of the terminal interface The supported rates are 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 Default 9600 Format serial baudrate 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 Mode Line Config no serial baudrate This command sets the communication rate of the terminal interface to 9600 Format no serial baudrate Mode Line Config 8 22 Switching Commands 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software serial timeout This command specifies the maximum connect time in minutes without console activity A value of 0 indicates that a console can be connected indefinitely The time range is 0 to 160 Default 5 Format serial timeout 0 160 Mode Line Config no serial timeout This command sets the maximum connect time in minutes without console activity to 5 Format no serial timeout Mode Line Config set prompt This command changes the name of the prompt The length of name may be up to 64 alphanumeric characters Format set prompt prompt string gt Mode privileged EXEC show forwardingdb agetime This command displays the timeout for address aging In an IVL syste
268. meter in the command then the message conveys to the operator an invalid input was detected The layout of the output is depicted below exec show arpp brief A Invalid input detected at marker FIGURE 2 Syntax Error Message After all the mandatory parameters are entered any additional parameters entered are treated as optional parameters If any of the parameters are not recognized a syntax error message will be displayed 2 After the command is successfully parsed and validated the control of execution goes to the corresponding CLI callback function 3 For mandatory parameters the command tree extends till the mandatory parameters make the leaf of the branch The callback function is only invoked when all the mandatory parameters are provided For optional parameters the command tree extends till the mandatory parameters and the optional parameters make the leaf of the branch However the call back function is associated with the node where the mandatory parameters are fetched The call back function then takes care of the optional parameters Mode based CLI 7 7 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software 4 Once the control has reached the callback function the callback function has complete information about the parameters entered by the operator No Form of a Command No is a specific form of an existing command and does not represent a new o
269. ministration Console Management Method Set Up Your Switch Using Direct Console Access The direct access management method is required when you initially set up your switch Thereafter the convenience and additional features of the Web management access method make it the best method to manage the switch See Web Based Management Overview on page 4 1 for more information Direct access to the switch console is achieved by connecting the switch s console port to a VT 100 or compatible terminal or to a PC Apple Macintosh or UNIX workstation equipped with a terminal emulation program This connection is made using the null modem cable supplied with the switch Administration Console Telnet Interface 3 1 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Examples of terminal emulation programs include e HyperTerminal which is included with Microsoft Windows operating systems e Zlerm for the Apple Macintosh e TIP for UNIX workstations This example describes how to set up the connection using a HyperTerminal on a PC but other systems follow similar steps 1 Click the Windows Start button Select Accessories and then Communications HyperTerminal should be one of the options listed in this menu Select HyperTerminal 2 The following screen will appear Enter a name for this connection In the example below the name of the connection is F5M726 Click OK ETTTITTUTNESEENESS ai
270. mmands configure the DHCP Server parameters and address pools client identifier This command specifies the unique identifier for a DHCP client Unique identifier is a valid notation in hexadecimal format Default None Format client identifier lt uniqueidentifier gt Mode DHCP Pool Config Mode no client identifier This command deletes the client identifier Format no client identifier Mode DHCP Pool Config Mode client name This command specifies the name for a DHCP client Name is a string consisting of standard ASCII characters Default None Format client name lt name gt Mode DHCP Pool Config Mode no client name This command removes the client name DHCP Server Commands 12 1 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Format no client name Mode DHCP Pool Config Mode default router This command specifies the default router list for a DHCP client address1 address2 address8 are valid IP addresses each made up of four decimal bytes ranging from 0 to 255 IP address 0 0 0 0 is invalid Default None Format default router lt addressl gt lt address2 gt lt address8 gt Mode DHCP Pool Config no default router This command removes the default router list Format no default router Mode DHCP Pool Config dns server This command specifies the IP servers available to a DHCP client address1 address2 address8 are valid IP addresses each m
271. n mode value for the virtual router configured on a specified interface Default Enabled Format no ip vrrp vrID preempt Mode Interface Config ip vrrp priority This command sets the priority value for the virtual router configured on a specified interface The priority of the interface is a priority integer from 1 to 254 The parameter vrID is the virtual router ID which has an integer value ranges from 1 to 255 Default 100 Format ip vrrp lt vrID gt priority 1 254 Mode Interface Config Routing Commands 9 59 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software no ip vrrp priority This command sets the default priority value for the virtual router configured on a specified interface Format no ip vrrp lt vrID gt priority Mode Interface Config ip vrrp timers advertise This command sets the advertisement value for a virtual router The value for advinterval is time used for VRRP advertisement in seconds The parameter lt vrID gt is the virtual router ID which has an integer value range from 1 to 255 Default 1 Format ip vrrp lt vrID gt timers advertise lt 1 255 gt Mode Interface Config no ip vrrp timers advertise This command sets the default advertisement value for a virtual router Format no ip vrrp lt vrID gt timers advertise Mode Interface Config 9 60 Routing Commands 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Manage
272. nabled See snmp server enable traps linkmode command Format snmp trap link status Mode Interface Config no snmp trap link status This command disables link status traps by interface Note This command is valid only when the Link Up Down Flag is enabled See snmp server enable traps linkmode command Format no snmp trap link status 8 66 Switching Commands 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Mode Interface Config snmp trap link status all This command enables link status traps for all interfaces Note This command is valid only when the Link Up Down Flag is enabled see snmp server enable traps linkmode Format snmp trap link status all Mode Global Config no snmp trap link status all This command disables link status traps for all interfaces Note This command is valid only when the Link Up Down Flag is enabled see snmp server enable traps linkmode Format no snmp trap link status all Mode Global Config spanning tree This command sets the STP mode for a specific port channel LAG This is the value specified for STP Mode on the Port Configuration Menu 802 1D mode is the default The interface is a logical slot and port for a configured port channel The a11 option sets all configured port channels LAGs with the same option Format spanning tree logical slot port all off 802 1d fast Mode Global Config
273. nders this measurement very important if too much energy is reflected back on to the receiver the device does not perform optimally Cabling Guidelines B 5 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Unlike IOBASE T and 100BASE TX which use only two of the four pairs of wires within the Category 5 1000B ASE T uses all four pairs of the twisted pair Make sure all wires are tested this is important Factors that affect the return loss are The number of transition points as there is a connection via an RJ 45 to another connector a patch panel or device at each transition point Removing the jacket that surrounds the four pairs of twisted cable It is highly recommended that when RJ 45 connections are made this is minimized to 1 1 4 inch 32 mm Untwisting any pair of the twisted pair cabling It is important that any untwisting be minimized to 3 8 inch 10 mm for RJ 45 connections Cabling or bundling of multiple Category 5 cables This is regulated by ANSI EIA TIA 568A 3 If not correctly implemented this can adversely affect all cabling parameters Near End Cross Talk NEXT This is a measure of the signal coupling from one wire to another within a cable assembly or among cables within a bundle NEXT measures the amount of cross talk disturbance energy that is detected at the near end of the link the end where the transmitter is located NEXT measures the amou
274. ng Commands 8 3 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Packets Received Without Error The total number of packets including broadcast pack ets and multicast packets received by the processor Broadcast Packets Received The total number of packets received that were directed to the broadcast address Note that this does not include multicast packets Packets Received With Error The number of inbound packets that contained errors pre venting them from being deliverable to a higher layer protocol Packets Transmitted Without Error The total number of packets transmitted out of the interface Broadcast Packets Transmitted The total number of packets that higher level protocols requested to be transmitted to the Broadcast address including those that were discarded or not sent Transmit Packet Errors The number of outbound packets that could not be transmitted because of errors Address Entries Currently In Use The total number of Forwarding Database Address Table entries now active on the switch including learned and static entries VLAN Entries Currently In Use The number of VLAN entries presently occupying the VLAN table Time Since Counters Last Cleared The elapsed time in days hours minutes and sec onds since the statistics for this switch were last cleared show interface ethernet This command displays detailed statistics for a specific port or for all CPU traf
275. ng Guidelines B 3 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Figure 13 2 illustrates crossover twisted pair cable Key B Normal or MDI X port as on a hub or switch 1 2 3 6 Pin numbers Figure 13 2 Crossover Twisted Pair Cable Patch Panels and Cables If you are using patch panels make sure that they meet the 1OOBASE TX requirements Use Category 5 UTP cable for all patch cables and work area cables to ensure that your UTP patch cable rating meets or exceeds the distribution cable rating To wire patch panels you need two Category 5 UTP cables with an RJ 45 plug at each end as shown here Key 5525 1 1 RJ 45 plug 2 Category 5 UTP patch cable Figure 13 3 Category 5 UTP Cable with Male RJ 45 Plug at Each End B 4 Cabling Guidelines 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Note Flat silver satin telephone cable may have the same RJ 45 plug However using telephone cable results in excessive collisions causing the attached port to be partitioned or disconnected from the network Using 1000BASE T Gigabit Ethernet over Category 5 Cable When using the new 1000BASE T standard the limitations of cable installations and the steps necessary to ensure optimum performance must be considered The most important components in your cabling system are patch panel connections twists of the pairs a
276. ng this match condition for the class i e match all IP Precedence values except for what is specified here The lt tosmask gt denotes the bit positions in lt tosbits gt that are used for comparison against the IP TOS field in a packet For example to check for an IP TOS value having bits 7 and 5 set and bit 1 clear where bit 7 is most significant use a lt tosbits gt value of a0 hex and a tosmask of a2 hex Note The ip dscp ip precedence and ip tos match conditions are alternative ways to specify a match criterion for the same Service Type field in the IP header but with a slightly different user notation Note In essence this the free form version of the IP DSCP Precedence TOS match specification in that the user has complete control of specifying which bits of the IP Service Type field are checked Default None Format match not ip tos lt tosbits gt lt tosmask gt Mode Class Map Config match protocol This command adds to the specified class definition a match condition based on the value of the IP Protocol field in a packet using a single keyword notation or a numeric value notation To specify the match condition using a single keyword notation the value for protocol name is one of the supported protocol name keywords The currently supported values are icmp igmp ip tcp udp Note that a value of ip is interpreted to match all protocol number values To specify the match condition using a numeric v
277. ng timeout is being configured All is used to con figure all forwarding database s agetime In an SVL system the fdbid all parameter is not used and will be ignored if entered mtu This command sets the maximum transmission unit MTU size in bytes for physical and port channel LAG interfaces For the standard implementation the range of mtusize is a valid integer between 1522 9216 Default 1522 Format mtu 1522 9216 Mode Interface Config no mtu This command sets the default maximum transmission unit MTU size in bytes for the interface Format no mtu Mode Interface Config network javamode This command specifies whether or not the switch should allow access to the Java applet in the header frame of the Web interface When access is enabled the Java applet can be viewed from the Web interface When access is disabled the user cannot view the Java applet Default Enabled Format network javamode Mode Privileged EXEC no network javamode This command disallows access to the Java applet in the header frame of the Web interface When access is disabled the user cannot view the Java applet Switching Commands 8 19 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Format no network javamode Mode Privileged EXEC network mac address This command sets locally administered MAC addresses The following rules apply e Bit 6 of byte O called the U L bit
278. ng tree The lt slot port gt is the desired switch port The following details are displayed on execution of the command Format show spanning tree interface lt slot port gt Mode Privileged EXEC and User EXEC Port mode Enabled or disabled Port Up Time Since Counters Last Cleared Time since port was reset displayed in days hours minutes and seconds STP BPDUs Transmitted Spanning Tree Protocol Bridge Protocol Data Units sent STP BPDUs Received Spanning Tree Protocol Bridge Protocol Data Units received RST BPDUs Transmitted Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Bridge Protocol Data Units sent RST BPDUs Received Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Bridge Protocol Data Units received MSTP BPDUs Transmitted Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Bridge Protocol Data Units sent MSTP BPDUs Received Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Bridge Protocol Data Units received show spanning tree mst detailed This command displays settings and parameters for the specified multiple spanning tree instance The instance lt mstid gt is a number that corresponds to the desired existing multiple spanning tree instance ID The following details are displayed Format show spanning tree mst detailed lt mstid gt Mode Privileged EXEC and User EXEC MST Instance ID MST Bridge Priority Time Since Topology Change in seconds Topology Change Count Number of times the topology has changed for this multiple spanning tree instance Topology Change in Progress Value of
279. no ip rip receive version Config Routing config router rip interface version Interface ip rip send version rip1 riptc rip2 send lt slot port gt lt rip1 riptc rip2 Config none none gt Interface no ip rip send version Config Routing config router ospf virtif create Router area lt areaid gt virtual link areaid neighbor OSPF lt neighborid gt authentication none Config simple lt key gt encrypt key lt keyid gt hello interval lt 1 65535 gt retransmit interval lt 0 3600 gt transmit delay lt 0 3600 gt dead interval lt 1 65535 gt Routing config router ospf virtif interval transdelay lt areaid gt lt neighbor gt lt 0 3600 gt Routing config router ospf virtif authentication lt areaid gt lt neighbor gt lt none simple gt key A 18 IS CLI Mapping 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Table 13 2 IS CLI Mapping continued CLI Command Package 7300 Series L3 Switch Command Mode Syntax Routing config router ospf virtif interval dead lt areaid gt lt neighbor gt lt 1 65535 gt Routing config router ospf virtif interval hello lt areaid gt lt neighbor gt lt 1 65535 gt Routing config router ospf virtif interval retransmit lt areaid gt lt neighbor gt lt 0 3600 gt Routing config router ospf virtif delete Router no area lt areaid gt virtual link
280. not be contiguous The optional not parameter has the effect of negating this match condition for the class i e match all destination IP addresses except for what is specified here Default None Format match not dstip lt ipaddr gt lt ipmask gt Mode Class Map Config match dstl4port This command adds to the specified class definition a match condition based on the destination layer 4 port of a packet using a single keyword or numeric notation or a numeric range notation To specify the match condition as a single keyword the value for lt portkey gt is one of the supported port name keywords The currently supported lt portkey gt values are domain echo ftp ftpdata http smtp snmp telnet tftp www Each of these translates into its equivalent port number which is used as both the start and end of a port range To specify the match condition using a numeric notation one layer 4 port number is required The port number is an integer from 0 to 65535 To specify the match condition using a numeric range notation two layer 4 port numbers are required and together they specify a contiguous port range Each port number is an integer from 0 to 65535 but with the added requirement that the second number be equal to or greater than the first The optional not parameter has the effect of negating this match condition for the class 1 e match all destination layer 4 port numbers except for the one specified here Default N
281. nt of energy that is returned to the sender end The factors that affect NEXT and cross talk are exactly the same as outlined in the Return Loss section The cross talk performance is directly related to the quality of the cable installation Patch Cables When installing your equipment replace old patch panel cables that do not meet Category 5e specifications As pointed out in the NEXT section this near end piece of cable is critical for successful operation RJ 45 Plug and RJ 45 Connectors In a Fast Ethernet network it is important that all 100B ASE T certified Category 5 cabling use RJ 45 plugs The RJ 45 plug accepts 4 pair UTP or shielded twisted pair STP 100 ohm cable and connects into the RJ 45 connector The RJ 45 connector is used to connect stations hubs and switches through UTP cable it supports 10 Mbps 100 Mbps or 1000 Mbps data transmission B 6 Cabling Guidelines 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Figure 13 4 shows the RJ 45 plug and RJ 45 connector BE Ser eeng 8 1 Key 1 to 8 pin numbers Figure 13 4 RJ 45 Plug and RJ 45 Connector with Built in LEDs Table 13 1 lists the pin assignments for the 10 100 Mbps RJ 45 plug and the RJ 45 connector Table 13 1 10 100 Mbps RJ 45 Plug and RJ 45 Connector Pin Assignments PIN NORMAL ASSIGNMENT ON UPLINK ASSIGNMENT ON PORTS 1 TO 8 PORT 8 1 Input Receive Data Outp
282. nterfacemode all Config Global no set gvrp interfacemode all Config Switching config garp jointimer lt slot port all gt Interface set garp timer join 10 100 10 100 Config Interface no set garp timer join Config Global set garp timer join all 10 100 Config Global no set garp timer join all Config Switching config garp leavetimer slot port Interface set garp timer leave 20 600 all gt 20 600 Config Interface no set garp timer leave Config Global set garp timer leave all 20 600 Config Global no set garp timer leave all Config A 40 IS CLI Mapping 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Table 13 2 IS CLI Mapping continued CLI Command Package 7300 Series L3 Switch Command Mode Syntax Switching config garp leavealltimer lt slot port Interface set garp timer leaveall 200 6000 all gt 200 600 Config Interface no set garp timer leaveall Config Global set garp timer leaveall all 200 6000 Config Global no set garp timer leaveall all Config Switching config igmpsnooping adminmode Global set igmp lt enable disable gt Config Global no set igmp Config Switching config igmpsnooping Global set igmp groupmembershipinterval groupmembershipinterval Config lt 2 3600 gt lt 1 3600 gt Global no set igmp Config groupmembershipinterval Switching config igmpsnooping maxresponse Global set igm
283. nual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software no snmp server community ipaddr This command sets a client IP address for an SNMP community to 0 0 0 0 The name is the applicable community name Format no snmp server community ipaddr lt name gt Mode Global Config snmp server community ipmask This command sets a client IP mask for an SNMP community The address is the associated community SNMP packet sending address and is used along with the client IP address value to denote a range of IP addresses from which SNMP clients may use that community to access the device A value of 255 255 255 255 will allow access from only one station and will use that machine s IP address for the client IP Address A value of 0 0 0 0 will allow access from any IP address The name is the applicable community name Default 0 0 0 0 Format snmp server community ipmask lt ipmask gt lt name gt Mode Global Config no snmp server community ipmask This command sets a client IP mask for an SNMP community to 0 0 0 0 The name is the applicable community name The community name may be up to 16 alphanumeric characters Format no snmp server community ipmask lt name gt Mode Global Config snmp server community mode This command activates an SNMP community If a community is enabled an SNMP manager associated with this community manages the switch according to its access right If the community is disabled no SNMP requests using
284. number of packets including bad packets received that were between 128 and 255 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets Packets Received 256 511 Octets The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 256 and 511 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets Packets Received 512 1023 Octets The total number of pack ets including bad packets received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets Packets Received 1024 1518 Octets The total number of pack ets including bad packets received that were between 1024 and 1518 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets Packets Received 1519 1522 Octets The total number of pack ets including bad packets received that were between 1519 and 1522 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets Packets Received gt 1522 Octets The total number of packets received that were longer than 1522 octets excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and were otherwise well formed Packets Received Successfully Total The total number of packets received that were without errors Switching Commands 8 5 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Unicast Packets Received The number of subnetwork uni
285. o an interface in a particular direction Note The bandwidth kbps and percent commands are alternative ways to specify the same bandwidth policy attribute Note This command is only supported for GSM7324 and GSM7312 Format bandwidth percent 1 100 Mode Policy Class Map Config Restrictions The sum of the committed information rate values for all band width and expedite commands defined within a policy must not exceed the available link bandwidth of the interface to which that policy is assigned Violation of this requirement shall prevent successful attachment of a policy to the interface or shall cause this command to fail if the policy is already in service on one or more interfaces Policy Type Out Incompatibilities Expedite all forms class This command creates an instance of a class definition within the specified policy for the purpose of defining treatment of the traffic class through subsequent policy attribute statements The classname is the name of an existing DiffServ class Note that this command causes the specified policy to create a reference to the class definition CLI Commands Differentiated Services 10 13 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Note The CLI mode is changed to Policy Class Map Config when this command is successfully executed Format class lt classname gt Mode Policy Map Config no class This command deletes the instance
286. o highlight special messages Note This format is used to highlight information of importance or special interest This manual is written for the 7300 Series L3 Switch according to these specifications Table 1 1 Manual Specifications Product Version NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Manual Publication Date June 2004 Note Product updates are available on the NETGEAR Inc Web site at http www netgear com support main asp Documentation updates are available on the NETGEAR Inc Web site at http www netgear com docs About This Guide 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Features of the HTML Version of this Manual The HTML version of this manual includes these features SUCCES Index Search Favorites E Chapter 1 Introduction Ee r Chapter 2 Basic Setup QA Chapter 3 Configuration g Understanding the Configuration Options Using Configuration Profiles Connectto an Access Point in Infrastru How to Configure an Connecting to Another PC in Ad hoc Mode Infrastructure Mode Profile Enabling Wireless Security Features Appendix A Technical Specifications Appendix B Wireless Networking Basics Appendix C Preparing Your PCs for Network 42 Glossary Follow the instructions below to configure an infrastructure mode profile for connecting to an access point Figure Preface 2 HT
287. o its segment Unicast Packets Transmitted The total number of packets that higher level protocols requested be transmitted to a subnetwork unicast address including those that were discarded or not sent Multicast Packets Transmitted The total number of packets that higher level protocols requested be transmitted to a Multicast address including those that were discarded or not sent 8 8 Switching Commands 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Transmit Errors Transmit Discards Protocol Statistics Broadcast Packets Transmitted The total number of packets that higher level protocols requested be transmitted to the Broad cast address including those that were discarded or not sent Total Errors The sum of Single Multiple and Excessive Colli sions Tx FCS Errors The total number of packets transmitted that had a length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets of between 64 and 1518 octets inclusive but had a bad Frame Check Sequence FCS with an integral number of octets Oversized The total number of frames that exceeded the max permitted frame size This counter has a max increment rate of 815 counts per sec at 10 Mb s Underrun Errors The total number of frames discarded because the transmit FIFO buffer became empty during frame transmission Total Discards The sum of single collision frames discarded multiple collision fram
288. of network traffic resources according to desired priorities of service The policy decision point might be a network server controlled directly by the network administrator who enters policy statements about which kinds of traffic voice bulk data video teleconferencing and so forth should get the highest priority The policy enforcement points might be router or layer 3 switches that implement the policy choices as traffic moves through the network Currently COPS is designed for use with the Resource Reservation Protocol RSVP which lets you allocate traffic priorities in advance for temporary high bandwidth requirements for example video broadcasts or multicasts It is possible that COPS will be extended to be a general policy communications protocol COPS See Common Open Policy Service Protocol on page 5 D DHCP See Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol on page 6 Differentiated Services Diffserv is a protocol for specifying and controlling network traffic by class so that certain types of traffic get precedence for example voice traffic which requires a relatively uninterrupted flow of data might get precedence over other kinds of traffic Differentiated Services is the most advanced method for managing traffic in terms of what is called Class of Service CoS Unlike the earlier mechanisms of 802 1P tagging and Type of Service ToS Differentiated Services avoids simple priority tagging and depends on more compl
289. oftware set igmp This command enables IGMP Snooping on the system The default value is disable Note The IGMP application supports the following e Global configuration or per interface configuration Per VLAN configuration is unsupported in the IGMP snooping application e Validation of the IP header checksum as well as the IGMP header checksum and discarding of the frame upon checksum error Maintenance of the forwarding table entries based on the MAC address versus the IP address e Flooding of unregistered multicast data packets to all ports in the VLAN Format set igmp Mode Global Config no set igmp This command disables IGMP Snooping on the system Format no set igmp Mode Global Config set igmp This command enables IGMP Snooping on a selected interface If an interface which has IGMP Snooping enabled is enabled for routing or is enlisted as a member of a port channel LAG IGMP Snooping functionality will be disabled on that interface IGMP Snooping functionality will subsequently be re enabled if routing is disabled or port channel LAG membership is removed from an interface that has IGMP Snooping enabled Default Disabled Format set igmp Mode Interface Config no set igmp This command disables IGMP Snooping on a selected interface Format no set igmp Mode Interface Config Switching Commands 8 51 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software
290. ol to redistribute routes from the specified source protocol routers Format no redistribute ospf bgp static connected metric match internal external 1 external 2 nssa external 1 nssa external 2 Mode Router RIP Config router id This command sets a 4 digit dotted decimal number uniquely identifying the router ospf id The lt ipaddress gt is a configured value Format router id lt ipaddress gt Mode Router OSPF Config routing This command enables routing for an interface 9 34 Routing Commands 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software The current value for this function is displayed under show ip interface labeled as Routing Mode Default Disabled Format routing Mode Interface Config no routing This command disables routing for an interface The current value for this function is displayed under show ip interface labeled as Routing Mode Format no routing Mode Interface Config show arp This command displays the Address Resolution Protocol ARP cache The displayed results are not the total ARP entries To view the total ARP entries the operator should view the show arp results in conjunction with the show arp switch results Format show arp Mode Privileged EXEC Age Time seconds Is the time it takes for an ARP entry to age out This value was configured into the unit Age time is measured in seconds Response Time s
291. ommands ici sessi RA 8 17 port channel staticcapability 8 17 no port channel staticcapability show port channel brief Management Commands pidde Agng IME coc EE i no Dunda aging Lu eec ES Ee Uu EE 8 19 network javamode nas Preso pd don iuum pce Lace esis EE 8 19 E ate IS Fe PUVA AS stas eege network mac type See isis SE T Saiten Geen 8 20 aa A aaa E aa aaa OE ati 8 20 MONON EE AE EE 8 20 DRT BEOLOOBI EE 8 21 lut EE 8 21 no remotecon maxsessions deceo 8 21 Contents vii 202 10009 01 060204 NO Le E A EE 8 22 serial timeout Ho Sera I I CL ado DE 8 23 show forwardingdb agetime A 8 24 EAA O ege 8 25 show serial en show SAMP MIURA 25acue coc get te aui ees SES eem nr Com GMMR EE o t Oo a E BEDS AE A Eege Ee simp server COMU ees La ENSERES MIU 2 docere id Eed a ee iv ra er Do ERR 29 somp serwer community Padi MUN NG snmp server communiy Padat sisi ies no snmp server community ipmask snimp server community ModE cioe nte seid begeestert tese eee sese no snmp server community mode OO snmp server enable traps no snmp server enable TADS ecce ceciibe cuiu blocs undi ces dup ene Eana snmp server enable traps bcaststorm 1 5 em rr ore tira ee kal eee ose nk t or d no snmp server enable traps bcaststorm 73A snmp server enable traps linkmode OOOO
292. ompt Config class In this mode the operator is allowed to access the router OSPF configuration commands The command prompt at this level is Config router ospf Command Prompt Config router In this mode the operator is allowed to access the router RIP con figuration commands The command prompt at this level is Config router rip Command Prompt Config router DHCP Pool Configuration Mode Use the ip dhcp pool lt pool name gt command to access the DHCP Pool Config Mode 7 6 Mode based CLI 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Config ip dhcp pool lt pool name gt Command Prompt Config dhcp pool Flow of Operation This section captures the flow of operation for the CLI 1 The operator logs into the CLI session and enters the User Exec mode In the User Exec mode the exec gt prompt is displayed on the screen The parsing process is initiated whenever the operator types a command and presses lt ENTER gt The command tree is searched for the command of interest If the command is not found the output message indicates where the offending entry begins For instance command node A has the command show arp brief but the operator attempts to execute the command show arpp brief then the output message would be exec gt show arpp brief Invalid input detected at marker If the operator has given an invalid input para
293. on Format Mode show storm control Privileged EXEC Broadcast Storm Recovery Mode May be enabled or disabled The factory default is disabled 802 3x Flow Control Mode May be enabled or disabled The factory default is disabled show vian This command displays detailed information including interface information for a specific VLAN Format Mode VLAN ID VLAN Name VLAN Type slot port Current show vlan lt vlanid gt where the ID is a valid VLAN identifica tion number Privileged EXEC and User EXEC There is a VLAN Identifier VID associated with each VLAN The range of the VLAN ID is 1 to 4094 A string associated with this VLAN as a convenience It can be up to 16 alphanumeric characters long including blanks The default is blank VLAN ID 1 always has a name of Default This field is optional Type of VLAN which can be Default WLAN ID 1 a static one that is configured and permanently defined or Dynamic one that is created by GVRP registration Indicates by slot id and port number which port is controlled by the fields on this line It is possible to set the parameters for all ports by using the selectors on the top line Determines the degree of participation of this port in this VLAN The permissible values are Include This port is always a member of this VLAN This is equivalent to registration fixed in the IEEE 802 1Q standard Switching Commands 8 63 202 10009 01 060
294. one CLI Commanas Differentiated Services 10 7 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Format match not dstl4port lt portkey gt 0 65535 lt 0 65535 gt Mode Class Map Config match ip dscp This command adds to the specified class definition a match condition based on the value of the IP DiffServ Code Point DSCP field in a packet which is defined as the high order six bits of the Service Type octet in the IP header the low order two bits are not checked The optional not parameter has the effect of negating this match condition for the class i e match all IP DSCP values except for what is specified here The lt dscpval gt value is specified as either an integer from 0 to 63 or symbolically through one of the following keywords af11 af12 af13 af21 af22 af23 af31 af32 af33 af41 af42 af43 be cet csl cs2 cs3 cs4 cs5 cs6 cs7 ef Note The ip dscp ip precedence and ip tos match conditions are alternative ways to specify a match criterion for the same Service Type field in the IP header but with a slightly different user notation Note To specify a match on all DSCP values use the match not ip tos lt tosbits gt lt tosmask gt command with lt tosbits gt set to 0 and lt tosmask gt set to 03 hex Default None Format match not ip dscp dscpval Mode Class Map Config match ip precedence This command adds to the specified
295. onfig set garp timer leaveall all This command sets how frequently Leave All PDUs are generated for all ports A Leave All PDU indicates that all registrations will be unregistered Participants would need to rejoin in order to maintain registration The value applies per port and per GARP participation The time may range from 200 to 6000 centiseconds Note This command has an effect only when GVRP is enabled Default 1000 centiseconds 10 seconds Format set garp timer leaveall all lt 200 6000 gt Mode Global Config Switching Commands 8 47 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software no set garp timer leaveall all This command sets how frequently Leave All PDUs are generated for all ports to 1000 centiseconds 10 seconds Note This command has an effect only when GVRP is enabled Format no set garp timer leaveall all Mode Global Config set gmrp adminmode This command enables GARP Multicast Registration Protocol GMRP on the system The default value is disable Format set gmrp adminmode Mode Privileged EXEC no set gmrp adminmode This command disables GARP Multicast Registration Protocol GMRP on the system Format no set gmrp adminmode Mode Privileged EXEC set gmrp interfacemode This command enables GARP Multicast Registration Protocol on a selected interface If an interface which has GARP enabled is enabled for routing or is enlisted as a member of
296. onfig diffserv policy police style Policy Cla police single rate lt 1 4294967295 gt singlerate lt policyname gt ss Map lt 1 128 gt lt 1 128 gt conform action lt classname gt lt 1 4294967295 gt Config drop set prec transmit lt 0 7 gt 1 128 1 128 set dscp transmit 0 63 transmit exceed action drop set prec transmit 0 7 set dscp transmit 0 63 transmit violate action drop set prec transmit 0 7 set dscp transmit 0 63 transmit QOS config diffserv policy police style Policy Cla police two rate lt 1 4294967295 gt tworate lt policyname gt ss Map 1 128 lt 1 4294967295 gt 1 128 classname lt 1 4294967295 gt Config conform action drop 1 128 lt 1 4294967295 gt 1 128 set prec transmit 0 7 set dscp transmit 0 63 transmit exceed action drop set prec transmit 0 7 set dscp transmit 0 63 transmit violate action drop set prec transmit 0 7 set dscp transmit 0 63 transmit QOS config diffserv policy mark ipdscp Policy Cla lt policyname gt lt class name gt ss Map lt 0 63 gt Config QOS config diffserv policy mark Policy Cla ipprecedence lt policyname gt ss Map lt classname gt lt 0 7 gt Config QOS config diffserv policy police action Policy Cla conform markdscp lt policyname gt ss Map lt classname gt lt dscpval gt Config IS CLI Mapping A 5 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Se
297. oping Privileged EXEC This indicates whether or not IGMP Snooping is active on the switch This displays the IGMP Query Interval Time This is the amount of time a switch will wait for a report for a particular group on a particular interface before it sends a query on that interface This value may be configured 8 56 Switching Commands 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Max Response Time This displays the amount of time the switch will wait after send ing a query on an interface because it did not receive a report for a particular group on that interface This value may be configured Multicast Router Present Expiration Time Ifa query is not received on an interface within this amount of time the interface is removed from the list of interfaces with multicast routers attached This value may be configured Interfaces Enabled for IGMP Snooping This is the list of interfaces on which IGMP Snooping is enabled The following status values are only displayed when IGMP Snooping is enabled Multicast Control Frame Count This displays the number of multicast control frames that are processed by the CPU show mac address table gmrp This command displays the GARP Multicast Registration Protocol GMRP entries in the Multicast Forwarding Database MFDB table Format show mac address table gmrp Mode Privileged EXEC Mac Address A unicast MAC address for which the swit
298. or Format no area lt areaid gt virtual link neighbor retransmit interval Mode Router OSPF Config area virtual link transmit delay This command configures the transmit delay for the OSPF virtual interface on the virtual interface identified by lt areaid gt and neighbor The neighbor parameter is the IP address of the neighbor The range for seconds is 0 to 3600 1 hour Default 1 Format area lt areaid gt virtual link neighbor transmit delay 0 3600 Mode Router OSPF Config no area virtual link transmit delay This command configures the default transmit delay for the OSPF virtual interface on the virtual interface identified by lt areaid gt and neighbor The neighbor parameter is the IP address of the neighbor no area areaid virtual link nei or transmit Format id vi l link ighb i delay Mode Router OSPF Config arp This command creates an ARP entry The value for lt ipaddress gt is the IP address of a device on a subnet attached to an existing routing interface lt macaddr gt is a unicast MAC address for that device 9 8 Routing Commands 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software The format is 6 two digit hexadecimal numbers that are separated by colons for example 00 06 29 32 81 40 Format arp lt ipaddress gt lt macaddr gt Mode Global Config no arp This command deletes an ARP entry The value for lt ar
299. ordance with the IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Specification Default Admit All Format vlan port acceptframe all vlanonly all Mode Global Config no vian port acceptframe all This command sets the frame acceptance mode for all interfaces to Admit All For Admit All mode untagged frames or priority frames received on this interface are accepted and assigned the value of the interface VLAN ID for this port With either option VLAN tagged frames are forwarded in accordance with the IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Specification Format no vlan port acceptframe all vlanonly all Mode Global Config vlan port ingressfilter all This command enables ingress filtering for all ports If ingress filtering is disabled frames received with VLAN IDs that do not match the VLAN membership of the receiving interface are admitted and forwarded to ports that are members of that VLAN Default Disabled Format vlan port ingressfilter all Mode Global Config no vlan port ingressfilter all This command disables ingress filtering for all ports If ingress filtering is disabled frames received with VLAN IDs that do not match the VLAN membership of the receiving interface are admitted and forwarded to ports that are members of that VLAN Format no vlan port ingressfilter all Mode Global Config 8 74 Switching Commands 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software vian port pvid all This command changes the VLAN ID fo
300. orm and nonconform The conforming data rate is specified in kilobits per second Kbps and is an integer from 1 to 4294967295 The conforming burst size is specified in kilobytes KB and is an integer from 1 to 128 For each outcome the only possible actions are drop set dscp transmit set prec transmit or transmit In this simple form of the police command the conform action defaults to transmit and the violate action defaults to drop These actions can be set with this command once the style has been configured For set dscp transmit a lt dsepval gt value is required and is specified as either an integer from 0 to 63 or symbolically through one of the following keywords af11 af12 af13 af21 af22 af23 af31 af32 af33 af41 af42 af43 be cet cs1 cs2 cs3 cs4 cs5 Cep cs7 ef For set prec transmit an IP Precedence value is required and is specified as an integer from 0 7 Format police simple lt 1 4294967295 gt 1 128 conform action drop set prec transmit 0 7 set dscp transmit 0 63 transmit violate action drop set prec transmit 0 7 set dscp transmit 0 63 trans mit Mode Policy Class Map Config Restrictions Only one style of police command simple singlerate tworate is allowed for a given class instance in a particular policy Policy Type In Incompatibilities Mark IP DSCP Mark IP Precedence Service Commands The service command set is used in DiffServ to define
301. ort The only possible value is 1 corresponding to the first version of the dot1x specifi cation PAE Capabilities The port access entity PAE functionality of this port Possible values are Authenticator or Supplicant Authenticator PAE State Current state of the authenticator PAE state machine Possible values are Initialize Disconnected Connecting Authenticating Authenticated Aborting Held ForceAuthorized and ForceUn authorized Backend Authentication State Current state of the backend authentication state machine Possible values are Request Response Success Fail Timeout Idle and Initialize Quiet Period The timer used by the authenticator state machine on this port to define periods of time in which it will not attempt to acquire a supplicant The value is expressed in seconds and will be in the range 0 and 65535 Switching Commands 8 107 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Transmit Period The timer used by the authenticator state machine on the speci fied port to determine when to send an EAPOL EAP Request Identity frame to the supplicant The value is expressed in sec onds and will be in the range of 1 and 65535 Supplicant Timeout The timer used by the authenticator state machine on this port to timeout the supplicant The value is expressed in seconds and will be in the range of 1 and 65535 Server Timeout The timer used by the authenticator
302. ort mode all This command sets the Administrative Switch Port State for all ports to disabled Format no spanning tree port mode all Mode Global Config User Account Management Commands These commands manage user accounts 8 90 Switching Commands 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software disconnect This command closes a telnet session Format disconnect lt sessionID gt all Mode Privileged EXEC show loginsession This command displays current telnet and serial port connections to the switch Format show loginsession Mode Privileged EXEC ID Login Session ID User Name The name the user will use to login using the serial port or Telnet A new user may be added to the switch by entering a name in a blank entry The user name may be up to 8 characters and is not case sensitive Two users are included as the factory default admin and guest Connection From IP address of the telnet client machine or EIA 232 for the serial port connection Idle Time Time this session has been idle Session Time Total time this session has been connected show users This command displays the configured user names and their settings This command is only available for users with readwrite privileges The SNMPv3 fields will only be displayed if SNMP is available on the system Format show users Mode Privileged EXEC User Name The name the user will use to login usin
303. p configuration for the specified interface show spanning tree mst summary This command displays summary information about all multiple spanning tree instances in the switch On execution the following details are displayed Format show spanning tree mst summary Mode Privileged EXEC and User EXEC MST Instance ID List List of multiple spanning trees IDs currently configured For each MSTID Associated FIDs List of forwarding database identifiers associated with this instance Associated VLANs List of VLAN IDs associated with this instance show spanning tree summary This command displays spanning tree settings and parameters for the switch The following details are displayed on execution of the command Format show spanning tree summary Mode Privileged EXEC and User EXEC Spanning Tree Adminmode Enabled or disabled Spanning Tree Version Version of 802 1 currently supported IEEE 802 1s IEEE 802 1w or IEEE 802 1d based upon the Force Protocol Version parame ter Configuration Name TConfigured name Configuration Revision Level Configured value 8 82 Switching Commands 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Configuration Digest Key Calculated value Configuration Format Selector Configured value MST Instances List of all multiple spanning tree instances configured on the switch show spanning tree vian This command displays the association between a VLAN
304. p maxadvertinterval This command configures the default maximum time in seconds Format no ip irdp maxadvertinterval Mode Interface Config ip irdp minadvertinterval This command configures the minimum time in seconds allowed between sending router advertisements from the interface The range for minadvertinterval is 3 to the value of maxadvertinterval Default 0 75 maxadvertinterval Format ip irdp minadvertinterval lt 3 maxadvertinterval gt Mode Interface Config no ip irdp minadvertinterval This command configures thedefault minimum time in seconds Format no ip irdp minadvertinterval Mode Interface Config ip irdp preference This command configures the preferability of the address as a default router address relative to other router addresses on the same subnet The range is 2147483648 to 1 to 0 to 1 to 2147483647 Default 0 Routing Commands 9 23 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Format ip irdp preference lt 2147483648 2147483647 gt Mode Interface Config no ip irdp preference This command configures the default preferability of the address as a default router address relative to other router addresses on the same subnet Format no ip irdp preference Mode Interface Config ip netdirbcast This command enables the forwarding of network directed broadcasts When enabled network directed broadcasts are forwarded When disabled t
305. p maxresponse lt 1 3599 gt lt 1 3600 gt Config Global no set igmp maxresponse Config Switching config igmpsnooping Global set igmp mcrtexpiretime lt 0 3600 gt mcrtexpiretime lt 0 3600 gt Config Global no set igmp mcrtexpiretime Config Switching config igmpsnooping Interface set igmp interfacemode lt slot port all gt Config lt enable disable gt Interface no set igmp Config IS CLI Mapping 202 10009 01_060204 A 41 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Table 13 2 IS CLI Mapping continued CLI Command Package 7300 Series L3 Switch Command Mode Syntax Global set igmp interfacemode all Config Switching config mirroring delete Global no set igmp interfacemode all Config Switching config mirroring create lt slot port gt Global monitor session source lt slot port gt lt slot port gt Config destination lt slot port gt Global no monitor session Config Switching config mirroring mode lt enable Global monitor session mode disable gt Config Global no monitor session mode Config Security config authentication login create Global authentication login lt listname gt lt listname gt Config method1 method2 method3 Security config authentication login set Global listname lt local radius reject gt Config local radius reject local radius reject Security config authentication login delete Global no a
306. p ospi IntelTace EE 9 44 show ip ospf neighbor suis sabe See 9 45 show ip ospi neighbor Brief casei orta ee c anao acd ep E SHON R aep ranga ina EE show ip ospf stub table ds pots 9 47 Contents 202 10009 01 060204 show Wr ospi VIRUS TE e show ip SOT virtual link i acia m m 9 48 show ip rip G 9 48 Show ip ap Menace DIET eme DT 9 49 cie EN show ip ELE O EI EE 9 51 show ip route preferences G t 9 51 SHON SRI dee AE ql chc ONE m P TEN esp centu bet esee Go a show router rip interface dies 9 52 E 9 53 show ip vrrp interface e e Show ID VHPCIDUS OC DIST ee E e rM TERR DOR LR EPOR OT OU UR RP RAP RR 9 54 E EE 9 55 l Ee WE 9 56 ics n E ibi ecc tm UM EE no teaptiags iras 9 56 CRDI AA a 9 56 na VAT FOU ebe ebe ante Oe ed 9 57 Ms A So 9 57 ip vrrp authentication pange honis 9 57 G p vrp UT uris EC Je TE Setup EE n ip vie usus G Ge 9 58 jor plas rem 9 58 no ip WAV Ife IMG fm T E rit Oe ex eder due EE 9 58 no ip vrrp preempt Huici 9 59 PUEDEN aM T S A ER ip vrrp timers advertise
307. pentry gt is the IP address of the interface The value for lt ipaddress gt is the IP address of a device on a subnet attached to an existing routing interface lt macaddr gt is a unicast MAC address for that device Format no arp lt ipaddress gt lt macaddr gt Mode Global Config arp cachesize This command configures the ARP cache size The value for lt cachesize gt is a platform specific integer value Format arp cachesize lt Platform specific integer value gt Mode Global Config no arp cachesize This command configures the default ARP cache size Format no arp cachesize Mode Global Config arp dynamicrenew This command enables ARP component to automatically renew ARP entries of type dynamic when they age out Format arp dynamicrenew Mode Privileged Exec Routing Commands 9 9 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software no arp dynamicrenew This command disables ARP component from automatically renewing ARP entries of type dynamic when they age out Format no arp dynamicrenew Mode Privileged Exec arp purge This command causes the specified IP address to be removed from the ARP cache Only entries of type dynamic or gateway are affected by this command Format arp purge lt ipaddr gt Mode Privileged EXEC arp resptime This command configures the ARP request response timeout The value for lt seconds gt is a valid positive integer which re
308. presents the IP ARP entry response timeout time in seconds The range for lt seconds gt is between 1 10 seconds Default l Format arp resptime lt 1 10 gt Mode Global Config no arp resptime This command configures the default ARP request response timeout Format no arp resptime Mode Global Config arp retries This command configures the ARP count of maximum request for retries The value for lt retries gt is an integer which represents the maximum number of request for retries The range for lt retries gt is an integer between 0 10 retries 9 10 Routing Commands 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Default 4 Format arp retries lt 0 10 gt Mode Global Config no arp retries This command configures the default ARP count of maximum request for retries Format no arp retries Mode Global Config arp timeout This command configures the ARP entry ageout time The value for lt seconds gt is a valid positive integer which represents the IP ARP entry ageout time in seconds The range for lt seconds gt is between 15 21600 seconds Default 1200 Format arp timeout lt 15 21600 gt Mode Global Config no arp timeout This command configures the default ARP entry ageout time Format no arp timeout Mode Global Config auto summary This command enables the RIP auto summarization mode Default Enabled Format auto summary Mode Router RIP Config
309. protocol that is the standard implementation of STP Spanning Tree Protocol It uses the STP algorithm to insure that physical loops in the network topology do not result in logical looping of network traffic Using one bridge configured as root for reference the BPDU switches one of two bridges forming a network loop into standby mode so that only one side of a potential loop passes traffic By examining frequent 802 1d configuration updates a bridge in the standby mode can switch automatically into the forward mode if the other bridge forming the loop fails Broadcast A packet sent to all devices on a network Broadcast storm Multiple simultaneous broadcasts that typically absorb all the available network bandwidth and can cause a network to fail Broadcast storms can be due to faulty network devices or network loops C Cat 5 Category 5 unshielded twisted pair UTP cabling An Ethernet network operating at 10 Mbits second LOBASE T will often tolerate low quality cables but at 100 Mbits second 1OBASE Tx the cable must be rated as Category 5 or Cat 5 or Cat V by the Electronic Industry Association EIA This rating will be printed on the cable jacket Cat 5 cable contains eight conductors arranged in four twisted pairs and terminated with an RJ45 type connector In addition there are restrictions on maximum cable length for both 10 and 100 Mbits second networks Capacity planning Determining whether current solutions can
310. purged as well Format clear arp cache gateway Mode Privileged Exec default information originate OSPF This command is used to control the advertisement of default routes Default value for metric unspecified Default value fortype 2 Format default information originate always metric 0 16777215 gt metric type 1 2 Mode Router OSPF Config no default information originate OSPF This command is used to control the advertisement of default routes Format no default information originate metric metric typel 9 14 Routing Commands 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Mode Router OSPF Config default information originate RIP This command is used to control the advertisement of default routes Format default information originate Mode Router RIP Config no default information originate RIP This command is used to control the advertisement of default routes Format no default information originate Mode Router RIP Config default metric OSPF This command is used to set a default for the metric of distributed routes Format default metric 1 16777215 Mode Router OSPF Config no default metric OSPF This command is used to set a default for the metric of distributed routes Format no default metric Mode Router OSPF Config default metric RIP This command is used to set a default for the metric of distributed
311. r a packet to be considered a member of the class The class type of match access group indicates the individual class match criteria are evaluated based on an access list ACL The lt aclid gt parameter is an integer specifying an existing ACL number refer to the appropriate ACL documentation for the valid ACL number range A match access group class type copies its set of match criteria from the current rule definition of the specified ACL number All elements of a single ACL Rule are treated by DiffServ as a grouped set similar to class type all For any class at least one class match condition must be specified for the class to be considered valid Note The class match conditions are obtained from the referenced access list at the time of class creation Thus any subsequent changes to the referenced ACL definition do not affect the DiffServ class To pick up the latest ACL definition the DiffServ class must be deleted and re created This command may be used without specifying a class type to enter the Class Map Config mode for an existing DiffServ class Note The CLI mode is changed to Class Map Config when this command is successfully executed Format class map match all classmapname Mode Global Config no class map This command eliminates an existing DiffServ class The lt classname gt is the name of an existing DiffServ class Note The class name default is reserved and is not allowed here 10 4 CL
312. r all interface Default 1 Format vlan port pvid all lt 1 4094 gt Mode Global Config no vian port pvid all This command sets the VLAN ID for all interfaces to 1 Format no vlan port pvid all lt 1 4094 gt Mode Global Config vlan port tagging all This command configures the tagging behavior for all interfaces in a VLAN to enabled If tagging is enabled traffic is transmitted as tagged frames If tagging is disabled traffic is transmitted as untagged frames The ID is a valid VLAN identification number Format vlan port tagging all 1 4094 Mode Global Config no vlan port tagging all This command configures the tagging behavior for all interfaces in a VLAN to disabled If tagging is disabled traffic is transmitted as untagged frames The ID is a valid VLAN identification number Format no vlan port tagging all 1 4094 Mode Global Config vlan protocol group This command adds protocol based VLAN group to the system The lt groupName gt is a character string of 1 to 16 characters When it is created the protocol group will be assigned a unique number that will be used to identify the group in subsequent commands Format vlan protocol group groupname Switching Commands 8 75 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Mode Global Config vlan protocol group add protocol This command adds the protocol to the protocol based VLAN identified by
313. r distinct command Only the configuration commands are available in the no form The behavior and the support details of the no form is captured as part of the mapping sheets The mapping sheets are contained in the Appendix A IS CLI Mapping section Support for No Form Almost every configuration command has a no form In general use the no form to reverse the action of a command or reset a value back to the default For example the no shutdown interface configuration command reverses the shutdown of an interface Use the command without the keyword no to re enable a disabled feature or to enable a feature that is disabled by default Behavior of Command Help The no form is treated as a specific form of an existing command and does not represent a new or distinct command This implies that the behavior of the and help text is the same for the no form e The help message is the same for all forms of the command The help string may be augmented with details about the no form behavior e For the no config interface and no config inte cases of the the options displayed are identical to the case when the no token is not specified 7 8 Mode based CLI 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Chapter 8 Switching Commands This chapter provides detailed explanation of the Switching commands The commands are divided into fi
314. r microcode Additional Packages This displays the additional packages that are incorporated into this system such as 7300 Series L3 Switch BGP 4 or 7300 Series L3 Switch Multicast show interface This command displays a summary of statistics for a specific port or a count of all CPU traffic based upon the argument Format show interface lt slot port gt switchport Mode Privileged EXEC The display parameters when the argument is lt slot port gt is as follows Packets Received Without Error The total number of packets including broadcast pack ets and multicast packets received by the processor Packets Received With Error The number of inbound packets that contained errors pre venting them from being deliverable to a higher layer protocol Broadcast Packets Received The total number of packets received that were directed to the broadcast address Note that this does not include multicast packets Packets Transmitted Without Error The total number of packets transmitted out of the interface Transmit Packets Errors The number of outbound packets that could not be transmitted because of errors Collisions Frames The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ether net segment Time Since Counters Last Cleared The elapsed time in days hours minutes and sec onds since the statistics for this port were last cleared The display parameters when the argument is switchport is as follows Switchi
315. rap slot port all gt Interface snmp trap link status enable disable Config IS CLI Mapping A 35 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Table 13 2 IS CLI Mapping continued CLI Command Package 7300 Series L3 Switch Command Mode Syntax Interface no snmp trap link status Config Global snmp trap link status all Config Global no snmp trap link status all Config Switching config port physicalmode slot port Interface speed 100 10 half duplex all gt 100h 100f 10h 10f gt Config full duplex 1000 full duplex Global speed all 100 10 half duplex Config full duplex 1000 full duplex Switching config port lacpmode lt slot port all gt Interface port lacpmode lt enable disable gt Config Interface no port lacomode Config Global port lacpmode all Config Global no port lacpmode all Config Switching config port autoneg lt slot port all gt Interface auto negotiate lt enable disable gt Config Interface no auto negotiate Config Global auto negotiate all Config Global no auto negotiate all Config Switching config lag create name Global port channel name Config Switching config lag addport logical slot Interface addport logical slot port gt port gt lt slot port gt Config A 36 IS CLI Mapping 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 S
316. raplog A URL is specified for the destination The command can also be used to download the startup config or code image by specifying the source as a URL and destination as nvram startup config or system image respectively The command can be used to the save the running config to nvram by specifying the source as system running config and the destination as nvram startup config The command can also be used to download ssh key files as nvram sshkey rsa nvram sshkey rsa2 and nvram sshkey dsa and http secure server certificates as nvram sslpem root nvram sslpem server nvram sslpem dhweak and nvram sslpem dhstrong Default none Format copy nvram startup config url copy nvram errorlog url copy nvram msglog url copy nvram traplog url copy url nvram startup config copy url system image copy system running config nvram startup config copy url nvram sslpem root copy url nvram sslpem server copy url nvram sslpem dhweak copy url nvram sslpem dhstrong copy url nvram sshkey rsal copy url nvram sshkey rsa2 8 114 Switching Commands 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software copy lt url gt nvram sshkey dsa Mode Privileged EXEC logout This command closes the current telnet connection or resets the current serial connection Note Save configuration changes before logging out Format logout Mode Privileged EXEC ping Thi
317. re Table 13 2 IS CLI Mapping continued CLI Command Package 7300 Series L3 Switch Command Mode Syntax Global no snmp server community ipmask Config lt name gt Switching config snmpcommunity mode Global snmp server community mode lt enable disable gt lt name gt Config name Global no snmp server community mode Config lt name gt Switching config snmptrap create lt name gt Global snmptrap lt name gt lt ipaddr gt lt ipaddr gt Config Switching config snmptrap delete lt name gt Global no snmptrap lt name gt lt ipaddr gt lt ipaddr gt Config Switching config snmptrap ipaddr Global snmptrap ipaddr lt name gt lt ipaddrold gt lt ipaddrold gt lt name gt lt ipaddrnew gt Config lt ipaddrnew gt Switching config snmptrap mode lt enable Global snmptrap mode lt name gt lt ipaddr gt disable gt lt name gt lt ipaddr gt Config Global no snmptrap mode lt name gt lt ipaddr gt Config Switching config trapflags authentication Global snmp server enable traps enable disable Config Global no snmp server enable traps Config Switching config trapflags bcaststorm Global snmp server enable traps bcaststorm enable disable Config Global no snmp server enable traps Config bcaststorm Switching config trapflags linkmode lt enable Global snmp server enable traps linkmode disable Config Global no snmp server enable traps Config linkmod
318. reference is 0 to 255 Default Intra 8 Inter 10 Type 1 13 Type 2 150 Format distance ospf intra inter typel type2 lt 0 255 gt Mode Router OSPF Config no distance ospf This command sets the default route preference value of OSPF in the router The type of OSPF can be intra inter type 1 or type 2 Format Format no distance ospf intra inter typel type2 Mode Router OSPF Config distance rip This command sets the route preference value of RIP in the router Lower route preference values are preferred when determining the best route Default 15 Format distance rip lt 0 255 gt Mode Router RIP Config no distance rip This command sets the default route preference value of RIP in the router Format no distance rip Mode Router RIP Config distribute list out This command is used to specify the access list to filter routes received from the source protocol Format distribute list lt 1 199 gt out rip bgp static con nected Mode Router OSPF Config Routing Commands 9 17 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software no distribute list out This command is used to specify the access list to filter routes received from the source protocol Format no distribute list lt 1 199 gt out rip bgp static connected Mode Router OSPF Config distribute list out This command is used to specify the access list to filter routes
319. removes the monitor session port monitoring designation from both the source probe port and the destination monitored port and removes the probe port from all VLANs The port must be manually re added to any desired VLANs Format no monitor session Mode Global Config 8 40 Switching Commands 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software monitor session mode This command configures the monitor session port monitoring mode to enable The probe and monitored ports must be configured before monitor session port monitoring can be enabled If enabled the probe port will monitor all traffic received and transmitted on the physical monitored port It is not necessary to disable port monitoring before modifying the probe and monitored ports Default Disabled Format monitor session mode Mode Global Config no monitor session mode This command sets the monitor session port monitoring mode to disable Format no monitor session mode Mode Global Config port lacpmode This command enables Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP on a port Default Disabled Format port lacpmode Mode Interface Config no port lacpmode This command disables Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP on a port Format no port lacpmode Mode Interface Config port lacpmode all This command enables Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP on all ports Format port lacpmode all Mode Global
320. resents the total number of times virtual router state has changed to MASTER Advertisement Received Represents the total number of VRRP advertisements received by this virtual router Advertisement Interval Errors Represents the total number of VRRP advertisements received for which advertisement interval is different than the configured value for this virtual router Authentication Failure Represents the total number of VRRP packets received that don t pass the authentication check IP TTL errors Represents the total number of VRRP packets received by the vir tual router with IP TTL time to live not equal to 255 Zero Priority Packets Received Represents the total number of VRRP packets received by virtual router with a priority of 0 Zero Priority Packets Sent Represents the total number of VRRP packets sent by the vir tual router with a priority of 0 Invalid Type Packets Received Represents the total number of VRRP packets received by the virtual router with invalid type field Address List Errors Represents the total number of VRRP packets received for which address list does not match the locally configured list for the vir tual router Invalid Authentication Type Represents the total number of VRRP packets received with unknown authentication type Authentication Type Mismatch Represents the total number of VRRP advertisements received for which auth type not equal to locally configured one for this virtual router
321. rface Config mode provides access to Mode based CLI 7 5 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Line Config Mode Policy Map Mode Policy Class Mode Class Map Mode Router Config OSPF Mode Router Config RIP Mode the router interface configuration commands The command prompt at this level is Command Prompt Interface lt slot port gt The resulting prompt for the interface configuration command entered in the Global Configuration mode is shown below Config interface 2 1 nterface 2 1 This mode allows the operator to configure the console interface The operator may configure the interface from the directly con nected console or the virtual terminal used with Telnet The com mand prompt at this level is Command Prompt Line Use the policy map command to access the QoS policy map con figuration mode to configure the QoS policy map Config policy map Command Prompt Config policy map Use the class command to access the QoS policy classmap mode to configure the QoS policy map Config policy map class Command Prompt Config policy classmap This mode consists of class creation deletion and matching com mands The class match commands specify layer 2 layer 3 and general match criteria Use the class map commands to access the QoS class map configuration mode to configure QoS class maps Config class map Command Pr
322. ries Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Table 13 2 IS CLI Mapping continued CLI Command Package 7300 Series L3 Switch Command Mode Syntax QOS config diffserv policy police action Policy Cla conform markprec lt policyname gt ss Map lt classname gt lt 0 7 gt Config QOS config diffserv policy police action Policy Cla conform send lt policyname gt ss Map lt classname gt Config QOS config diffserv policy police action Policy Cla exceed drop lt policyname gt ss Map lt classname gt Config QOS config diffserv policy police action Policy Cla exceed markdscp lt policyname gt ss Map lt classname gt lt dscpval gt Config QOS config diffserv policy police action Policy Cla exceed markprec lt policyname gt ss Map lt classname gt Config QOS config diffser policy police action Policy Cla exceed send lt policyname gt ss Map lt classname gt Config QOS config diffserv policy police action Policy Cla nonconform drop lt policyname gt ss Map lt classname gt Config QOS config diffserv policy police action Policy Cla nonconform markdscp ss Map lt policyname gt lt classname gt Config lt dscpval gt QOS config diffserv policy police action Policy Cla nonconform markprec ss Map lt policyname gt lt classname gt lt 0 7 gt Config QOS config diffserv policy police action Policy Cla nonconform send lt policyname gt ss Map lt classname gt Config QOS config diffserv
323. rity field 802 1P specifies a method for indicating frame priority based on the new fields defined in the 802 1Q VLAN standard 802 1Q VLAN The IEEE protocol designator for Virtual Local Area Network VLAN This standard provides VLAN identification and quality of service QoS levels Four bytes are added to an Ethernet frame to allow eight priority levels QoS and to identify up to 4096 VLANs See VLAN on page 21 for more information 10BASE T The IEEE specification for 10 Mbps Ethernet over Category 3 4 or 5 twisted pair cable 100BASE FX The IEEE specification for 100 Mbps Fast Ethernet over fiber optic cable Glossary C 1 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software 100BASE TX The IEEE specification for 100 Mbps Fast Ethernet over Category 5 twisted pair cable 1000BASE SX The IEEE specification for 1000 Mbps Gigabit Ethernet over fiber optic cable 1000BASE T The IEEE specification for 1000 Mbps Gigabit Ethernet over Category 5 twisted pair cable gain access A ABR See Area Border Router on page 2 Access Control List An ACL is a database that an Operating System uses to track each user s access rights to system objects such as file directories and or files ACL See Access Control List on page 2 Address Resolution Protocol An Internet Protocol that dynamically maps Internet addresses to physical hardware addresses on a LAN
324. routes show ip route bestroutes This command causes the entire route table to be displayed This commands takes no options Format Mode Network Address Subnet Mask Protocol Next Hop Intf Next Hop IP Address show ip route bestroutes Privileged EXEC and User EXEC Is an IP route prefix for the destination Is a mask of the network and host portion of the IP address for the specified interface Tells which protocol added the specified route The possibilities are local static OSPF or RIP The outgoing router interface to use when forwarding traffic to the next destination The outgoing router IP address to use when forwarding traffic to the next router if any in the path toward the destination The next router will always be one of the adjacent neighbors or the IP address of the local interface for a directly attached network Total Number of Routes The total number of routes in the route table 9 50 Routing Commands 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software show ip route entry This command displays detailed information about the route to a specific network to be displayed The value for lt networkaddr gt is a valid IP address Format Mode Network Address Subnet Mask Protocol Next Hop Interface Next Hop IP Address Metric show ip route entry lt networkaddr gt Privileged EXEC and User EXEC Is a valid network address identifying th
325. rroring can be managed locally or remotely An administrator configures port mirroring by assigning a port from which to copy all packets and another port where those packets will be sent A packet bound for or heading away from the first port will be forwarded onto the second port as well The administrator places a protocol analyzer on the port receiving the mirrored data to monitor each segment separately The analyzer captures and evaluates the data without affecting the client on the original port The monitor port may be a port on the same SwitchModule with an attached RMON probe a port on a different SwitchModule in the same hub or the SwitchModule processor Port mirroring can consume significant CPU resources while active Better choices for long term monitoring may include a passive tap like an optical probe or an Ethernet repeater Port monitoring The ability to monitor the traffic passing through a port on a device to analyze network characteristics and perform troubleshooting Port speed The speed that a port on a device uses to communicate with another device or the network Port trunking The ability to combine multiple ports on a device to create a single high bandwidth connection Protocol A set of rules for communication between devices on a network Protocol Data Unit PDU is a packet of data passed across a network The term implies a specific layer of the OSI model and a specific protocol Protocol Independent Multicast
326. rs should be entered The curly braces indicate that a parameter must be chosen from the list of choices Values ipaddr macaddr areaid routerid slot port This parameter is a valid IP address made up of four decimal bytes ranging from 0 to 255 The default for all IP parameters consists of zeros that is 0 0 0 1 The interface IP address of 0 0 0 0 1s invalid In some cases the IP address can also be entered as a 32 bit number The MAC address format is six hexadecimal numbers separated by colons for example 00 06 29 32 81 40 Area IDs may be entered in dotted decimal notation for example 0 0 0 1 An area ID of 0 0 0 0 is reserved for the backbone Area IDs have the same form as IP addresses but are distinct from IP addresses The IP network number of the sub netted network may be used for the area ID The value of router id must be entered in 4 digit dotted deci mal notation for example 0 0 0 1 A router ID of 0 0 0 0 is invalid This parameter denotes a valid slot number and a valid port num ber For example 0 1 represents slot number 0 and port number 1 The lt slot port gt field is composed of a valid slot number and a valid port number separated by a forward slash 5 2 Command Line Interface Structure 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software logical slot port This parameter denotes a logical slot number and logical port
327. rs that manage it with a specified privileged level The length of name can be up to 16 case sensitive characters Note Community names in the SNMP community table must be unique If you make multiple entries using the same community name the first entry is kept and processed and all duplicate entries are ignored Default Two default community names Public and Private You can replace these default community names with unique identifiers for each community The default values for the remaining four community names are blank Format snmp server community lt name gt Mode Global Config no snmp server community This command removes this community name from the table The name is the community name to be deleted Format no snmp server community lt name gt Mode Global Config snmp server community ipaddr This command sets a client IP address for an SNMP community The address is the associated community SNMP packet sending address and is used along with the client IP mask value to denote a range of IP addresses from which SNMP clients may use that community to access the device A value of 0 0 0 0 allows access from any IP address Otherwise this value is ANDed with the mask to determine the range of allowed client IP addresses The name is the applicable community name Default 0 0 0 0 Format snmp server community ipaddr lt ipaddr gt lt name gt Mode Global Config Switching Commands 8 29 202 10009 01_060204 User Ma
328. rt range lt classname gt lt 0 65535 gt lt 0 65535 gt exclude QOS config diffserv class match dstmac Class Ma match destination address mac lt classname gt lt macaddr gt p Config lt address gt lt macmask gt lt mac mask gt exclude Class Ma match not destination address mac p Config address lt macmask gt QOS config diffserv class match ipdscp Class Ma match ip dscp value classname lt dscpval gt exclude p Config Class Ma match not ip dscp value p Config QOS config diffserv class match Class Ma match ip precedence 0 7 ipprecedence lt classname gt 0 7 p Config exclude Class Ma match not ip precedence 0 7 p Config A 8 IS CLI Mapping 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Table 13 2 IS CLI Mapping continued CLI Command Package 7300 Series L3 Switch Command Mode Syntax QOS config diffserv class match iptos Class Ma match ip tos lt tosbits gt lt tosmask gt lt classname gt lt tosbits gt lt tosmask gt p Config exclude Class Ma match not ip tos lt tosbits gt lt tosmask gt p Config QOS config diffserv class match protocol Class Ma match protocol lt protocol name gt keyword lt classname gt p Config lt 0 255 gt lt protocolkey gt exclude QOS config diffserv class match protocol Class Ma match not protocol lt protocol name g
329. rview SNMP Access e Protocols Scope The NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch software has two purposes e Assist attached hardware in switching frames based on Layer 2 or 3 information contained in the frames e Provide a complete switch management portfolio for the network administrator Switch Management Overview Fast Ethernet FEN and Gigabit Ethernet GEN switching continues to evolve from high end backbone applications to desktop switching applications The price of the technology continues to decline while performance and feature sets continue to improve Devices that are capable of switching Layers 2 3 and 4 are increasingly in demand The NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch provides a flexible solution to these ever increasing needs The NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch provides the network administrator with a set of comprehensive management functions for managing both the 7300 and the network The network administrator has a choice of three easy to use management methods e Web based e VTIOO interface Note The maximum number of configuration file command lines is 2000 Switch Management Overview 2 1 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software e Simple Network Protocol Management SNMP Each management method enables the network administrator to configure manage and control the managed switch locally or remotely using
330. s added to an Ethernet frame by C 20 Glossary 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software an 802 1Q compliant switch or router Devices recognizing 802 1Q tagged frames maintain appropriate tables to track VLANs The first three bits of the 802 1Q tag are used by 802 1P to establish priority for the packet Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol VRRP specifies an election protocol that dynamically assigns responsibility for a virtual router to one of the VRRP routers on a LAN The VRRP router controlling the IP address es associated with a virtual router is called the Master and forwards packets sent to these IP addresses The election process provides dynamic fail over in the forwarding responsibility should the Master become unavailable This allows any of the virtual router IP addresses on the LAN to be used as the default first hop router by end hosts The advantage gained from using VRRP is a higher availability default path without requiring configuration of dynamic routing or router discovery protocols on every end host VLAN See Virtual Local Area Network on page 20 VRRP See Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol on page 21 W WAN See Wide Area Network on page 21 Web Also known as World Wide Web WWW or W3 An Internet client server system to distribute information based upon the hypertext transfer protocol HTTP Wide Area Network A WAN is a comput
331. s command checks if another computer is on the network and listens for connections To use this command configure the switch for network in band connection as described in the 7300 Series L3 Switch 2402 4802 Hardware User Guide The source and target devices must have the ping utility enabled and running on top of TCP IP The switch can be pinged from any IP workstation with which the switch is connected through the default VLAN VLAN 1 as long as there is a physical path between the switch and the workstation The terminal interface sends three pings to the target station Format ping lt ipaddr gt Mode Privileged EXEC and User EXEC reload This command resets the switch without powering it off Reset means that all network connections are terminated and the boot code executes The switch uses the stored configuration to initialize the switch You are prompted to confirm that the reset should proceed A successful reset is indicated by the LEDs on the switch Format reload Mode Privileged EXEC Switching Commands 8 115 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software 8 116 Switching Commands 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Chapter 9 Routing Commands This chapter provides detailed explanation of the Routing commands The switch commands are divided by functionality into these different groups e Show commands are
332. s crossed over to guarantee link The Table below lists the electrical requirements of Category 5 UTP cable B 2 Cabling Guidelines 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Table 13 3 Electrical Requirements of Category 5 Cable SPECIFICATIONS CATEGORY 5 CABLE REQUIREMENTS Number of pairs Four Impedance 100 15 Mutual capacitance at 1 KHz 5 6 nF per 100 m Maximum attenuation at 4 MHz 8 2 dB per 100 m at 20 C at 31 MHz 11 7 at 100 MHz 22 0 NEXT loss dB minimum at 16 MHz 44 at 31 MHz 39 at 100 MHz 32 Twisted Pair Cables For two devices to communicate the transmitter of each device must be connected to the receiver of the other device The crossover function is usually implemented internally as part of the circuitry in the device Computers and workstation adapter cards are usually media dependent interface ports called MDI or uplink ports Most repeaters and switch ports are configured as media dependent interfaces with built in crossover ports called MDI X or normal ports Auto Uplink technology automatically senses which connection MDI or MDI X is needed and makes the right connection Figure 13 1 illustrates straight through twisted pair cable Key A UPLINK OR MDI PORT as on a PC B Normal or MDI X port as on a hub or switch 1 2 3 6 Pin numbers Figure 13 1 Straight Through Twisted Pair Cable Cabli
333. s displayed if average shaping is in use Indicates whether average or peak rate shaping is in use along with the parameters used to form the traffic shaping criteria such as CIR and PIR This is not displayed if shaping is not configured for the class under this policy Shape Committed Rate Kbps This field is displayed if average or peak rate shaping is in use It displays the shaping committed rate in kilobits per sec ond Shape Peak Rate Kbps This field is displayed if peak rate shaping is in use It displays the shaping peak rate in kilobits per second Random Drop Minimum Threshold This field displays the RED minimum thresh old This is not displayed if the queue depth management scheme is not RED Random Drop Maximum Threshold This field displays the RED maximum thresh old This is not displayed if the queue depth management scheme is not RED CLI Commanas Differentiated Services 10 21 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Random Drop Maximum Drop Probability This field displays the RED maximum drop probability This is not displayed if the queue depth management scheme is not RED Random Drop Sampling Rate This field displays the RED sampling rate This is not dis played if the queue depth management scheme is not RED Random Drop Decay Exponent This field displays the RED decay exponent This is not displayed if the queue depth management scheme is not R
334. s entry show snmptrap This command displays SNMP trap receivers Trap messages are sent across a network to an SNMP Network Manager These messages alert the manager to events occurring within the switch or on the network Six trap receivers are simultaneously supported Format show snmptrap Mode Privileged EXEC SNMP Trap Name The community string of the SNMP trap packet sent to the trap manager This may be up to 16 alphanumeric characters This string is case sensitive IP Address The IP address to receive SNMP traps from this device Enter 4 numbers between 0 and 255 separated by periods Switching Commands 8 27 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Status show trapflags A pull down menu that indicates the receiver s status enabled or disabled and allows the administrator user to perform actions on this user entry Enable send traps to the receiver Disable do not send traps to the receiver Delete remove the table entry This command displays trap conditions Configure which traps the switch should generate by enabling or disabling the trap condition If a trap condition is enabled and the condition is detected the switch s SNMP agent sends the trap to all enabled trap receivers The switch does not have to be reset to implement the changes Cold and warm start traps are always generated and cannot be disabled Format Mode Authentication Flag L
335. s port to determine when re authentication of the supplicant takes place The reauth period must be a value in the range 1 65535 quiet period Sets the value in seconds of the timer used by the authenticator state machine on this port to define periods of time in which it will not attempt to acquire a supplicant The quiet period must be a value in the range 0 65535 tx period Sets the value in seconds of the timer used by the authenticator state machine on this port to determine when to send an EAPOL EAP Request Identity frame to the supplicant The quiet period must be a value in the range 1 65535 supp timeout Sets the value in seconds of the timer used by the authenticator state machine on this port to timeout the supplicant The supp timeout must be a value in the range 1 65535 server timeout Sets the value in seconds of the timer used by the authenticator state machine on this port to timeout the authentication server The supp timeout must be a value in the range 1 65535 Default reauth period 3600 seconds quiet period 60 seconds tx period 30 seconds supp timeout 30 seconds server timeout 30 seconds Format dot1x timeout reauth period seconds quiet period lt sec onds tx period seconds supp timeout lt seconds gt server timeout lt seconds gt Mode Interface Config 8 100 Switching Commands 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Sw
336. s to transmitted and received but not at the same time Contrast with full duplex hop count The number of routers that a data packet passes through on its way to its destination ICMP See Internet Control Message Protocol on page 10 IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers This American organization was founded in 1963 and sets standards for computers and communications IETF Internet Engineering Task Force An organization responsible for providing engineering solutions for TCP IP networks In the network management area this group is responsible for the development of the SNMP protocol IGMP See Internet Group Management Protocol on page 10 IGMP Snooping A series of operations performed by intermediate systems to add logic to the network to optimize the flow of multicast traffic these intermediate systems such as Layer 2 switches listen for IGMP messages and build mapping tables and associated forwarding filters in addition to reducing the IGMP protocol traffic See Internet Group Management Protocol on page 10 for more information Glossary C 9 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP is an extension to the Internet Protocol IP that supports packets containing error control and informational messages The PING command for example uses ICMP to test an Internet connection Internet
337. satisfy future demands Capacity planning includes evaluating potential workload and infrastructure changes Checksum A simple error detection scheme in which each transmitted message is identified with a numerical value based on the number of set bits in the message The receiving station then applies a formula to the message and checks to make sure the accompanying numerical value is the same If not the receiver can assume that the message has been corrupted C 4 Glossary 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Class of Service A term to describe treating different types of traffic with different levels of service priority Higher priority traffic gets faster treatment during times of switch congestion CLI See Command Line Interface on page 5 Collision A term used to describe two colliding packets in an Ethernet network Collisions are a part of normal Ethernet operation but a sudden prolonged increase in the number of collisions can indicate a problem with a device particularly if it is not accompanied by a general increase in traffic Command Line Interface CLI is a line item interface for configuring systems Common Open Policy Service Protocol A proposed standard protocol for exchanging network policy information between a Policy Decision Point PDP in a network and Policy Enforcement Points PEPs as part of overall Quality of Service QoS the allocation
338. seconds after which a request must be retransmitted to the RADIUS server if no response is received The timeout value is an integer in the range of 1 to 30 Default 6 Format radius server timeout lt seconds gt Mode Global Config no radius server timeout This command sets the timeout value in seconds after which a request must be retransmitted to the RADIUS server if no response is received to the default value i e 6 Format no radius server timeout Mode Global Config show accounting This command is used to display the configured RADIUS accounting mode accounting server and the statistics for the configured accounting server Format show accounting statistics lt ipaddr gt Mode Privileged EXEC If the optional token statistics lt ipaddr gt is not included then only the accounting mode and the RADIUS accounting server details are displayed 8 104 Switching Commands 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Mode IP Address Port Secret Configured Enabled or disabled The configured IP address of the RADIUS accounting server The port in use by the RADIUS accounting server Yes or No If the optional token statistics lt ipaddr gt is included the statistics for the configured RADIUS accounting server are displayed The IP address parameter must match that of a previously configured RADIUS accounting server The following information regarding th
339. send the entire procedure to your printer you do not have to worry about specifying the correct range of pages e Printing a Chapter Use the PDF of This Chapter link at the top right of any page Click PDF of This Chapter link at the top right of any page in the chapter you want to print The PDF version of the chapter you were viewing opens in a browser window Note Your computer must have the free Adobe Acrobat reader installed in order to view and print PDF files The Acrobat reader is available on the Adobe Web site at http www adobe com Click the print icon in the upper left of the window Tip If your printer supports printing two pages on a single sheet of paper you can save paper and printer ink by selecting this feature Printing the Full Manual Use the PDF button in the toolbar at the top right of the browser window Click the PDF button on the upper right of the toolbar The PDF version of the chapter you were viewing opens in a browser window Click the print icon in the upper left of the window Tip If your printer supports printing two pages on a single sheet of paper you can save paper and printer ink by selecting this feature 1 4 About This Guide 202 10009 01 060204 Chapter 2 Switch Management Overview This chapter gives an overview of switch management including the methods you can use to manage your NETGEAR NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Management Access Ove
340. ser traps When the traps are enabled a Multiple User Trap is sent when a user logs in to the terminal interface EIA 232 or telnet and there is an existing terminal interface session Default Enabled Format snmp server enable traps multiusers Mode Global Config no snmp server enable traps multiusers This command disables Multiple User traps Format no snmp server enable traps multiusers Mode Global Config snmp server enable traps stpmode This command enables the sending of new root traps and topology change notification traps Default Enabled Format snmp server enable traps stpmode Mode Global Config no snmp server enable traps stpmode This command disables the sending of new root traps and topology change notification traps Format no snmp server enable traps stpmode Mode Global Config snmptrap This command adds an SNMP trap name The maximum length of name is 16 case sensitive alphanumeric characters Default The default name for the six undefined community names is Delete Format snmptrap lt name gt lt ipaddr gt Switching Commands 8 33 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Mode Global Config no snmptrap This command deletes trap receivers for a community Format no snmptrap lt name gt lt ipaddr gt Mode Global Config snmptrap ipaddr This command assigns an IP address to a specified community name The maximum length of name is 1
341. shkey rsa1 nvram sshkey rsa2 nvram sshkey dsa nvram sslpem root nvram sslpem server nvram sslpem dhweak nvram sslpem strong system running config nvram startup config Switching transfer upload serverip lt ipaddr gt Switching transfer upload path lt path gt Switching transfer upload filename lt name gt Switching transfer upload datatype lt config errorlog msglog traplog gt Switching transfer upload start IS CLI Mapping A 31 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Table 13 2 IS CLI Mapping continued CLI Command Package 7300 Series L3 Switch Command Mode Syntax Switching transfer download mode lt xmodem tftp gt Switching transfer download serverip lt ipaddr gt Switching transfer download path lt path gt Switching transfer download filename lt name gt Switching transfer download datatype lt code config gt Switching transfer download start Switching clear transfer Switching save config Privileged copy system running config EXEC nvram startup config Switching clear config Privileged clear config EXEC Switching clear pass Privileged clear pass EXEC Switching clear traplog Privileged clear traplog EXEC Switching clear vlan Privileged clear vlan EXEC Switching clear lag Privileged clear port channel EXEC Switching clear stats port lt slot port gt
342. show arp brief Mode Privileged EXEC Age Time seconds Is the time it takes for an ARP entry to age out This value was configured into the unit Age time is measured in seconds Response Time seconds Is the time it takes for an ARP request timeout This value was configured into the unit Response time is measured in sec onds Retries Is the maximum number of times an ARP request is retried This value was configured into the unit Cache Size Is the maximum number of entries in the ARP table This value was configured into the unit Dynamic Renew Mode Displays whether the ARP component automatically attempts to renew dynamic ARP entries when they age out Total Entry Count Current Peak Field listing the total entries in the ARP table and the peak entry count in the ARP table Static Entry Count Current Max Field listing the static entry count in the ARP table and maximum static entry count in the ARP table 9 36 Routing Commands 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software show bootpdhcprelay This command displays the BootP DHCP Relay information Format Mode Maximum Hop Count show bootpdhcprelay Privileged EXEC and User EXEC Is the maximum allowable relay agent hops Minimum Wait Time Seconds Is the minimum wait time Admin Mode Server IP Address Circuit Id Option Mode Requests Received Requests Relayed Packets Discarded show ip brief Repres
343. show ip ospf area lt areaid gt lt areaid gt EXEC Routing show router ospf area range Privileged show ip ospf range lt areaid gt lt areaid gt EXEC Routing show router ospf neighbor detailed Privileged show ip ospf neighbor lt ipaddr gt lt slot lt slot port gt lt ipaddr gt EXECand port gt User EXEC Routing show router ospf neighbor table Privileged show ip ospf neighbor brief lt slot lt slot port gt EXECand port all User EXEC Routing show router ospf stub table Privileged show ip ospf stub table EXEC and User EXEC Routing show router ospf Isdb summary Privileged show ip ospf database EXEC and User EXEC Routing show router rip info Privileged show ip rip EXEC and User EXEC Routing show router rip interface detailed Privileged show ip rip interface lt slot port gt lt slot port gt EXEC and User EXEC IS CLI Mapping A 11 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Table 13 2 IS CLI Mapping continued Package 7300 Series L3 Switch Command CLI Command Mode Syntax Routing show router rip interface summary Privileged EXEC and User EXEC show ip rip interface brief Routing show router ospf virtif detailed lt areaid gt lt neighbor gt Privileged EXEC and User EXEC show ip ospf virtual link lt areaid gt lt neighbor gt Routing show router ospf virtif summary Privileged
344. splayed Format show radius statistics ipaddr Mode Privileged EXEC If ip address is not specified than only Invalis Server Address filed is displayed Otherwise other listed fields are displayed Invalid Server Addresses The number of RADIUS Access Response packets received from unknown addresses Server IP Address Round Trip Time The time interval in hundredths of a second between the most recent Access Reply Access Challenge and the Access Request that matched it from the RADIUS authentication server Access Requests The number of RADIUS Access Request packets sent to this server This number does not include retransmissions 8 110 Switching Commands 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Access Retransmission The number of RADIUS Access Request packets retransmitted Access Accepts Access Rejects Access Challenges to this RADIUS authentication server The number of RADIUS Access Accept packets including both valid and invalid packets which were received from this server The number of RADIUS Access Reject packets including both valid and invalid packets which were received from this server The number of RADIUS Access Challenge packets including both valid and invalid packets which were received from this server Malformed Access Responses The number of malformed RADIUS Access Response Bad Authenticators Pending Requests Timeouts Unknown
345. split horizon none simple poison simple poison gt RIP Config Router no split horizon RIP Config Routing config router rip hostroutesaccept Router hostroutesaccept lt enable disable gt RIP Config Router no hostroutesaccept RIP Config Switching show serviceport Privileged show serviceport EXEC Switching show snmpcommunity Privileged show snmpcommunity EXEC Switching show snmptrap Privileged show snmptrap EXEC Switching show trapflags Privileged show trapflags EXEC Switching show telnet Privileged show remotecon EXEC and User EXEC Switching show forwardingdb agetime fdbid Privileged show forwardingdb agetime lt fdbid gt all EXEC all Switching config network parms lt ipaddr gt Privileged network parms lt ipaddr gt lt netmask gt lt netmask gt gateway EXEC lt gateway gt Switching config network protocol lt none Privileged network protocol none bootp bootp dhcp gt EXEC dhcp Switching config network webmode lt enable Privileged ip http server disable gt EXEC IS CLI Mapping A 23 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Table 13 2 IS CLI Mapping continued CLI Command Package 7300 Series L3 Switch Command Mode Syntax Privileged no ip http server EXEC Switching config network javamode enable Privileged network javamode disable gt EXEC
346. ssages Message Received DHCPREQUEST DHCPDECLINE DHCPRELEASE DHCPINFORM Message Sent The name of a DHCP client The unique identifier of a DHCP client The hardware address of a DHCP client The protocol of the hardware platform The IP address and the mask for a manual binding to a DHCP cli ent show ip dhcp server statistics This command displays DHCP server statistics show ip dhcp server statistics Privileged EXEC and User EXEC The number of configured address pools in the DHCP server The number of IP addresses that have been automatically mapped to the MAC addresses of hosts that are found in the DHCP data base The number of IP addresses that have been manually mapped to the MAC addresses of hosts that are found in the DHCP database The number of expired leases The number of truncated or corrupted messages that were received by the DHCP server The number of DHCPREQUEST messages that were received by the server The number of DHCPDECLINE messages that were received by the server The number of DHCPRELEASE messages that were received by the server The number of DHCPINFORM messages that were received by the server 12 8 DHCP Server Commands 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software DHCPOFFER The number of DHCPOFFER messages that were sent by the server DHCPACK The number of DHCPPACK messages that were sent by the server DHCP
347. stnumber gt is the number used to identify the ACL Format Mode Rule Number Action Protocol Source IP Address Source IP Mask Source Ports Destination IP Address Destination IP Mask Destination Ports show ip access lists lt accesslistnumber gt Privileged EXEC and User EXEC This displays the number identifier for each rule that is defined for the ACL This displays the action associated with each rule The possible values are Permit or Deny This displays the protocol to filter for this rule This displays the source IP address for this rule This field displays the source IP Mask for this rule This field displays the source port range for this rule This displays the destination IP address for this rule This field displays the destination IP Mask for this rule This field displays the destination port range for this rule Service Type Field Match This field indicates whether an IP DSCP IP Precedence or IP TOS match condition is specified for this rule Service Type Field Value This field indicates the value specified for the Service Type Field Match IP DSCP IP Precedence or IP TOS CLI Commands ACL 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Configuration Commands access list This command creates an Access Control List ACL that is identified by the parameter lt accesslistnumber gt The ACL number is an integer from 1 to 199 The rang
348. sually appealing of all three Based on open standards methods Limited amount of information available Some settings require calculations Security can be compromised hackers need only know the community name 2 2 Switch Management Overview 202 10009 01 060204 Chapter 3 Administration Console Telnet Interface The administration console is an internal character oriented VT 100 ANSI menu driven user interface for performing management activities Using this method you can view the administration console from a terminal PC Apple Macintosh or UNIX workstation connected to the switch s console port Figure 3 1 shows an example of this management method GSM7312 HyperTerminal wll ll NETGEAR 7000 Series O en gm oa poe uo z Managed Switch Del alz dot del GSN7912 User admin PC Password NOTE Enter for Command Help Command help displays all options that are valid for the normal and no command forms For the syntax of a particular command form please consult the documentation GSH7312 gt 4 amp enable Enler inlo user privilege mode UNIX help Display help for various special keys n logout Exit this session Any unsaved changes are lost Workstation ping Send ICHP echo packets to a specified IP address show Display switch options and settings GSH7312 gt GSH7312 gt km 4 Macintosh Konmected 0 00 12 A n detect CRP Us MM Figure 3 1 Ad
349. subnetwork unicast address including those that were discarded or not sent Multicast Packets Transmitted The total number of packets that higher level protocols requested be transmitted to a Multicast address including those that were discarded or not sent Broadcast Packets Transmitted The total number of packets that higher level protocols requested be transmitted to the Broad cast address including those that were discarded or not sent Transmit Packets Discarded The number of outbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being deliverable to a higher layer Switching Commands 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software protocol A possible reason for discarding a packet could be to free up buffer space Most Address Entries Ever Used The highest number of For warding Database Address Table entries that have been learned by this switch since the most recent reboot Address Entries in Use The number of Learned and static entries in the Forwarding Database Address Table for this switch Maximum VLAN Entries The maximum number of Virtual LANs VLANs allowed on this switch Most VLAN Entries Ever Used The largest number of VLANs that have been active on this switch since the last reboot Static VLAN Entries The number of presently active VLAN entries on this switch that have been created statically D
350. t number lt classname gt lt 0 255 gt p Config lt 0 255 gt exclude QOS config diffserv class match refclass Class Ma match class map lt refclassname gt lt add remove gt lt classname gt p Config lt refclassname gt Class Ma no match class map lt refclassname gt p Config QOS config diffserv class match srcip Class Ma match srcip lt ipaddr gt lt ipmask gt lt classname gt lt ipaddr gt lt ipmask gt p Config exclude Class Ma match not srcip lt ipaddr gt lt ipmask gt p Config QOS config diffserv class match Class Ma match srcl4port lt portkey gt srcl4port keyword lt classname gt p Config lt 0 65535 gt lt 0 65535 gt lt portkey gt exclude QOS config diffserv class match Class Ma match not srcl4port lt portkey gt srcl4port number lt classname gt p Config lt 0 65535 gt lt 0 65535 gt lt 0 65535 gt exclude QOS config diffserv class match srcl4port range lt classname gt lt 0 65535 gt lt 0 65535 gt exclude QOS config diffserv class match srcmac Class Ma match source address mac classname lt macaddr gt p Config address lt macmask gt lt macmask gt exclude IS CLI Mapping A 9 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Table 13 2 IS CLI Mapping continued CLI Command Package 7300 Series L3 Switch Command Mode Syntax Class Ma m
351. t to registration forbidden auto The interface is dynamically registered in this VLAN by GVRP The interface will not participate in this VLAN unless a join request is received on this interface This is equivalent to registra tion normal vlan participation all This command configures the degree of participation for all interfaces ina VLAN The ID is a valid VLAN identification number Format vlan participation all exclude include auto lt 1 4094 Mode Global Config Participation options are include The interface is always a member of this VLAN This is equiva lent to registration fixed exclude The interface is never a member of this VLAN This is equivalent to registration forbidden auto The interface is dynamically registered in this VLAN by GVRP The interface will not participate in this VLAN unless a join request is received on this interface This is equivalent to registra tion normal Switching Commands 8 73 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software vlan port acceptframe all This command sets the frame acceptance mode for all interfaces For VLAN Only mode untagged frames or priority frames received on this interface are discarded For Admit All mode untagged frames or priority frames received on this interface are accepted and assigned the value of the interface VLAN ID for this port With either option VLAN tagged frames are forwarded in acc
352. t connector transition points the jacket around the twisted pair cable bundling of multiple pairs on horizontal runs and punch down blocks All of these factors affect the performance of 1000B ASE T technology if not correctly implemented The following sections are designed to act as a guide to correct cabling for 1000BASE T Cabling The 1000B ASE T product is designed to operate over Category 5 cabling To further enhance the operation the cabling standards have been amended The latest standard is Category 5e which defines a higher level of link performance than is available with Category 5 cable If installing new cable we recommend using Category 5e cable since it costs about the same as Category 5 cable If using the existing cable be sure to have the cable plant tested by a professional who can verify that it meets or exceeds either ANSI EIA TIA 568 A 1995 or ISO IEC 11801 1995 Category 5 specifications Length The maximum distance limitation between two pieces of equipment is 100 m as per the original Ethernet specification The end to end link is called the channel TSB 67 defines the Basic Link which is the portion of the link that is part of the building infrastructure This excludes patch and equipment cords The maximum basic link length is 295 feet 90 m Return Loss Return loss measures the amount of reflected signal energy resulting from impedance changes in the cabling link The nature of 1000B ASE T re
353. tatus of the entry either dynamic or permanent This refers to how the neighbor became known This indicates whether Hellos are being suppressed to the neigh bor The types are enabled and disabled Retransmission Queue Length Is an integer representing the current length of the retransmission queue of the specified neighbor router Id of the specified interface show ip ospf neighbor brief This command displays the OSPF neighbor table list When a particular neighbor ID is specified detailed information about a neighbor is given The information below will only be displayed if OSPF is enabled Format Mode Router ID IP Address show ip ospf neighbor brief lt slot port all Privileged EXEC and User EXEC Is 4 digit dotted decimal number representing the neighbor inter face Is an IP address representing the neighbor interface Neighbor Interface Index Is a slot port identifying the neighbor interface index show ip ospf range This command displays information about the area ranges for the specified lt areaid gt The lt areaid gt identifies the OSPF area whose ranges are being displayed 9 46 Routing Commands 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Format Mode Area ID IP Address Subnet Mask Lsdb Type Advertisement show ip ospf range lt areaid gt Privileged EXEC and User EXEC Is the area id of the requested OSPF area Is an IP A
354. te is specified in kilobits per second Kbps and is an integer from 1 to 4294967295 Note The actual bandwidth allocation does not occur until the policy is attached to an interface in a particular direction Note The bandwidth kbps and percent commands are alternative ways to specify the same bandwidth policy attribute Note This command is only supported for GSM7324 and GSM7312 Format bandwidth kbps lt 1 4294967295 gt Mode Policy Class Map Config Restrictions The sum of the committed information rate values for all band width and expedite commands defined within a policy must not exceed the available link bandwidth of the interface to which that policy is assigned Violation of this requirement shall prevent 10 12 CLI Commands Differentiated Services 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software successful attachment of a policy to the interface or shall cause this command to fail if the policy is already in service on one or more interfaces Policy Type Out Incompatibilities Expedite all forms bandwidth percent This command identifies a minimum amount of bandwidth to be reserved for the specified class instance within the named policy using a relative rate notation The committed information rate is specified as a percentage of total link capacity and is an integer from 1 to 100 Note The actual bandwidth allocation does not occur until the policy is attached t
355. terface This command displays information relevant to the RIP router Format show ip rip Mode Privileged EXEC and User EXEC Router ID Is a 32 bit dotted decimal number representing the interface 9 48 Routing Commands 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software RIP Admin Mode Global Route Changes RIP administrative mode of router RIP operation enable acti vates and disable de activates the RIP ability for the switch This is a configured value The number of route changes made by RIP to the IP Route Data base Global queries The number of responses sent to RIP queries from other systems Default metric Source Metric value Match value Distribute list Default info originate Source protocol routes that are being redistributed Source protocol routes that are being redistributed Metric of the routes being redistributed The criteria by which OSPF routes are redistributed into other routing domains TAccess list used to filter redistributed routes Indicates whether the default routes received from other source protocols are advertised or not show ip rip interface brief This command displays general information for each RIP interface For this command to display successful results routing must be enable per interface i e config router rip interface lt slot port gt enable Format Mode Slot Port IP Address Send Version Receive Version RI
356. terface netdirbcast slot Interface ip netdirbcast port lt enable disable gt Config Interface no ip netdirbcast Config Routing config ip interface create slot Global ip address lt slot port gt lt ipaddr gt port lt ipaddr gt lt subnetmask gt Config lt subnetmask gt Routing config ip forwarding lt enable Global ip forwarding disable gt Config Global no ip forwarding Config Routing config routing enable disable Global ip routing Config Global no ip routing Config A 14 IS CLI Mapping 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Table 13 2 IS CLI Mapping continued CLI Command Package 7300 Series L3 Switch Command Mode Syntax Routing config ip vlan routing create lt vlan gt VLAN vlan routing lt vlanid gt database Routing config ip vlan routing delete lt vlan gt VLAN no vlan routing lt vlanid gt database Routing config trapflags ospf enable Router trapflags disable OSPF Config Router no trapflags OSPF Config Routing config router ospf adminmode Router enable enable disable OSPF Config Router no enable OSPF Config Routing config router ospf asbr enable Removed disable Routing config router ospf prefrence intra Router distance ospf intra inter type1 inter type1 type2 gt 0 255 OSPF type2 1 255 Config Router no distance ospf intra inter type1
357. that mode Table 7 1 Command Mode Command Mode Access Method Prompt Exit or Access Next Mode User Exec Mode This is the first level of Switch gt Enter Logout command access Perform basic tasks and list system information Privileged Exec Mode From the User Exec Switch To exit this mode enter Mode enter the enable exit or press Ctrl Z command Mode based CLI 7 1 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Table 7 1 Command Mode continued Command Mode Access Method Prompt Exit or Access Next Mode VLAN Mode From the Privileged User Exec mode enter the vlan database command Switch Vlan To exit to the Privileged Exec mode enter the exit command or press Ctrl Z to switch to user exec mode Global Config Mode From the Privileged Exec mode enter the configure command Switch Config To exit to the Privileged Exec mode enter the exit command or press Ctrl Z to switch to user exec mode Interface Config Mode From the Global Configuration mode enter the interface config lt slot port gt command Switch Interface if number To exit to the Global Config mode enter exit To return to user EXEC mode enter ctrl Z Line Config Mode From the Global Configuration mode enter the lineconfig command Switch line To exit to the Global Config mode enter exit
358. the Topology Change parameter for the multiple spanning tree instance Switching Commands 8 79 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Designated Root Identifier of the Regional Root for this multiple spanning tree instance Root Path Cost Path Cost to the Designated Root for this multiple spanning tree instance Root Port Identifier Port to access the Designated Root for this multiple spanning tree instance Associated FIDs List of forwarding database identifiers associated with this instance Associated VLANs List of VLAN IDs associated with this instance show spanning tree mst port detailed This command displays the detailed settings and parameters for a specific switch port within a particular multiple spanning tree instance The instance lt mstid gt is a number that corresponds to the desired existing multiple spanning tree instance The lt slot port gt is the desired switch port Format show spanning tree mst port detailed lt mstid gt lt slot port gt Mode Privileged EXEC and User EXEC MST Instance ID Port Identifier Port Priority Port Forwarding State Current spanning tree state of this port Port Role Port Path Cost Configured value of the Internal Port Path Cost parameter Designated Root The Identifier of the designated root for this port Designated Port Cost Path Cost offered to the LAN by the Designated Port Designated Bridge Bridge Identifier of the
359. this community are accepted In this case the SNMP manager associated with this community cannot manage the switch until the Status is changed back to Enable Default The default private and public communities are enabled by default The four undefined communities are disabled by default Format snmp server community mode name 8 30 Switching Commands 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Mode Global Config no snmp server community mode This command deactivates an SNMP community If the community is disabled no SNMP requests using this community are accepted In this case the SNMP manager associated with this community cannot manage the switch until the Status is changed back to Enable Format no snmp server community mode lt name gt Mode Global Config snmp server community ro This command restricts access to switch information The access mode is read only also called public Format snmp server community ro lt name gt Mode Global Config snmp server community rw This command restricts access to switch information The access mode is read write also called private Format snmp server community rw name Mode Global Config snmp server enable traps This command enables the Authentication Flag Default Enabled Format snmp server enable traps Mode Global Config no snmp server enable traps This command disables the Authentication Flag
360. tion see Device Configuration Commands on page 8 38 VLAN see show vlan on page 8 63 Mcast Fwding DB see show forwardingdb agetime on page 8 23 Web Based Management Interface 4 7 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Routing Routing Commands see Routing Commands on page 9 1 Traffic Management e Diffserv see Chapter 10 CLI Commands Differentiated Services e Traffic Control see Management Commands on page 8 18 Smart Wizard e VLAN Routing Wizard see Routing Commands on page 9 1 e Diffserv Wizard see Chapter 10 CLI Commands Differentiated Services System Wide Popup Menus The 7300 Series L3 Switch also provides several popup menus NETGEAR 24 2 L3 Managed Switch with PoE CE ES E e SS i3 15 SC a a k as FSM7326p DEE p RR op m o EIIIIIJ HEFHHH CJ Er E 2 Ge pwr OEY PEASY tt a Mod asa Management d ch WM Port Routing MAC Addresses Traffic Management gt D VLAN Status Wizards Config Spanning Tree Link Aggregation Multicast Fwd Database VLAN VLAN Port Config Name Type Silo Reset Config Default Default 3 ProtetBasedANconfig f6 070 80 90 10 Protocol Based VLAN Summary 160 170 180 19 Switch Configuration 25026 Port Configuration GARP Status Figure 4 8 Switch popup menus You can also access the main navigation menu by right clicking on the image of the switch and
361. to a WLAN through an AP which then requests the identity of the user and transmits that identity to an authentication server such as RADIUS The server asks the AP for proof of C 6 Glossary 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software identity which the AP gets from the user and then sends back to the server to complete the authentication EAP is defined by RFC 2284 Endstation A computer printer or server that is connected to a network Ethernet A LAN specification developed jointly by Xerox Intel and Digital Equipment Corporation Ethernet networks transmit packets at a rate of 10 Mbps F Fast Ethernet An Ethernet system that is designed to operate at 100 Mbps Fault isolation A technique for identifying and alerting administrators about connections such as those associated with switch ports that are experiencing congestion or failure or exceeding an administrator defined threshold Fast STP A high performance Spanning Tree Protocol See STP on page 19 for more information Filtering The process of screening a packet for certain characteristics such as source address destination address or protocol Filtering is used to determine whether traffic is to be forwarded and can also prevent unauthorized access to a network or network devices Flow Control The process of adjusting the flow of data from one network device to another to ensure that the receiving
362. trative model command for DiffServ Note This command shall fail if any attributes within the policy definition exceed the capabilities of the interface Once a policy is successfully attached to an interface any attempt to change the policy definition such that it would result in a violation of said interface capabilities shall cause the policy change attempt to fail Format service policy in out lt policymapname gt Mode Global Config for all system interfaces Mode Interface Config for a specific interface Restrictions Only a single policy may be attached to a particular interface in a particular direction at any one time no service policy This command detaches a policy from an interface in a particular direction The command can be used in the Interface Config mode to detach a policy from a specific interface Alternatively the command can be used in the Global Config mode to detach this policy from all system interfaces to which it is currently attached The direction value is either in or out The lt policyname gt parameter is the name of an existing DiffServ policy Note that this command causes a service to remove its reference to the policy Note This command effectively disables DiffServ on an interface in a particular direction There is no separate interface administrative model command for DiffServ 10 16 CLI Commands Differentiated Services 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series La
363. try in the VLAN table is being modified or if the VLAN has not been configured Multicast Tree Viable Discards The number of frames dis carded when a lookup in the multicast tree for a VLAN occurs while that tree is being modified Reserved Address Discards The number of frames discarded that are destined to an IEEE 802 1 reserved address and are not supported by the system Broadcast Storm Recovery The number of frames discarded that are destined for FF FF FF FF FF FF when Broadcast Storm Recovery is enabled CFI Discards The number of frames discarded that have CFI bit set and the addresses in RIF are in non canonical format Upstream Threshold The number of frames discarded due to lack of cell descriptors available for that packet s priority level Packets Transmitted Octets Total Bytes The total number of octets of data including those in bad packets received on the network excluding framing bits but including FCS octets This object can be used as a reasonable estimate of ethernet utilization If greater precision is desired the etherStatsPkts and etherStatsOctets objects should be sampled before and after a common interval Switching Commands 8 7 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Packets Transmitted 64 Octets The total number of packets including bad packets received that were 64 octets in length excluding framing bits but including F
364. twork If one DNS server doesn t know how to translate a particular domain name it asks another one and so on until the correct IP address is returned Domain Name A descriptive name for an address or group of addresses on the Internet Domain names are of the form of a registered entity name plus one of a number of predefined top level suffixes such as com edu uk etc For example in the address mail NETGEAR com mail is a server name and NETGEAR com is the domain Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP is a protocol for assigning dynamic IP addresses to devices on a network With dynamic addressing a device can have a different IP address every time it connects to the network In some systems the device s IP address can even change while it is still connected DHCP also supports a mix of static and dynamic IP addresses Dynamic addressing simplifies network administration because the software tracks IP addresses rather than requiring an administrator to manage the task A new computer can be added to a network without the hassle of manually assigning it a unique IP address E EAP Extensible Authentication Protocol is a general protocol for authentication that supports multiple authentication methods EAP an extension to PPP supports such authentication methods as token cards Kerberos one time passwords certificates public key authentication and smart cards In wireless communications using EAP a user requests connection
365. umber of triggered RIP updates actually sent on this inter face This command displays whether VRRP functionality is enabled or disabled on the 7300 Series L3 Switch It also displays some global parameters which are required for monitoring This command takes no options Format Mode VRRP Admin Mode show ip vrrp Privileged EXEC and User EXEC Displays the admin mode for VRRP functionality on the switch Router Checksum Errors Represents the total number of VRRP packets received with an invalid VRRP checksum value Routing Commands 9 53 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Router Version Errors Router VRID Errors Represents the total number of VRRP packets received with Unknown or unsupported version number Represents the total number of VRRP packets received with invalid VRID for this virtual router show ip vrrp interface This command displays all configuration information and VRRP router statistics of a virtual router configured on a specific interface Format Mode IP Address VMAC address Authentication type Priority Advertisement interval Pre Empt Mode Administrative Mode State show ip vrrp interface lt slot port gt lt vrID gt Privileged EXEC and User EXEC This field represents the configured IP Address for the Virtual router Represents the VMAC address of the specified router Represents the authentication type for the speci
366. ut Transmit Data 2 Input Receive Data Output Transmit Data 3 Output Transmit Data Input Receive Data 6 Output Transmit Data Input Receive Data 4 5 7 8 Internal termination not used for data transmission Table E 2 lists the pin assignments for the 100 1000 Mbps RJ 45 plug and the RJ 45 connector Cabling Guidelines B 7 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Table 13 2 100 1000 Mbps RJ 45 Plug and RJ 45 Connector Pin Assignments PIN CHANNEL DESCRIPTION 1 A Rx Tx Data 2 Rx Tx Data 3 B Rx Tx Data 6 Rx Tx Data 4 C Rx Tx Data 5 Rx Tx Data 7 D Rx Tx Data 8 Rx Tx Data Conclusion For optimum performance of your 1000B ASE T product it is important to fully qualify your cable installation and ensure it meets or exceeds ANSI EIA TIA 568 A 1995 or ISO IEC 11801 1995 Category 5 specifications Install Category 5e cable where possible including patch panel cables Minimize transition points jacket removal and untwist lengths Bundling of cables must be properly installed to meet the requirements in ANSI EIA TIA 568A 3 B 8 202 10009 01 060204 Cabling Guidelines Appendix C Glossary Use the list below to find definitions for technical terms used in this manual Numeric 802 1D The IEEE designator for Spanning Tree Protocol STP STP a link management protocol is part of the 8
367. utes that are being redistributed Metric of the routes being redistributed The criteria by which OSPF routes are redistributed into other routing domains External Type 1 or External Type 2 routes Decimal value attached to each external route For redistributing routes into OSPF the scope of redistribution for the specified protocol TAccess list used to filter redistributed routes Indicates whether the default routes received from other source protocols are advertised or not The information below will only be displayed if OSPF is enabled ABR Status Exit Overflow Interval External LSA count Reflects the whether or not the router is an OSPF Area Border Router The number of seconds that after entering OverflowState a router will attempt to leave OverflowState The number of external LS type 5 link state advertisements in the link state database External LSA Checksum A number which represents the sum of the LS checksums of external link state advertisements contained in the link state data base 9 40 Routing Commands 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software New LSAs Originated LSAs Received External LSDB Limit show ip ospf area The number of new link state advertisements that have been orig inated The number of link state advertisements received determined to be new instantiations The maximum number of non default AS externa
368. uthentication login listname lt listname gt Config Security config users defaultlogin Global users defaultlogin lt listname gt lt listname gt Config Security config users login lt user gt Global users login user lt listname gt lt listname gt Config Security show authentication login info Privileged show authentication EXEC Security show authentication login users Privileged show authentication users lt listname gt EXEC lt listname gt Security show users authentication Privileged show users authentication EXEC A 42 IS CLI Mapping 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Table 13 2 IS CLI Mapping continued CLI Command Package 7300 Series L3 Switch Command Mode Syntax Security config radius maxretransmit lt 1 Global radius server retransmit lt 1 15 gt 15 gt Config Global no radius server retransmit Config Security config radius timeout 1 30 Global radius server timeout 1 30 Config Global no radius server timeout Config Security config radius accounting mode Global radius accounting mode lt enable disable gt Config Global no radius accounting mode Config Security config radius accounting server Global radius server host auth acct add lt ipaddr gt Config lt ipaddr gt lt 0 65535 gt Security config radius accounting server Global port lt ipaddr gt lt 0
369. ve functional groups Show commands display switch settings statistics and other information Configuration Commands configure features and options of the switch For every configuration command there is a show command that displays the configuration setting Copy commands transfers or saves configuration and informational files to and from the switch Clear commands clear some or all of the settings to factory defaults This chapter includes the following configuration types System information and statistics commands Management commands Device configuration commands User account management commands Security commands System utilities System Information and Statistics Commands show arp switch This command displays connectivity between the switch and other devices The Address Resolution Protocol ARP cache identifies the MAC addresses of the IP stations communicating with the switch Format show arp switch Mode Privileged EXEC MAC Address A unicast MAC address for which the switch has forwarding and or filtering information The format is 6 two digit hexadecimal Switching Commands 8 1 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software IP Address slot port show eventlog numbers that are separated by colons for example 01 23 45 67 89 AB The IP address assigned to each interface Valid slot number and a valid port number This command displays the e
370. vent log which contains error messages from the system The event log is not cleared on a system reset Format Mode File Line Task Id Code Time show eventlog Privileged EXEC The file in which the event originated The line number of the event The task ID of the event The event code The time this event occurred Note Event log information is retained across a switch reset show hardware This command displays inventory information for the switch Format Mode Switch Description Machine Type Machine Model Serial Number FRU Number Part Number Maintenance Level Manufacturer show hardware Privileged EXEC Text used to identify the product name of this switch Specifies the machine model as defined by the Vital Product Data Specifies the machine model as defined by the Vital Product Data The unique box serial number for this switch The field replaceable unit number Manufacturing part number Indicates hardware changes that are significant to software Manufacturer descriptor field 8 2 Switching Commands 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Burned in MAC Address Universally assigned network address Software Version The release version revision number of the code currently run ning on the switch Operating System The operating system currently running on the switch Network Processing Element The type of the processo
371. vrID gt Mode Interface Config no ip vrrp This command removes all VRRP configuration details of the virtual router configured on a specific interface The parameter lt vrID gt is the virtual router ID which has an integer value ranges from 1 to 255 Format no ip vrrp lt vrID gt Mode Interface Config ip vrrp authentication This command sets the authorization details value for the virtual router configured on a specified interface The parameter none simple specifies the authorization type for virtual router configured on the specified interface The parameter key is optional it is only required when authorization type is simple text password The parameter vrID is the virtual router ID which has an integer value ranges from 1 to 255 Default The default value for authorization type is No authorization Format ip vrrp vrID authentication none simple lt key gt Mode Interface Config no ip vrrp authentication This command sets the default authorization details value for the virtual router configured on a specified interface Format no ip vrrp vrID authentication Routing Commands 9 57 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Mode Interface Config ip vrrp This command enables the administrative mode of VRRP in the router Default Enabled Format ip vrrp Mode Global Config no ip vrrp This command disables the default administrative mode of VR
372. which is the highest router priority Format ip ospf priority lt 0 255 gt Mode Interface Config no ip ospf priority This command sets thedefault OSPF priority for the specified router interface Format no ip ospf priority Mode Interface Config Routing Commands 9 27 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software ip ospf retransmit interval This command sets the OSPF retransmit Interval for the specified interface The value for lt seconds gt is the number of seconds between link state advertisement retransmissions for adjacencies belonging to this router interface This value is also used when retransmitting database desctions and link state request packets Valid values range from 0 to 3600 1 hour Default 5 Format ip ospf retransmit interval lt 0 3600 gt Mode Interface Config no ip ospf retransmit interval This command sets the default OSPF retransmit Interval for the specified interface Format no ip ospf retransmit interval Mode Interface Config ip ospf transmit delay This command sets the OSPF Transit Delay for the specified interface In addition it sets the estimated number of seconds it takes to transmit a link state update packet over this interface Valid values for seconds range from 1 to 3600 1 hour Default 1 Format ip ospf transmit delay lt 1 3600 gt Mode Interface Config no ip ospf transmit delay This command sets the default O
373. whose match conditions are being referenced by the specified class definition Note There is no not option for this match command Default None Format no match class map refclassname Mode Class Map Config match destination address mac This command adds to the specified class definition a match condition based on the destination MAC address of a packet The lt macaddr gt parameter is any layer 2 MAC address formatted as six two digit hexadecimal numbers separated by colons e g 00 11 22 dd ee ff The lt macmask gt parameter is a layer 2 MAC address bit mask which need not be contiguous and is formatted as six two digit hexadecimal numbers separated by colons e g ff 07 23 ff fe dc The optional not parameter has the effect of negating this match condition for the class 1 e match all destination MAC addresses except for what is specified here 10 6 CLI Commands Differentiated Services 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Default None Format match not destination address mac lt macaddr gt mac mask gt Mode Class Map Config match dstip This command adds to the specified class definition a match condition based on the destination IP address of a packet The lt ipaddr gt parameter specifies an IP address The lt ipmask gt parameter specifies an IP address bit mask note that although similar to a standard subnet mask this bit mask need
374. witch Software set igmp maxresponse This command sets the IGMP Maximum Response time on the system The Maximum Response time is the amount of time in seconds that a switch will wait after sending a query on an interface because it did not receive a report for a particular group in that interface This value must be less than the IGMP Query Interval time value The range is 1 to 3600 seconds Default 10 seconds Format set igmp maxresponse 1 3600 Mode Global Config no set igmp maxresponse This command sets the IGMP Maximum Response time on the system to 10 seconds Format no set igmp maxresponse Mode Global Config set igmp mcrtrexpiretime This command sets the Multicast Router Present Expiration time on the system This is the amount of time in seconds that a switch will wait for a query to be received on an interface before the interface is removed from the list of interfaces with multicast routers attached The range is 0 to 3600 seconds A value of 0 indicates an infinite timeout i e no expiration Default 0 Format set igmp mcrtexpiretime 0 3600 Mode Global Config no set igmp mcrtrexpiretime This command sets the Multicast Router Present Expiration time on the system to 0 A value of 0 indicates an infinite timeout i e no expiration Format no set igmp mcrtexpiretime Mode Global Config show garp This command displays Generic Attributes Registration Protocol GARP information Switching Commands 8 53
375. witch should allow access to the Java applet in the header frame Enabled means the applet can be viewed The factory default is disabled Management VLAN ID Specifies the management VLAN ID show remotecon This command displays telnet settings Format show remotecon Mode Privileged EXEC and User EXEC Remote Connection Login Timeout minutes This object indicates the number of minutes a remote connection session is allowed to remain inac tive before being logged off A zero means there will be no time out May be specified as a number from 0 to 160 The factory default is 5 Maximum Number of Remote Connection Sessions This object indicates the num ber of simultaneous remote connection sessions allowed The fac tory default is 5 Allow New Telnet Sessions Indicates that new telnet sessions will not be allowed when set to no The factory default value is yes show serial This command displays serial communication settings for the switch Format show serial Mode Privileged EXEC and User EXEC Serial Port Login Timeout minutes Specifies the time in minutes of inactivity on a Serial port connection after which the Switch will close the con nection Any numeric value between 0 and 160 is allowed the factory default is 5 A value of 0 disables the timeout Baud Rate The default baud rate at which the serial port will try to connect The available values are 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 Switching Commands 8 25 202
376. yer 3 Managed Switch Software Table 8 2 Broadcast Storm Recovery Thresholds Link Speed High Low 10M 20 10 100M 5 2 1000M 5 2 Format no switchconfig storm control broadcast Mode Global Config storm control flowcontrol This command enables 802 3x flow control for the switch Note This command only applies to full duplex mode ports Default Disabled Format storm control flowcontrol Mode Global Config no storm control flowcontrol This command disables 802 3x flow control for the switch Note This command only applies to full duplex mode ports Format no storm control flowcontrol Mode Global Config vlan This command creates a new VLAN and assigns it an ID The ID is a valid VLAN identification number ID 1 is reserved for the default VLAN VLAN range is 2 4094 Format vlan 2 4094 Mode VLAN database 8 70 Switching Commands 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software no vian This command deletes an existing VLAN The ID is a valid VLAN identification number ID 1 is reserved for the default VLAN VLAN range is 2 4094 Format no vlan lt 2 4094 gt Mode VLAN database vlan acceptframe This command sets the frame acceptance mode per interface For VLAN Only mode untagged frames or priority frames received on this interface are discarded For Admit All mode untagged frames or priority frames received on this interface are
377. yer 3 Managed Switch Software Click the Login link A user name and password dialog box opens like this one Connect to 66 219 86 164 READONLY User name admin Password Remember my password Figure 4 4 User name password dialog box 4 Type the default user name of admin and default of no password or whatever password you have set up Once you have entered your access point name your Web browser should automatically find the 7300 Series L3 Switch and display the home page as shown below Web Based Management Interface 4 3 202 10009 01_060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software Web Based Management Utility Features NETGEAR 24 2 L3 Managed Switch with POE Navigation System EXA Management H System Message Log Event Log Switch Stats Switch Summary FC Utilities Access Eg Security EC PoE EC Switch Routing 3 Traffic Management Smart Wizard NETGEAR 24 2 L3 Managed Switch with PoE System Information System Description FSM7326P BHHHHH HERA ood p on a FSM7326p System Name System Location System Contact IP Address 66 219 86 164 3 System Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4526 1 9 System Up Time 0 days 12 hours 0 minutes Base MAC Address 00 02 BC 00 68 80 Software Version 0 1 0 0 Figure 4 5 System Information page This welcome page displays system information such as System Descript
378. yer 3 Managed Switch Software Format no service policy in out lt policymapname gt Mode Global Config for all system interfaces Mode Interface Config for a specific interface Show Commands The show command set is used in DiffServ to display configuration and status information for e Classes e Policies e Services This information can be displayed in either summary or detailed formats The status information is only shown when the DiffServ administrative mode is enabled it is suppressed otherwise There is also a show command for general DiffServ information that is available at any time show class map This command displays all configuration information for the specified class The lt classname gt is the name of an existing DiffServ class Format show class map lt classname gt Mode Privileged EXEC and User EXEC If the Class Name is specified the following fields are displayed Class Name The name of this class Class Type The class type all any or acl indicating how the match criteria are evaluated for this class A class type of all means every match criterion defined for the class is evaluated simultaneously they must all be true to indicate a class match For a type of any each match criterion is evaluated sequentially and only one need be true to indicate a class match Class type acl rules are evaluated in a hybrid manner with those derived from each ACL Rule grouped and evaluated simultan
379. ynamic VLAN Entries The number of presently active VLAN entries on this switch that have been created by GVRP registration VLAN Deletes The number of VLANs on this switch that have been created and then deleted since the last reboot Time Since Counters Last Cleared The elapsed time in days hours minutes and sec show logging onds since the statistics for this switch were last cleared This command displays the trap log maintained by the switch The trap log contains a maximum of 256 entries that wrap Format Mode show logging Privileged EXEC Number of Traps since last reset The number of traps that have occurred since the last reset of this device Number of Traps since log last displayed The number of traps that have occurred Log since the traps were last displayed Getting the traps by any method terminal interface display Web display upload file from switch etc will result in this counter being cleared to 0 The sequence number of this trap Switching Commands 202 10009 01 060204 User Manual for the NETGEAR 7300 Series Layer 3 Managed Switch Software System Up Time Trap The relative time since the last reboot of the switch at which this trap occurred The relevant information of this trap Note Trap log information is not retained across a switch reset show mac addr table This command displays the forwarding database entries If the command is entered with no parameter

NETGEAR 7300 Series Switch User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents